Building Quality Standards Handbook

Building Quality
Standards Handbook
May 2017
Version: Issued for Use 02 | Last updated: 02 May 2017
Document owner: Priorities and Policy Unit,

Victorian School Building Authority,
Department of Education and Training
Front cover: Arnolds Creek Primary School

Architect: ClarkeHopkinsClarke
Published by the Victorian School Building Authority

Melbourne
May 2017
©State of Victoria (Department of Education

and Training) 2017
The copyright in this document is owned by the

State of Victoria (Department of Education and
Training), or in the case of some materials, by
third parties (third party materials). No part may be
reproduced by any process except in accordance
with the provisions of the Copyright Act 1968,
the National Education Access Licence for
Schools (NEALS) (see below) or with permission.
An educational institution situated in

Australia which is not conducted for profit, or
a body responsible for administering such an
institution may copy and communicate the materials,
other than third party materials, for the educational
purposes of the institution.
Authorised by the Department of Education and Training,

2 Treasury Place, East Melbourne, Victoria, 3002.
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 Key Resources 3
2. LEGISLATIVE REQUIREMENTS 6
2.1 Bushfire Provision – Ministerial Direction No. 3 6
2.2 Victorian Industry Participation Policy (VIPP) 7
3. MODERN SCHOOL DESIGN – AN OVERVIEW 9
4. PLANNING 15
4.1 Introduction 16
4.2 Departmental Planning Process 16
4.3 Space and Area Entitlements 16
4.4 School Design Considerations 17
4.4.1 Anthropometrics 17
4.4.2 Accessibility 17
4.4.3 Flexibility 18
4.4.4 Design Relationships 18
4.4.5 Image and Aesthetics 19
4.4.6 Technology 20
4.4.7 Equipment and Fittings 20
4.4.8 Storage 21
4.4.9 Acoustics 21
4.4.10 Provision for Relocatable Buildings 22
4.5 Shared Use of School Facilities 23
4.5.1 Adjacency of Spaces and Community Use 23
4.5.2 Competition Grade Sporting Facilities 24
4.6 Security and Safety 24
4.7 Environmental Sustainability 25
4.7.1 Orientation 26
4.7.2 Site Planning for Airflow Control 26
4.7.3 Surface Area of Buildings 26
4.7.4 Overshadowing 26
4.7.5 Daylight 27
4.7.6 Zoning 27
4.7.7 Shelter 27
4.7.8 Recycling 27
4.7.9 Landscaping 27
4.8 Energy Planning 28
4.8.1 Energy Engineer 29
4.8.2 Energy Audit 29
4.8.3 Energy Design Process 29
4.8.4 Computer Modelling 29
4.8.5 Testing and Commissioning 29
4.8.6 Maintenance Strategy 29
4.8.7 Selection of Office Equipment 30
4.9 Special Factors 30
4.10 Construction Planning 30
4.10.1 Economy and Cost Effectiveness 30
4.10.2 Design and Materials Efficiency 31
Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017
i
Table of Contents
5. SPECIAL FACTORS 33
5.1 Introduction 33
5.2 Process 33
5.3 Common Special Factors 33
5.3.1 Existing Site and Building Conditions 33
5.3.2 Climatic Conditions 34
5.3.3 Maintenance Access and Servicing 34
5.3.4 Hazardous Materials 35
5.3.5 Multi-storey or Higher than Normal Buildings 35
5.3.6 Specialist and Special Developmental Schools 35
5.4 Items Not Generally Considered ‘Special Factors’ 36
5.5 Increased School Construction Rates 36
6. SUBSTRUCTURE, SUPERSTRUCTURE & FINISHES 38

6.1 Introduction 38
6.2 Substructure 38
6.2.1 Site Conditions and Investigation 38
6.2.2 Preparation and Groundwork 39
6.2.3 Termite Management 39
6.3 Superstructure 39
6.3.1 Use of Appropriate Structural Solutions 39
6.3.2 Concrete 40
6.3.3 Masonry 40
6.3.4 Steel 40
6.3.5 Timber 40
6.4 Roof 41
6.4.1 Designs to Conform to AS/NZS 3500.3 41
6.4.2 Materials and Safe Access 41
6.4.3 Gutters and Downpipes 42
6.4.4 Roof Insulation and Ventilation 44
6.4.5 Skylights and Clerestory Windows 44
6.5 External Walls and Floors 45
6.5.1 Cladding Materials 45
6.5.2 Wall Insulation 46
6.5.3 Wall Colour and Texture 46
6.5.4 Flooring 46
6.5.5 Floor Insulation 46
6.5.6 Balustrades 47
6.6 External Windows 47
6.6.1 Glass 47
6.6.2 Standard Windows 47
6.6.3 Higher Quality Windows 48
6.6.4 Window Finish 48
6.6.5 Window Configuration 48
6.6.6 Sun Control and Ventilation 48
6.6.7 Sealing of Windows 49
6.6.8 Louvre Windows 49
6.6.9 Insect Screens 50
6.6.10 Window Hardware 50
6.6.11 Sizing of Windows 50
6.6.12 Shading of Windows 51
6.7 Doors and Hatches 51
6.7.1 External Doors 51
6.7.2 Hinge Stress 52
6.7.3 Internal Doors 52
6.7.4 Smoke and Fire Doors 53
ii
Table of Contents
6.7.5 Selection and Detailing of Operable Walls 53

6.7.6 Proprietary Aluminium Stud Partition Type Door Frames 53
6.7.7 Door Hardware 53
6.8 Ceilings 54
6.8.1 Ceiling Materials 54
6.8.2 Spaces above Ceilings 54
6.8.3 Ceiling Heights 55
6.8.4 Clearance Heights under Stairs and Bulkheads 55
6.8.5 Access to Lights 55
6.9 Internal Walls 55
6.9.1 Room Dividers 55
6.9.2 Internal Glazing 56
6.9.3 Operable Walls 56
6.9.4 Colour 56
6.9.5 Thermal Mass 56
6.10 Wall and Floor Finishes 57
6.10.1 Wall Finishes 57
6.10.2 Floor Finishes 58
6.10.3 Ceiling Finishes 60
6.10.4 Paint 61
6.11 Acoustics 63
6.11.1 Statutory Requirements and Standards 63
6.11.2 Acoustic Floor Planning 64
6.11.3 Sound Isolation between Spaces 64
6.11.4 Satisfactory Construction for Sound Insulation between Rooms 66
6.11.5 Sound Isolation between Spaces and Connecting Doors 68
6.11.6 Reverberation Control and Ambient Noise Level 70
6.11.7 Satisfactory Systems for Reverberation Control 71
6.11.8 External Noise 72
6.11.9 Rain Noise 72
7. INTERNAL SERVICES 74
7.1 Material Selection 74
7.2 Sanitary Fixtures 74
7.2.1 General 74
7.2.2 WC Suites 74
7.2.3 Urinals 75
7.2.4 Basins 75
7.2.5 General Purpose Sinks 75
7.2.6 General Purpose Tubs and Troughs 76
7.2.7 Showers 76
7.2.8 Cleaners’ Sinks 76
7.2.9 Boiling-water Units 76
7.2.10 Drinking Fountains and Troughs 76
7.2.11 Ablution Troughs 77
7.2.12 Floor Waste Gullies (FWG) 77
7.2.13 Tundishes 77
7.2.14 Clay and Ablution Troughs 77
7.2.15 Drip Trough and Racks 77
7.2.16 Frame Baths 77
7.2.17 Photographic Troughs 77
7.2.18 Potting Troughs 77
7.2.19 Laboratory Sinks 78
7.2.20 Safety Sprays 78
7.2.21 Fume Cupboards 78
7.2.22 Hand Driers 78
7.2.23 Sanitary Facilities for People with Disabilities 78
iii
Table of Contents
7.3 Sanitary Plumbing 78

7.3.1 Pipe Work 78
7.3.2 Trade Waste Application 79
7.3.3 Treatment Apparatus 79
7.3.4 Trade Waste Operation Documentation 79
7.4 Water Supply 79
7.4.1 General 79
7.4.2 Pipe Work, Valves and Fittings 80
7.4.3 Tapware 80
7.4.4 Flow Rates (SWEP Requirement) 80
7.4.5 Hot-water Units 80
7.4.6 Water Supply Issues 82
7.5 Gas Services 82
7.5.1 General 82
7.5.2 Connection Process 82
7.5.4 Tariffs 83
7.5.4 Meters 83
7.5.5 Gas Supply to Relocatable Buildings 84
7.5.6 Pipe Work – Above Ground 84
7.5.7 Emergency Isolation Valves 84
7.5.8 Outlets 84
7.5.9 Gas Booster 84
7.6 Heating 84
7.6.1 General 84
7.6.2 Centralised Plant versus Individual Units 89
7.6.3 Primary Schools 89
7.6.4 Secondary Colleges 90
7.6.5 Heating System Controls 90
7.6.6 Gas-Fired Plant 90
7.6.7 Water Heating Boilers 91
7.6.8 Plant Rooms 91
7.7 Ventilation 92
7.7.1 Energy Targets 92
7.7.2 Natural Ventilation 92
7.7.3 Toilet and Change Room Exhaust System 93
7.7.4 Commercial Kitchen Exhaust Systems 93
7.7.5 Kiln Exhaust Systems 94
7.7.6 Fans 94
7.7.7 Air Filters 95
7.7.8 Ductwork 96
7.7.9 Air Grilles 96
7.8 Cooling 97
7.8.1 Preliminary Note on Thermal Comfort and Cooling Policy 97
7.8.2 General 97
7.8.3 Evaporative Cooling 100
7.8.4 Air conditioning – Room and Packaged Plant 101
7.8.5 Refrigeration 103
7.8.6 Electrical Supply 103
7.9 Fire Protection 104
7.9.1 Fire Hydrants 104
7.9.2 Fire Hose Reels and Extinguishers 104
7.9.3 Smoke and Fire Doors 104
7.9.4 Smoke Detectors and Sound Alarms 104
7.9.5 Emergency Signs and Lighting 104
7.9.6 Maintenance Log Books 105
7.10 Electrical Lighting and Power 105
7.10.1 General 105
7.10.2 Design 105
iv
Table of Contents
7.10.3 Supply – General 106

7.10.4 Red Energy – For all sites with an expected annual usage of >160MWh. 106
7.10.5 Powerdirect – For sites with an expected annual usage of <160MWh. 109
7.10.6 Main Switchboard 110
7.10.7 Distribution Switchboards 111
7.10.8 Wiring 111
7.10.9 Power and Special Connections 112
7.10.10 Artificial Lighting 113
7.11 Special Services 123
7.11.1 Fume Cupboards 123
7.11.2 Compressed Air 124
7.11.3 Reticulated Gas Services 125
7.11.4 Dust Extraction System 126
7.11.5 Lightning Protection 126
7.12 Centralised Energy Systems 126
7.13 Storage 127
8. EXTERNAL SERVICES 129

8.1 Introduction 129
8.2 External Stormwater Drainage 129
8.2.1 General 129
8.2.2 Rainwater Collection 129
8.2.3 Pipe Work and Structures 130
8.2.4 Stormwater Drainage Issues 131
8.3 External Sewer Drainage 131
8.3.1 Pipe Work and Structures 131
8.3.2 Sewer Design Issues 131
8.4 External Water Supply 132
8.4.2 Backflow Prevention 132
8.4.3 Irrigation Systems 132
8.4.4 Other External Supply Issues 132
8.4.5 Potable Water Tanks 132
8.5 External Gas 133
8.5.1 Natural Gas Meters 133
8.5.2 LP Gas Storage 134
8.5.3 Pipe Work – Below Ground 134
8.5.4 Gas Booster 134
8.6 External Fire Protection 134
8.6.1 General 134
8.6.2 Fire Hydrants 134
8.6.4 Other Issues 134
8.7 External Electric Light and Power 135
8.7.1 External Power 135
8.7.2 Security and Access Lighting 135
8.7.3 Underground Services 136
9. COMMUNICATION SERVICES 138

9.1.1 National Broadband Network (NBN) 139
9.2 Infrastructure 139
9.2.1 Cabling Design and Infrastructure 139
9.2.2 Cabling Design Elements 140
9.2.3 Number of Network Points Required 140
9.2.4 eduSTAR.net Wireless Connectivity 141
v
Table of Contents
9.2.5 VicSmart Network 142

9.2.6 eduSTAR.ISP - Internet Service 142
9.2.7 Communication Room & Cabinets 143
9.3 Communication Services 143
9.3.1 Data 143
9.3.2 Voice (Telephones) 144
9.3.3 Security (Intruder Detection System) 144
9.4 Budget 144
9.5 Television Distribution System 145
9.6 Public Address System 145
9.7 Clock-Bell Services 146
9.8 As-built Documentation 146
9.9 Hearing Augmentation 146
9.9.1 Accessible Buildings Program 146
9.9.2 Hearing Augmentation in Existing School Buildings 147
9.9.3 Hearing Augmentation for Capital Works Projects 147
9.9.4 Hearing Augmentation Signage 147
10. SITE WORKS & SCHOOL LANDSCAPING 149

10.2 Roads, Footpaths and Hardcourts 151
10.2.1 Vehicle Access Roads 151
10.2.2 Parking Areas 151
10.2.3 Provision of Bus Parking for Specialist and Special Development Schools 152
10.2.4 Waste Disposal 152
10.2.5 Pedestrian Paths 153
10.2.6 Hardcourts 154
10.2.7 Paved Areas 154
10.3 Play Equipment 155
10.3.1 Playground Equipment 155
10.3.2 Fitness Equipment 156
10.4 Fencing 157
10.4.1 Standard Perimeter Fencing 157
10.4.2 Security Fencing 157
10.4.3 Pool Fencing 157
10.5 Landscaping 158
10.5.1 Sports Playing Field 158
10.5.2 Irrigation Systems 158
10.5.3 General Grassed Area 159
10.5.4 Garden Beds 159
10.5.5 Shade Areas 159
10.5.6 Landscaping in Bushfire Prone Areas 161
10.6 Covered Ways 161
10.7 Improvements (new schools) – Landscape Finishes 161
10.7.1 Seating 161
10.7.2 Litter Bins 161
10.7.3 Flagpole 161
10.7.4 External Signage 162
10.8 Landscape Cultivation and Planting Guidelines 162
10.8.1 General Planting Hints 162
10.8.2 Vegetation Fuel Management 163
10.8.3 Particular Plants – General Characteristics and Information 164
10.8.4 Particular Plants – Bushfire Prone Areas 166
11. WORKPLACE HEALTH & SAFETY 170

11.1 Safety in Design 170
vi
Table of Contents
11.2 Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004 170

11.3 A Handbook for Workplaces – OH&S in Schools – A Practical Guide for School
Leaders 170
11.4 Sub-floor Spaces 173
11.5 Hazardous Materials and Conditions 173
11.6 Asbestos 173
11.7 Copper-Chrome-Arsenate (CCA) Treated Timber 174
11.8 Occupational Health and Safety References 175
12. PROJECT COMPLETION – BUILDING MANUALS & MAINTENANCE 177

12.1 Project Completion Phase 177
12.2 Building Manual Objective 177
12.2.1 Included Asset Items 177
12.2.2 Required Information 180
12.2.3 Manual Layout 181
12.3 Manuals and Maintenance Log Books 183
12.4 Termites 184
APPENDIX 1 BUILDING ELEMENTS 186
APPENDIX 2 TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS & STANDARD DRAWINGS 204
APPENDIX 3 POSTCODE AREAS WITHIN NATHERS ZONES 230
APPENDIX 4 COMPETITION GRADE SPORTING FACILITIES 233
Glossary of Acronyms and Abbreviations 236
vii
Introduction
1. INTRODUCTION
What is the Building Quality Standards Handbook?
The Building Quality Standards Handbook (BQSH or the Handbook) sets the minimum quality criteria
for all Department building projects, including new construction, refurbishment and maintenance
works. It has been established to ensure a high quality and consistent approach to the development
of school facilities across Victoria.
The Department has acquired a considerable body of experience from the delivery and subsequent
evaluation of a range of school building projects. This knowledge has been greatly abetted by the
feedback received from schools and their communities. The purpose of the BQSH is to provide those
involved in the design of schools with the benefit of this experience and knowledge, thereby
enabling demonstrated best practice to be incorporated into building projects.
The BQSH also includes an overview of the Department’s modern school design principles and
planning considerations, and provides a resource and basic checklist for those involved in Project
Review and Evaluation Panel (PREP) assessments.
The BQSH provides guidance to the Victorian School Building Authority, regional offices and portfolio
manager, schools, principal consultants and builders – indeed, all who participate in the
development of capital works and maintenance projects.
While the BQSH describes the standard elements of a building project, it is not prescriptive in its
approach and is not intended to be a comprehensive guide to all aspects of a project. Planners are
encouraged to exercise their creativity within available budgets and the minimum benchmarks
outlined. Similarly, materials and building practices detailed are not exhaustive, and those not
covered in this document should be assessed in relation to those included. An alternative material
or building practice should only be considered where it provides, without compromise, a more cost-
effective solution.
This BQSH is updated regularly to reflect change and promote the latest best practice. All building
projects are done in accordance with the version of the BQSH in place at the time.
All work in schools is to be undertaken in accordance with relevant building and safety
regulations, codes and standards. In particular, every effort has been made to ensure that the
BQSH complies with the Building Code of Australia (BCA) and applicable Australian Standards. All
design, materials, workmanship, testing and commissioning shall comply with the latest revision
of the BCA and relevant standards and legislation.
What is the role of infrastructure in effective education delivery?
The Department is committed to providing quality learning facilities for all students. Infrastructure is
an important factor in creating positive learning environments for students, and can lead to greater
student engagement, wellbeing and outcomes. This has been consistently demonstrated through
international research, which has shown a link between the quality of school facilities and outcomes
1
Introduction
for students1. Studies in the United States have also found higher literacy and numeracy
achievement in students learning in new or modernised facilities relative to those in non-
modernised schools buildings2.
The Department is committed to providing an environment which:

• promotes health, engagement and wellbeing,
• is safe and inclusive,
• empowers students and builds school pride, and
• encourages intellectual engagement and self-awareness.
The Department understands that the strengths, needs and interests of students will vary both
within and between schools, and this must be considered when planning infrastructure projects.
School facilities must also be inclusive and cater for students with diverse physical, cognitive, social-
emotional and sensory abilities. Early consideration should be given to how all students who may
attend the school will experience its environment. Facilities need to be made more inclusive to
enable every student to achieve their full potential and experience a positive learning pathway.
The Department’s commitment is reflected in its Guiding Design Principles for Inclusive Schools.
These principles ensure, to the greatest extent possible, the design of educational environments that
are usable by all people without adaptation or specialised design.
There are three categories under the Guiding Design Principles for Inclusive Schools.
The following Education principles capture the Department’s vision and values:
1. Learners and learning are central. Planning is centred on providing learning environments
that develop the whole person - intellectually, emotionally, socially, physically and culturally.
2. Schools are community hubs. Schools and school networks are open to and provide for the
needs of all students in the community by engaging and developing partnerships with people
and services.
3. Diversity is celebrated. Schools and school design ensures the inclusion of all learners by
respecting and honouring diversity within the school and wider community.
4. A welcoming environment. The school environment “understands” and supports the physical
and emotional health and wellbeing of all students and staff.
The Education Facilities Design principles capture the implications of the education principles for the
design of new and updated facilities:
5. Local schools are accessible to all. Design facilities to maximise accessibility to all members of
the community. Consider locations which are easily and safely accessed by the greatest
number of students, by sustainable modes of transport.
6. Promote a collaborative approach to provision planning within school networks. Identify a
number of schools in each network with a specialist focus area; ensuring students with specific
needs are well accommodated at a school somewhere within their local community.
7. Co-locate facilities that are tailored for students with disabilities within mainstream schools,
ahead of other options. Design for student interaction and allow for graduated levels of
support e.g. room for aides and flexible spaces that are sensitive to the needs of all learners.
1 PricewaterhouseCoopers 2003, Building Better Performance: An Empirical Assessment of the Learning and Other Impacts
of Schools Capital Investment, United Kingdom Department for Education and Skills, Research Report No 407.
2 Fisher, K. 2000, Building Better Outcomes – The Impact of School Infrastructure on Student Outcomes and Behaviour,
Department of Education, Training and Youth Affairs.
2
Introduction
Siblings can travel together to a single local school where all learning needs are welcomed and
met.
8. Create facilities that offer a variety of spaces to meet all needs. A choice of indoor and
outdoor spaces is provided to support individual and group learning and engagement needs.
Microenvironment design takes into account the needs of students with a range of disabilities
and supports maximum inclusion and participation by all students.
9. Design facilities that are adaptable for changing purposes. School facilities are capable of
being used for different organisational models and by diverse students in different ways over
the life of the buildings without requiring significant modification.
10. Design schools to serve future communities. School facilities are designed and built to serve
diverse communities for 30–50 years or more and can be reconfigured for changing needs.
The following Universal Design Principles, which are discussed in more detail in Section 3, are also
supported by the Department:
1. Equitable use. The design is useful and marketable to people with diverse abilities.
2. Flexibility in use. The design accommodates a wide range of individual preferences and
abilities.
3. Simple and intuitive use. Use of the design is easy to understand, regardless of the user’s
experience, knowledge, language skills, or current concentration level.
4. Perceptible information. The design communicates necessary information effectively to the
user, regardless of ambient conditions or the user’s sensory abilities.
5. Tolerance for error. The design minimises hazards and the adverse consequences of
accidental or unintended actions.
6. Low physical effort. The design can be used efficiently and comfortably and with a minimum
of fatigue.
7. Size and space for approach and use. Appropriate size and space is provided for approach,
reach, manipulation and use regardless of user’s body size, posture or mobility.
1.1 Key Resources

In addition to the Handbook, those involved in the development of capital works and maintenance
projects should also refer to the following key resources.
Project Management Framework
The Project Management Framework provides schools and their communities, Project Managers,
Principal Design Consultants, Cost Managers and other consultants with the overall framework
within which Capital and Maintenance projects must be delivered.
The PMF has been developed to ensure consistency in the planning, delivery, process and
governance across all projects; and replaces the Capital Works Procedures Manual, December 2011.
The PMF is to be used in the delivery of Capital and Maintenance projects with a value greater than
$200,000; and is applicable to all school-led, partnership and Department-led projects.

https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/sc/sites/Infonline/Policies%20Guidelines%20and%20Procedures/
Forms/PMF.aspx (access restricted to Department personnel, school users and registered users with
an Edumail account and pin number).
3
Introduction
Key Web-based Resources

Users of this Handbook are referred to the Department’s school infrastructure-related websites:
► Public access:
http://www.education.vic.gov.au/school/principals/infrastructure/Pages/default.aspx
► Department personnel and school users with an Edumail account and pin number:
https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/Services/Schools/Infrastructure
► Principal consultants with an Edumail account and pin number, giving them access to key
documents: https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/sc/sites/Infonline/default.aspx
Emergency & Security Management
Users of the Handbook are also referred to the Security Services Unit for advice in relation to
security and crime-preventative design strategies:
► Telephone: (03) 9589 6266;
► email: ssu@edumail.vic.gov.au;
► Website:
https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/Services/Schools/Infrastructure/Emergency/Pages/defa
ult.aspx (access restricted to Department personnel, school users and registered users with
Handbook Availability
An electronic version (PDF) of the Building Quality Standards Handbook is available to registered
principal consultants on the Department’s School Infrastructure Principal Consultant webpage under
Documents / Policies, Guidelines and Procedures:
https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/sc/sites/Infonline/default.aspx
4
Introduction
Section 2:
Legislative Requirements
Castlemaine Secondary College

Architect: Y2 Architect
5
Section 2 – Legislative Requirements
2. LEGISLATIVE REQUIREMENTS
All design, materials and construction practice must comply with the latest version of the Building
Code of Australia, the Building Act 1993, Building Regulations 2006 and relevant Australian
Standards and legislation.
The Planning and Environment Act 1987 and the Planning and Environment Regulations 2015 may
also be applicable.
The Dangerous Goods (Storage and Handling) Regulations 2012 require the design of laboratories to
be in accordance with Australian Standard AS 2982 – Laboratory Construction.
When designing storage areas, the Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2007 must be taken
into consideration.
Workplace health and safety, especially in relation to hazardous materials and asbestos, are crucial
considerations (refer to Section 11 – Workplace Health and Safety for more detail), and the Safe
Drinking Water Act 2003 and Disability Discrimination Act 1992 must also be borne in mind when
developing school facilities.
Principal consultants must design facilities which meet the legislative requirements. In addition to
these requirements, consultants need to consider the needs of the school community. Section 3
Modern School Design – An Overview refers to the design principles to be considered when designing
school facilities, including the importance of Universal Design.
2.1 Bushfire Provision – Ministerial Direction No. 3

Ministerial Direction No. 3 – Bushfire provisions for buildings of a public nature (MD3) came into
effect on 1 February 2010 for all projects requiring a building permit.
In relation to the design process for buildings of a public nature, including schools, the Ministerial
Direction aims to ensure that government and public authorities undertake bushfire attack risk
assessments based on methods described in AS 3959-2009 Construction of buildings in bushfire
prone areas. Dependent on the site and its assessed level of risk, the design of new or refurbished
facilities must account for this potential threat.
Those working on Department projects need to be fully informed of these requirements. To achieve
this, consultants will need to have qualified staff or be able to access suitably qualified practitioners.
All projects progressing to construction must comply with the requirements of the Ministerial
Direction and AS 3959-2009.
6
Section 2 – Legislative Requirements
2.2 Victorian Industry Participation Policy (VIPP)

Further to the requirements of the Department of Education and Training, users of the Handbook
should also be aware of the Victorian Industry Participation Policy. The VIPP aims to boost local
employment and business growth by expanding market opportunities for Victorian companies.
The VIPP requires government departments and agencies to consider competitive local suppliers,
including SMEs, when awarding contracts valued at:
► $1 million or more in regional Victoria or

► $3 million or more in metropolitan Melbourne or for statewide activities.
For further information, visit the VIPP page on the Department of Economic Development, Jobs,
Transport and Resources website http://www.dsdbi.vic.gov.au/projects-and-initiatives/victorian-
industry-participation-policy
It is recommended that specified fittings and equipment be sourced, where possible, from
Australian suppliers in order to assure availability of replacement parts and facilitate
maintenance.
7
Section 3:
Section 2 – Legislative Requirements Modern School Design – An Overview
Northern School for Autism

Architect: Hede Architects
8
Section 3 – Modern School Design – An Overview
3. MODERN SCHOOL DESIGN – AN OVERVIEW

The Department of Education and Training’s vision for school design reflects 21st century thinking
about pedagogy and space. New spaces must be adaptable and support a variety of teaching and
learning approaches, from team teaching to one-on-one lessons, and encourage collaboration
between students and teachers.
Those involved in the design of schools should consider the following design principles to ensure
schools develop environments and buildings that are safe, sustainable, durable and aesthetically
pleasing as well as functional and fit for purpose.
For further information and resources on school design, visit:

http://www.education.vic.gov.au/school/principals/infrastructure/Pages/design.aspx
Design Principles to Consider

Universal Design
The Department supports the concept of universal design. We believe that it constitutes best
practice in the delivery of environments that ensure access and participation for all.
A working group of architects, product designers, engineers and environmental design researchers
at the Centre for Universal Design, North Carolina State University, have created seven universal
design principles to guide the concept’s implementation. These principles have been widely
accepted internationally, and the Department supports their inclusion in school design.
All principal consultants engaged by the Department for new school or upgrade projects must have
regard to these seven universal design principles. Many of these are already taken into consideration
by designers when complying with the Disability Discrimination Act 1992 and related standards such
as, the Disability (Access to Premises- Buildings) Standards.
While there may be some overlap, the universal design principles go beyond these minimum standards
and provide greater guidance and direction on how to design facilities that better accommodate
students with varied needs and abilities. The seven universal design principles are outlined below:
1. Equitable use
The design is useful and marketable to people with diverse abilities.
Examples:
• Having a ramp integrated with stairs, both under cover.
• Outdoor seating with different arm and back configurations and at different heights so
that it may be used by a variety of people.
• Variety of different spaces to accommodate students with a range of disabilities.
2. Flexibility in use
The design accommodates a wide range of individual preferences and abilities.
Examples:
• Adjustable workbenches.
9
• Bins operable by one hand to accommodate left and right handed students.
• Water taps that are easy to grasp and operate.
• The creation of spaces that can be set up and used in a variety of ways.
3. Simple and Intuitive use

Use of the design is easy to understand, regardless of the user’s experience, knowledge,
language skills, or current concentration level.
Examples:
• “Wayfinding” (referring to the ways in which people orient themselves and navigate
from place to place) with tactile information.
• Colour coding on walls and doors.
• Continuous pathways (no breaks) to ensure easy travel between buildings.
• Avoidance of overhanging structures to facilitate unobstructed access for vision
impaired students who may use a cane.
4. Perceptible Information
The design communicates necessary information effectively to the user, regardless of ambient
conditions or the user’s sensory abilities.
Examples:
• Signage at height visible to wheelchair users.
• PA and emergency communication systems having both auditory and visual cues.
• Glazing and placement of windows to avoid glare for vision impaired students.
• Room acoustics designed to assist hearing impaired students.
• Social scripts or pictorials to communicate room function.
• Adjustable lighting to assist vision impaired students.
5. Tolerance for error

The design minimises hazards and the adverse consequences of accidental or unintended
actions.
Examples:
• Column detailing and placement to assist people with vision impairment in
differentiating columns.
• Floor at equal level where possible to ensure there is no tripping hazard.
• Edge definition for steps.
6. Low Physical Effort

The design can be used efficiently and comfortably and with a minimum of fatigue.
Examples:
• Loop handles on toilet doors.
• Doors that automatically open for students with wheelchairs or staff carrying heavy
goods.
• Controls, such as light switches and thermostats, at heights easily accessible for students
in wheelchairs.
10
7. Size and Space for Approach and Use

Appropriate size and space is provided for approach, reach, manipulation and use regardless of
user’s body size, posture or mobility.
Examples:
• Appropriate circulation space in toilets suitable for students in wheelchairs.
• Floor surfaces comfortable for students with differing sensory abilities.
Additional considerations
• Universal design should be given primary consideration. Aesthetic design features
should be avoided if they will have unintended consequences for the accessibility of the
school.
• Principal consultants should try and create spaces that are non-threatening and non-
distracting for students with cognitive disabilities.
• Consider placing items, such as lamp posts and bins, at regular intervals to provide
sensory cues.
• Consider placing essential facilities and specialist buildings on the ground floor and near
the entry point to the school, so that they may be easily accessible by all.
• Principal consultants should consider footpath transition from schools to public spaces
by placing accessible pathways which extend beyond school grounds.
• Principal consultants should consider installing reinforced ceiling, support structures and
rails for students requiring hoists.
• Hand driers can affect students with noise sensitivity and consideration should be given
to noise-reduced hand drying options.
Future Use of Learning Spaces

Building designs should enable schools to:
► evolve over time, in their current or a reconfigured form, to accommodate changing
pedagogical approaches, models of education, changing enrolment numbers and community
linkages; and
► be flexible in how the school and community will use the facilities in the future.
Classrooms – Flexibility of Learning Spaces

Classrooms should be designed to:
► be flexible and functional to support contemporary learning and teaching practices with a
focus on active, student-centred learning;
► allow students to work independently or in small groups within the classroom;
► provide breakout areas to allow students to work independently, with peers, or on a one-on-
one basis with the teachers;
► allow teachers to operate effectively from any location in the room;
► allow for team teaching approaches e.g. movable walls between spaces, and flexible and
adaptable furniture; and
► incorporate sliding doors and operable walls to allow home-bases to exist in a single
contained form, when acoustic, physical or visual separation is needed.
11
Teacher Support Spaces

Building designs should enable teachers to:
► plan collaboratively with colleagues, prepare class materials or write reports when not in
their classrooms;
► access learning resources near their work spaces, and have space for storing and viewing or
reproducing digital and hard copies;
► have discrete spaces available for group meetings and interviews with parents; and
► secure personal resources and effects.
Student Support Spaces

Building designs should enable students to:
► meet socially or work with peers;
► securely store their personal effects, bags, coats, books and sports gear; and
► store and review information such as books or electronic resources, and reproduce digital
and hard copy information.
Information Communications Technology (ICT)
Learning spaces should:
► support new ways of learning and linking students to the broader community and to the
world;
► provide easy access to computers and other electronic resources;
► incorporate wireless technology, interactive white boards, data shows or other multi-media
and laptops; and
► be flexible to adapt to changes in technology.
Outdoor Learning Spaces
New building designs should incorporate outdoor learning spaces that are easily accessible to
assist with meeting individual and social needs of students and provide greater options for
teachers.
Internal Environmental Quality
Learning environments should create physical and emotional health and well-being, and
promote positive social interaction between all students and staff.
Designs should incorporate:
► good use of natural light as well as controllable lighting that allows for daylight harvesting;
► good ventilation and airflow;
► good internal acoustics and minimisation of external noise;
► insulated ceilings and walls, creating thermally efficient internal environments; and
12
► passive and active features to maintain a comfortable indoor temperature.
Environmentally Sustainable Design
Incorporate sustainable environmental principles in the design, construction and operation of

buildings in schools to maximise energy and water efficiency and minimise waste. The
following elements should be considered:
► building orientation for optimum passive heating and cooling performance;

► landscaping choices for optimum passive heating and cooling performance;
► highly efficient/low energy consumption heating, cooling and lighting systems;
► water saving and low usage devices, especially toilets and hand basins;
► rain water collection tanks to harvest water for use in the schools systems, including toilets
and irrigation; and
► areas within each block where recyclable materials (glass, paper, etc.) can be stored before
their removal to the school’s central recycling area.
Aesthetics of School Design
Visual Appeal
Incorporate characteristics of high quality design that inspire and create a sense of belonging
among students and the broader school community.
Culture and Surrounds

Each school community has its own unique culture, surroundings and natural environment that
can be incorporated into the design, including:
► the cultural diversity of the school’s community or its surrounding environment;
► surrounding street network, traffic and pedestrian infrastructure;
► nearby community or recreational facilities; and
► the urban form and character of the local environment.
Community and Safety
Connection to Community
New school designs have the ability to connect learning with the community, reaching beyond the
confines of the classroom to bridge the gap between community and school.
Designs should consider:

► the broader community context to foster joint use arrangements, sharing and out of hours
community access wherever possible, e.g. as community halls or meeting spaces, sports
fields and performing arts centres; and
► allowing the community to support student learning by accessing part of the school for
lectures, demonstrations, presentations or working with teachers.
13
Safety and Security

Designs must consider the safety and security of all students, staff and visitors while also minimising
security risks for buildings and other school assets.
Buildings should be designed to:

► adhere to occupational health and safety standards;
► provide safe access to facilities including toilets;
► allow teachers to easily monitor or supervise all areas of the school;
► provide good lighting around and in new buildings, including night lighting for areas used
after school hours;
► allow administration areas to be prominent and main point to control access to the school;
► provide safe access to car parks after hours;
► where possible, compartmentalise facilities for out of hours use; and minimise roof access.
14
Section 4:
Department of Education and Training Planning
Section 4 – Planning
4. Planning
4.1 Introduction
The development or upgrade of new school facilities involves a range of inputs including
Departmental planning procedures and facility schedules, relevant building and safety regulations,
codes and standards, school and community aspirations, local knowledge and design imagination.
It is essential that the resulting facilities address both today and tomorrow’s educational programs
as well as flexibility, accessibility, energy efficiency and low maintenance requirements.
The following sections outline key planning considerations in the design of school facilities. The
sections also contain advice gained from the Department’s considerable experience in delivering a
range of school building projects and through post occupancy evaluations of delivered facilities.
4.2 Departmental Planning Process
The Departmental planning process for capital and maintenance projects is outlined in the
Department’s Project Management Framework (PMF).
The PMF outlines the procedures for each of the key phases for the delivery of capital and
maintenance projects.
The PMF also outlines the three management options available to schools for the delivery of their
project: School-led; Partnership with DET and DET-led.

https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/sc/sites/Infonline/Policies%20Guidelines%20and%20Procedures
/Project%20Management%20Framework%20(July%202014).pdf (access restricted to Department
personnel, school users and registered users with an Edumail account and pin number).
4.3 Space and Area Entitlements Northern School for Autism

Architect: Hede Architects
Space and area entitlements for school facilities are broadly defined within the Facilities Schedules
listed on the School Infrastructure Principal Consultants section of the Infrastructure and
Sustainability Division website (https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/sc/sites/Infonline/default.aspx)
4. PLANNING
15
4.1 Introduction
The development or upgrade of new school facilities involves a range of inputs including
Departmental planning procedures and facility schedules, relevant building and safety regulations,
codes and standards, school and community aspirations, local knowledge and design imagination.
It is essential that the resulting facilities address both today and tomorrow’s educational programs
as well as flexibility, accessibility, energy efficiency and low maintenance requirements.
The following sections outline key planning considerations in the design of school facilities. The
sections also contain advice gained from the Department’s considerable experience in delivering a
range of school building projects and through post occupancy evaluations of delivered facilities.
4.2 Departmental Planning Process
The Departmental planning process for capital and maintenance projects is outlined in the
Department’s Project Management Framework (PMF).
The PMF outlines the procedures for each of the key phases for the delivery of capital and
maintenance projects.
The PMF also outlines the three management options available to schools for the delivery of their
project: School-led, Partnership with DET and DET-led.
https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/sc/sites/Infonline/Policies%20Guidelines%20and%20Procedures/
Forms/PMF.aspx (access restricted to Department personnel, school users and registered users with
4.3 Space and Area Entitlements
Space and area entitlements for school facilities are broadly defined within the Facilities Schedules
listed on the School Infrastructure Principal Consultants section of the Infrastructure and
Sustainability Division website (https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/sc/sites/Infonline/default.aspx)
(access restricted to Department personnel, school users and registered users with an Edumail
account and pin number).
These schedules are used when planning a new school or when upgrading existing schools.
They outline a standard but they also offer flexibility within budgets provided. Given an adequate
accommodation of core curriculum needs and student numbers, spaces can be arranged and
modified to suit the particular profile of a school.
16
4.4 School Design Considerations

The following sections outline key considerations in the design of modern school learning spaces and
school sites.
The information and guidance contained in this section has been gained through the Department’s
extensive experience in delivering a range of infrastructure projects, and through post occupancy
evaluations of delivered facilities.
4.4.1 Anthropometrics
Buildings and fittings should be designed or selected so as to be suitable for both students and
adults. AS/NZS 1429.1 and AS/NZS 1429.2 provide guidance.
4.4.2 Accessibility
Access and Interior/Exterior Connection
Access and egress should:

► be easily defined and located;
► be on a single level;
► be at least to standards specified in AS 1428 Design for access and mobility and AS 2890
Parking facilities; and
► enable safe, equitable and dignified access to and emergency evacuation from all facilities.
External areas should reflect the activities of adjoining buildings.
Provision for All Occupants
Accessibility and amenity of the school and its site must be available to all authorised occupants,
including people with disabilities, whether students, staff, parents or other visitors.
Required accessibility and amenity are stipulated in the Building Code of Australia and Disability
(Access to Premises – Buildings) Standards 2010.
The provisions of the latest versions of the following Australian Standards must also be followed:
► AS 1428 Design for access and mobility
AS 1428.1: General requirements for access – New building work.
AS 1428.2: Enhanced and additional requirements – Buildings and facilities.
AS 1428.3: Requirements for children and adolescents with physical disabilities.
AS/NZS 1428.4.1: Means to assist the orientation of people with vision impairment - Tactile
ground surface indicators.
AS1428.5: Communication for people who are deaf or hearing impaired.
► AS/NZS 2890.1 Parking facilities – Off-street car parking.
► AS 1735.12 Lifts, escalators and moving walks - Facilities for persons with disabilities.
► AS/NZS 2890.6 Part 6: Off-street parking for people with disabilities.
17
4.4.3 Flexibility
Flexibility should be a key factor in design solutions. Buildings need to offer schools flexible options
for daily use as well as an opportunity for simple refurbishment or remodelling as future needs
change. Options to consider include activity areas grouped or separated with operable walls (or
other moveable partitioning) as well as the use of light and mobile furniture.
4.4.4 Design Relationships
Successful space planning pursues an efficient combination of teacher resources and organisation,
student grouping and teaching/learning methods. A range of issues and relationships need to be
considered in achieving this, as outlined below.
Intelligent space planning will reduce the cost of complying with the recommendations of the
Building Quality Standards Handbook and minimise occupant concerns and complaints. Spaces with
opposing acoustic requirements, for example, should be located as far apart as practicable, while
open-plan and small-group areas should be purposefully arranged in accordance with teacher,
student and curricula needs.
Activities
The relationship between activities and their compatibility and flexibility should include:
► separation of noisy and quiet areas;
► position of multi-purpose/physical education facilities to oval, hard court and car park;
► position of administration to car park and main school entry; and
► central location of toilet blocks.
Subsections of the School
The relationship between subsections of the school should cover:

► junior/middle/senior school organisation;
► general purpose/specialist facilities;
► departments/faculties; and
► indoor and outdoor learning spaces.
Buildings and Site
The relationship between buildings and the site should cover:

► buildings and open space;
► slope and contours;
► flood levels and overland drainage;
► bushfire attack levels of each building on site;
► services;
18
► signposting;
► pedestrian and vehicle movement;
► deliveries;
► efficient removal of recyclables and waste; and
► emergency access.
Note: useful consideration of site-related issues requires the early provision of contoured site plans
showing the cross-fall and points of stormwater discharge.
School and Environment
The relationship between the school and the environment should account for:
► vegetation;
► flood levels;
► soil conditions;
► climate/microclimate (design should be compact to minimise external travel in areas of
high exposure);
► neighbouring properties;
► solar access; and
► capture and use of rainwater.
School and Community
The relationship between the school and its community should include:
► out-of-hours use of facilities by students, families and other visitors; and
► noisy activities, including vehicle access and car parking, affecting adjacent properties, and
including out-of-hours use.
4.4.5 Image and Aesthetics
Design should take into account the role of the school in its community. Features should include:
► an obvious point of entry and address;
► avoidance of extreme architectural features as solutions;
► sign posting and organisation to promote ease of access and movement within;
► appropriate use of colour schemes; and
► acknowledgement of surrounds and community.
19
4.4.6 Technology
School buildings should, where possible and appropriate, facilitate the use of current and future
technology and promote the use of modern materials and. Among the things to consider:
► cabling must be installed with a view to future flexibility (Refer to Section 9 – Communication
Services);
► cabling and equipment must reflect current standards but have the capacity for change or
expansion in future services;
► loose furniture may be preferable to built-in furniture;
► services should promote ease of connection and disconnection;
Information and Communications Technology (ICT)
Wireless communications is not a replacement for a structured cabling system. It complements the
cabling system and adds some flexibility.
High-speed broadband access will be delivered to every site.
ICT requirements are described in more detail in Section 9. Additional guidelines on the design and
installation of ICT in schools are referenced under that section.
ICT facilities may need to be adapted to suit individual needs of some students, staff and visitors
(e.g. people with disabilities).
Placement of Computers
As noted in post-occupancy evaluations (2005), computers have been successfully located in:
► the library as a resource centre/information technology zone which also functions as a
conference facility and discussion space;
► pods to allow supervision;
► general-purpose classrooms to provide accessibility for use by students; and
► information technology zones in travel space/corridors, with vision panels from adjacent
classrooms to provide supervision
Low-level or height-adjustable computer desks should be considered to enable use by a broad range
of users.
4.4.7 Equipment and Fittings
Equipment and fittings should be located in a manner that ensures safe use and circulation.
Inadequate “domestic” standards applied to the selection of fixtures and finishes, for example, have
included poor installation of locks and latches (endangering fingers), poor location of fixtures (fire
hose reel cupboards in the path of student travel), unsatisfactory toilet and sanitary fixtures, and
inferior durability of benches (both joinery and surfaces) in technology rooms, home economics and
science laboratories.
20
The provision of display boards and display spaces is particularly important in primary schools. A
proportion of these should be low enough to be comfortably readable by students, staff, parents
and visitors in wheelchairs (refer AS 1428.2 and AS 1428.3). A lack of display space has been found to
result in windows being used as display areas.
4.4.8 Storage
Storage spaces should be directly accessible from activity spaces. The sharing of storage between
spaces may also enable the creation of larger, more useful spaces. When designing storage areas, the
Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2007 must be taken into consideration. This is
particularly important in designing archive storage areas where preference should be given to small
size archive boxes.
4.4.9 Acoustics
Designers must ensure that the acoustic performance of the building meets appropriate standards
and should consider the following issues:
► control of sound transfer between spaces;
► control of room reverberation (echoing) within spaces; and
► control of ambient noise levels arising from mechanical plant, equipment or external noise
(such as transportation).
These issues can be addressed by considering:

► the construction of internal walls that divide rooms;
► the type and positioning of doors;
► the surface treatments of walls, floors and ceilings within learning spaces as well as in
areas adjoining learning spaces;
► the treatment and/or design of air ducts or other ventilation paths that connect spaces;
and
► the attenuation by design of noise intruding into learning space from mechanical services,
other equipment or external sources such as traffic, rail transport, aircraft or rain-fall onto
the roof of the building.
At the very outset, floor planning should consider acoustic design requirements. Spaces with
opposite acoustic requirements should be located as far apart as is practicable. Where open-plan
teaching spaces are proposed, dedicated quiet rooms or pods should also be included to cater for
small groups needing acoustic separation from the main group.
Appropriate design standards and methods are provided in Section 6.11.
21
Post-occupancy Evaluation Findings – Acoustics
Problems found with acoustics include a lack of sound separation between spaces caused by:
sound transfer through unlined ducts;
gaps at the external wall/partition interface; and
general purpose classrooms (GPCs) located beneath first-floor physical education rooms
with inadequate isolation.
Lack of attenuation within spaces caused by:

hard surfaces; and
insufficient acoustic treatment.
Recommendations to overcome these issues are discussed in Section 6.11.
4.4.10 Provision for Relocatable Buildings
The decision to provide a relocatable building at a school is made at the discretion of the VSBA.
The relationship between buildings and the site should include consideration of the placement of
relocatable buildings. There are a variety of relocatable buildings used, including single-storey,
double-storey, and triple storey units.
Planning should include provision of space for relocatable buildings, and be mindful that the actual
number of such buildings will fluctuate as school needs vary up to the provided peak enrolment.
Relocatable buildings should be placed in an area that does not disrupt the normal movement of
students and staff amongst existing buildings, provides a straightforward connection to power,
water and drainage, provides safe ingress and emergency egress from the relocatable building and
any neighbouring buildings affected by the placement of the relocatable building.
Building orientation and outlook, sunlight exposure through windows, adjacent open spaces,
circulation routes, paths, covered ways, etc., need to be considered for relocatable buildings just as
for permanent buildings. Special purpose relocatable buildings are required to have disability access
consistent with legislative requirements.
Aesthetic aspects, including the provision of connecting and unifying treatments, need to be
considered so that these buildings are a part of the school rather than an unconsidered
afterthought.
Requirements for installation and removal of buildings, including truck and crane access, also need
to be considered.
The external design should provide a local presence and provide a focal point commensurate with its
environment.
Elements of successful external design feature:

► borrowed elements from local landscape to express context and heritage issues;
22
► large-volume buildings broken down through the innovative articulation of generic and cost-
effective materials;
► ESD-driven design initiatives, sun shading devices, pop-up roofs for natural light and night
purging, double-glazed windows (standardised feature in new relocatable buildings), floor,
wall and roof insulation, etc.; and
► integration of relocatables with permanent structures, providing physical connections
through corridors or other structures, and adding external treatment to relocatables to
blend them with the main group of buildings.
Successful internal designs incorporate material finishes which reflect the functional requirement of
the space (for example, an industrial ambience for technology spaces).
Multi-Storey Relocatables
Multi-storey relocatable buildings are provided to schools that are facing enrolment pressures but
have limited available space for further single-storey relocatable buildings. Multi-storey buildings are
classified as a different construction type to single storey buildings. As such, building permits must
be obtained when they are used.
All multi-storey relocatable buildings need to comply with relevant requirements and legislation or
disability access, safety features, balustrades, fire requirements and emergency exits. Ramps, lifts
and other accessibility measures should be incorporated onto the site during delivery. All triple-
storey buildings must have a lift.
Multi-storey relocatable buildings should incorporate sustainable and energy efficient design
principles. This includes the use of double-glazed windows, improved insulation to reduce heat loss,
external window shades, promotion of natural lighting and proper ventilation.
The placement of multi-storey buildings within a school needs to consider whether it will detract
from the passive surveillance of other school buildings outside of school hours. The height of multi-
storey buildings can provide concealed spaces that can be used to vandalise or damage school
property. Planners should minimise such concealments created by multi-storey buildings where
possible.
Multi-storey relocatable buildings should follow the same maintenance requirements as single-
storey buildings. Additional maintenance is required for lifts when installed in multi-storey buildings.
4.5 Shared Use of School Facilities
The shared use of facilities is promoted by the Department as an option available to schools. General
information and guidelines are provided on the School Infrastructure website at
http://www.education.vic.gov.au/school/principals/infrastructure/Pages/propertyshare.aspx
4.5.1 Adjacency of Spaces and Community Use
Adjacent locations for facilities with complementary functions should be considered. For example,
the location of a gymnasium, performing arts facility, or library (as resource centre/IT zone/
conference facility) adjacent to a dining area, canteen or food technology classroom allows the
development of a cafe facility for out-of-hours performances, student personal development
programs, and wider community use.
23
4.5.2 Competition Grade Sporting Facilities
The design standards set out in Section 6 - Substructure, Superstructure & Finishes apply to sporting
facilities focused on providing schools with flexible indoor and outdoor spaces able to be used for
school-level sport, performances and assemblies as well as various curriculum, general play and
dispersal activities. Further to these school level sporting facilities the Department regularly works
with partners, generally local councils and other community groups, to co-invest in the delivery of
competition-grade facilities. For those schools building competition-grade sporting facilities, refer to
Appendix 4 Competition Grade Sporting Facilities for the required design standards.
4.6 Security and Safety

Schools must provide a safe and secure environment for students, staff and visitors, including
parents and service personnel.
The following design considerations overlap with occupational health and safety (OH&S) and
accessibility for people with disabilities. In relation to intruder-detection systems, contact the
Department’s Security Services Unit.
In terms of security, good design should consider:

► logical street access directing visitors to administration facilities and permitting the
supervision of entries;
► building design and choice of finishes that discourage vandalism and abuse;
► avoiding nooks and crannies;
► providing night lighting/sensors at access points;
► lighting to cover after hours usage;
► compartmentalising facilities for out-of-hours use;
► well-placed external PA speakers;
► design which promotes good supervision of all areas by teachers;
► safe access to toilets during classroom hours, lunch and recess times, and out-of-hours; and
► safe access to car parks out-of-hours.
In terms of safety, good design should consider:

► fitment design ensuring smooth corners and appropriate location;
► adequate ventilation;
► window placements and glass, avoiding the positioning of operable windows in traffic areas
(glazing should accord with the Building Code of Australia);
► balustrades (for stairs and balconies) with no footholds for climbing;
► minimising and controlling roof access;
► on-site traffic management;
24
► avoiding differences of level across the site or, if this is not possible, ensuring that changes
of level are dealt with in an appropriate manner (refer also to the Building Code of
Australia);
► providing non-slip surfaces in internal and external circulation areas as per the Building
Code of Australia and Australian Standards;
► asthma and allergy minimisation; and
► stretcher access to first-aid locations.
Safety in design is part of the occupational health and safety requirements (refer Section 11).
Useful security hints and practical advice can be obtained from the Department’s Security Services
webpage:
(https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/Services/Schools/Infrastructure/Emergency/Pages/default.aspx)
(Note: this site requires an Edumail user ID and password for access.)
Post-occupancy Evaluation Findings – Security
Different approaches to security employed in projects reviewed in post-occupancy evaluations

include:
► extensive use of glass between spaces to provide visual supervision (especially in primary
schools);
► surveillance cameras (the Department’s Emergency & Security Management Unit
approves school requests for CCTV, and schools fund this form of surveillance);
► high fences (the location of these can be selective rather than enclose the whole site,
e.g. such fencing can exclude car-parks, ovals and entry areas); and
► community use of facilities out-of-hours to provide increased surveillance.
Other possible approaches to security include the layout of buildings to enhance visibility, and
landscaping and lighting to avoid “lurking places”.
4.7 Environmental Sustainability

Energy-conscious buildings lead to improved facilities operation, better staff and student
performance, reduced operating costs, and lower greenhouse gas emissions.
In terms of environmentally sustainable planning and energy management, Victorian school design
responds to local environmental conditions and reflects a commitment to minimising greenhouse gas
emissions. Architects and builders are essential partners in the development of facilities which achieve
user comfort through informed planning and sustainable construction practices.
Building practitioners and users of this Handbook should be mindful of matters related to
environmentally sustainable planning and energy management. National best-practice is linked to the
Green Star – Education Tool developed by the Green Building Council of Australia
http://www.gbcaus.org/
For additional resources, practitioners and consultants are also advised to visit:
25
► The Building Commission http://www.buildingcommission.com.au
► Sustainability Victoria http://www.sustainability.vic.gov.au
The following sections outline passive environmentally sustainable design aspects that should be
considered in the planning and design of school buildings.
4.7.1 Orientation
A prime consideration should be the placing of all buildings with their long axis in the east/west
direction in order to maximise north facing facades and minimise east/west facing facades (this
must be addressed in the Masterplan and Schematic Design reports).
To further reduce the problem of overheating in summer, window design should incorporate
adequate shading (refer to Section 6.6 – External Windows).
4.7.2 Site Planning for Airflow Control
Consider the use of airlocks and placing external doorways on the east side of buildings to minimise
indoor wind gusts and draughts. The size of airlocks should accord with the Building Code of
Australia.
When planning for single-sided or cross natural ventilation for use in summer, consider openings on
the south face or from shaded/sheltered areas to avail of the cooler air.
Ventilation openings should be onto areas that are as dust-free as possible.
Consideration should be given to prevailing weather and seasonal climate to limit the entry of such
conditions as hot northerly winds.
Noted causes of poor performance in relation to natural ventilation and thermal comfort include:
poor plan layouts which hinder cross flow ventilation;
closed up corridor spaces with low ceilings;
poor sun shading; and
operable shading devices and windows provided but difficult to adjust or open.
4.7.3 Surface Area of Buildings
Consider reducing the external surface area of buildings by joining spaces together.
Consider reducing the area of windows, but to a point where they can still perform the functions of
providing daylight, view and connection to the outside.
4.7.4 Overshadowing
Ensure that the north facade of a proposed building is not overshadowed by other buildings to the
north by setting it back (south) at a distance that is twice the height of the obstruction. Ensure the
proposed building does not overshadow any existing building to the south by placing buildings twice
their height north of any existing building.
26
Shading diagrams should be prepared to accurately establish the extent of shadowing by adjoining
features.
4.7.5 Daylight
The layout of buildings should facilitate the daylighting of rooms. Because adequate levels of
daylight via windows typically penetrate only three metres into a building, consider the use of
shaded skylights or clerestories to provide additional illumination.
The size and orientation of skylights and clerestory windows, however, should be carefully
considered so as to limit overheating and glare. All skylights and clerestory windows should be
shaded from summer insolation.
Daylighting and the minimisation of artificial lighting must be addressed in the Schematic Design
report.
Sunlight penetration of windows and skylights should be checked by means of insolation

calculations, using appropriate software.
4.7.6 Zoning
Provide doors or airlocks to separate areas that are heated/cooled from areas that are not
heated/cooled. Provide doors to isolate two-storey spaces (such as stairs) from heated/cooled
spaces. Zoned areas possess a thermal advantage over open plan inasmuch as heating and cooling
systems need only operate in areas that are occupied.
Airlock and doorway sizes should accord with the Building Code of Australia.
Zoning must be addressed in the Masterplan report.
4.7.7 Shelter
Outside areas should be sheltered, where possible, from winter and summer winds, and shaded from
the sun from September to April (Terms 1 and 4). These considerations must be addressed in the
Masterplan report.
4.7.8 Recycling
Designs should consider providing an area in each block where recyclable materials (glass, paper,
etc.) can be stored before their removal to the school’s central recycling area.
School should be encouraged to develop a reuse and recycling strategy.
4.7.9 Landscaping
A well maintained, functional and attractive school site can enhance the self-esteem of all users,
foster sociable behaviour and facilitate performance.
27
All aspects of site development, including landscaping, should be reflected in a school’s masterplan.
Landscaping should not be dealt with in isolation but form an integral part of the overall
development.
The site design should also consider site drainage and the sensitivity of the site surface and sub-surface
drainage to regular maintenance.
Every effort should be made to retain existing trees. To achieve this, a proper survey should be carried
out of all significant trees and site features prior to any master planning.
Deciduous trees to the north (or evergreens set back a distance twice their height), and evergreens
to the east and west can block summer morning and evening sun if external blinds are not provided.
The maintenance costs of deciduous trees should be considered.
The development of school grounds should satisfy the following major goals:
► provision of a safe, manageable, pleasant and ecologically responsible outdoor environment;
► provision of areas and facilities which meet outdoor curriculum requirements;
► provision of areas and facilities which meet outdoor play, assembly and physical education
requirements; and
► consideration of ecologically sustainable performance related to landscape irrigation and
water efficiency, transport design and cyclist facilities, and recycling storage areas.
Refer Section 10 – Site Works & School Landscaping for greater detail.
4.8 Energy Planning

Energy should be considered at the master planning stage or before. It should not be left until the
schematic design stage or later. Energy planning should involve all parties associated with the
development of a school. It is not just an electrical or mechanical issue. If school design is good, an
assumed dependence on components such as air conditioning is not automatic. Beware of standard
solutions
.
► design should consider the use of solar energy where appropriate and cost effective;
► design should consider solar hot-water (schools are currently eligible for Victorian
Government grants that help reduce the cost of solar hot-water installation);
► control technology should be included where centralised heating and domestic hot-water
plant are specified;
► timers/sensors should be installed where artificial lighting is used;
► heating controls should allow zoning, individual control and auto shutdown;
► sustainable products should be used where both appropriate and cost-effective, including
those materials and products made with recycled content and recyclable at end-o-life (this
needs to be addressed in the Design Development report); and
Building regulations will require all new work to comply with Part J of the Building Code of Australia
which includes achieving solutions in respect to:
► building fabric;
28
► external gazing;
► building sealing;
► air movement;
► air conditioning and ventilation systems;
► artificial lighting and power;
► hot water supply; and
► access for maintenance.
4.8.1 Energy Engineer
It is recommended that an energy engineer be engaged as part of the design team to provide
specialised energy advice and design assessments.
4.8.2 Energy Audit
Undertake an energy audit of existing premises, if appropriate, to establish existing energy use
patterns which can then be addressed in new design. The energy audit must be addressed in the
Masterplan report.
4.8.3 Energy Design Process
Incorporate into the existing design process the following steps:

► hold a project meeting with all stakeholders to agree to goals, budgets, and energy and
financial measurement methods;
► review energy performance whenever cost plan is reviewed; and
► treat mechanical and electrical design and building fabric design as one exercise.
4.8.4 Computer Modelling
Consider using computer modelling to determine the effectiveness of or the adjustments necessary
to daylight and natural ventilation systems.
4.8.5 Testing and Commissioning
Energy efficient equipment should be specified. Where appropriate, testing and commissioning
should confirm this performance.
Testing and commissioning should include the handover of accurate and detailed building and
systems records and operations directions. Such documentation should not only set out details of
the installation and its energy-efficient operation but clearly record all design assumptions and
capacities in order to facilitate future modifications and building adjustment.
4.8.6 Maintenance Strategy
School councils should be provided with a ten-year maintenance strategy for all plant and
equipment.
29
The maintenance strategy should include a fine tuning of plant to the building’s actual occupancy
and operation. It should also demonstrate how maintenance will be provided. For outsourced
maintenance, some degree of energy performance outcome should be built into the contract.
A meeting should be held with school staff, the consultant and the mechanical and electrical
contractors to “hand over” the maintenance documents and “walk through” the project, explaining
any required actions.
The maintenance strategy should include site maintenance – including cutting of swales, cleaning of
stormwater (SW) pits and drains, clearing of gutters and downpipes etc.
The strategy should recognise that these tasks can fall back in order of priority. The design should
consider the performance of stormwater and roof drainage if it is not maintained. A ‘belts and
braces’ approach may be appropriate that provides secondary relief in the event of the primary
barrier to inundation failing, e.g. buildings should not flood even if gutters and downpipes fill with
leaves; a courtyard should not flood back into the buildings if the storm-water drains become
clogged.
No area should depend upon a single drainage point or single kind of drainage / drainage system.
4.8.7 Selection of Office Equipment
Office equipment can consume up to 10% of the total energy used in a building. Equipment should
be selected with a low energy rating sufficient to perform the task required.
4.9 Special Factors
Special factors which may lead to additional costs to a building project are described in detail in
Section 5 – Special Factors.
4.10 Construction Planning

The following sections outline key construction planning considerations.
Planning needs to allow for a staged implementation of works within a single project. Stages should
reflect available funding as well as the need to enable schools to continue operating without undue
disruption to the learning environment. Service provision in the initial stage should provide for total
development requirements.
4.10.1 Economy and Cost Effectiveness
Building and site development should incorporate both economic and cost-effective construction as
well as operational and maintenance considerations. Factors include:
► appropriate internal volumes that reflect purpose and the scale of user;
► robust and durable materials and finishes;
► structure, including the
o provision of regular building shapes,
o provision of simple roof forms that promote effective drainage,
30
o consideration of two storey buildings only when site constraints make single storey
buildings less cost effective,
o grouping of areas, particularly those that require mechanical services,
o keeping of circulation space within scheduled allowances,
o placement of structures on site in close proximity to services,
o use of cost-effective structural solutions to site constraints;
► location on site so that
o buildings are positioned in close proximity to services and site access points,
o buildings are grouped to minimise circulation requirements,
o site conditions (including soil, rock, vegetation, flood levels, and contours) are
considered, with buildings situated to minimise cost penalties associated with slope
or rock and to maximise the use of features such as existing vegetation;
► consideration of a landscaping component in the total design strategy;
► planning to allow for the potential staging of works and in such a way that the duplication
or redundancy of facilities and services provided in earlier stages is avoided;
► siting relocatables with consideration for their integration among other facilities and/or
future removal;
► siting relocatables with their windows facing north and south;
► planning of consecutive stages (of new secondary colleges) adjacent to one another for
ease of access (i.e. less external travel) and the minimisation of open spaces which require
landscaping but may form construction areas in future stages;
► keeping toilet allocations for new primary schools to no more than two blocks, thereby
facilitating an efficient use of area;
► designing for waste minimisation by taking into account standard material sizes, specifying
prefabricated products and using modular components (these measures can help reduce
the amount of waste generated during the building phase and thereby reduce purchasing,
handling and disposal costs); and
► designing for operational waste efficiency (i.e. those wastes generated once the facility is in
use) and providing space/facilities to address the proper collection and disposal of food
waste, beverage containers, paper, cardboard and other packaging materials, etc.
4.10.2 Design and Materials Efficiency
Building design and construction practices should minimise waste generation during construction,
and facilitate the reuse/recycling of unavoidable waste.
31
Section 5:
Section 4 – Planning Special Factors
Wodonga West Primary School

Architect: NOWarchitecture
32
Section 5 – Special Factors
5. SPECIAL FACTORS
5.1 Introduction
Special factors associated with the construction of a facility may lead to additional costs and affect
the budget of an otherwise standard building project.
Investigations should demonstrate that alternatives have been evaluated, and all additions must be
supported by estimates and quotations. Approval must also be obtained from the Department
before incurring additional costs.
Only in circumstances where an extraordinary item arises (and for which no monetary allocation has
been provided) will approval of additional project funds be considered.
Typical special factors affecting the cost of a building project include:

► existing site conditions;
► climatic conditions;
► existing conditions impacting on building design;
► access and servicing; and
► multi-storey or higher than normal buildings.
5.2 Process
The project budget may be increased at project initiation or during its development following a
review of submissions and Departmental approval.
Each special factor needs to be quantified and reasons and/or reports provided to justify such
budget allocations.
During the course of the documentation, the principal consultant must supply a detailed
confirmation of the cost of each special factor specified in the original budget. Budget allocations
will be modified and approved during the course of documentation, subject to Department review
and approval.
5.3 Common Special Factors

It is not possible to identify all items that may be considered special factors, and only the most
common are defined as follows.
5.3.1 Existing Site and Building Conditions
Due to the condition of the site, additional works may be required to an otherwise standard building
project. Such works may be generated by factors associated with:
► rock
33
► soil
► flood-prone land
► slope of site (where the fall across the site is 1:20 or steeper)
► filled sites
► fill provision
► swampy ground
► bulk excavation
► site contamination.
The impact on the construction method and/or the additional works involved must be identified and
the likely cost quantified and approved by the Department.
Additional works involving existing infrastructure may also arise from:

► the need to remove hazardous materials (see Section 5.3.4 below);
► decanting requirements;
► poor structural or maintenance condition of existing buildings and facilities; and
► excessive noise, vibration and fumes (aeroplanes, trains, heavy traffic, industrial processes ).
The corresponding additional works must be identified and the costs estimated, and submitted for
approval to the Department.
5.3.2 Climatic Conditions
Special provision may be required for climatic factors. For example, snow entrances may be
warranted in alpine regions, and proximity to the sea (generally within one kilometre) or location
within industrial areas may require special coatings such as hot-dip galvanising.
However, high rainfall does not represent a design modification, and is normally covered in the
Department’s locality allowance.
5.3.3 Maintenance Access and Servicing
Adverse site characteristics may incur:

► excessive service runs as a result of current service locations;
► the upgrade of existing external works and services as a result of additional “loads” imposed;
► buildings required to house engineering services (e.g. pump house, substation, gas meter
enclosure);
► the bringing of service supplies to the site boundary;
► service and local government authority requirements (e.g. headworks and outfall charges);
and
► temporary access.
34
The impact of the additional works must be identified and the likely cost quantified and approved by
the Department.
5.3.4 Hazardous Materials
Hazardous materials include chemicals, cleaning agents, fuel, oils, asbestos, synthetic mineral fibres
(SMFs) and PCBs.
All schools have been subject to an audit of asbestos and polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), and have
received reports detailing the location of any of these within the school. (It should be noted that all
PCBs have been removed from school buildings.) The audits, typically, also identify the presence of
other hazardous materials.
Architects must ensure that tender documentation identifies the removal of all known hazardous
materials within areas where upgrade is to occur.
Refer also to Section 11 – Workplace Health & Safety.
5.3.5 Multi-storey or Higher than Normal Buildings
Site topography or existing buildings may necessitate that new school facilities be multi-storeyed.
Because of higher roofs, extra footings, provision of lifts etc., a budget increase for proposed
buildings or parts of buildings may be considered. The impact of the additional works must be
identified and the likely cost quantified and approved by the Department.
As a general rule the acceptable cost increase due to two-storey structures is an additional 15% (i.e.
115%) of the rate for a new build $/m². This covers all structural factors in two-storey construction,
including increased footing, pad, column sizes, load-bearing walls, suspended slab additional
thickness, and band beams, etc. This also allows for an internal stair within the internal circulation
area planned. However, a lift and all the necessary structure to support it is specifically excluded.
Disability access must also be provided in accordance with the Building Code of Australia and the
Disability (Access to Premises – Buildings) Standards 2010. For example, this may necessitate the
substitution of ramps for stairs where practicable. Other factors such as external ramps should also
be included.
5.3.6 Specialist and Special Developmental Schools
Additional factors may apply to specialist and special developmental schools. Air conditioning is an
entitlement in specialist and special developmental schools, and rates will need to be adjusted
accordingly. Other special factors will need to be assessed on a case-by-case basis but may include:
► the necessity of smoke/fire detection systems to deactivate magnetic locks;
► glazing below one metre to exceed the Australian Standard and achieve greater impact
resistance;
► automatic opening front door and security issues; and
► fencing types and security/containment issues.
35
5.4 Items Not Generally Considered ‘Special Factors’

The following items are not generally considered special factors and are accommodated within other
components of the project budget.
Location Allowance
In general, projects constructed outside the metropolitan area bring with them increased costs.
Price Escalation and Rise and Fall during Documentation and Construction
The Department does not budget for escalation or rise and fall costs when determining its budget
for a project.
Above Standard Facilities

When projects are documented over and above the Department’s current facilities standards, all
additional costs are to be borne by the school. No additional funds will be provided.
5.5 Increased School Construction Rates

Special factors should only be considered for site-specific conditions as set out in the previous
clauses.
Additional ecologically sustainable design (ESD) initiatives will only be considered on an individual
project basis, and subject to approval.
School construction rates have been revised to include:

► allowance for all Building Code of Australia Part J requirements;
► physical barrier termite treatment in all projects;
► rainwater storage and toilet flushing systems;
► daylight sensing controls for classroom lighting;
► electrical floor boxes to open learning areas (average of two per general-purpose classroom
equivalent);
► external access (one door per general-purpose classroom equivalent);
► low E glass to north and west facades;
► roof insulation at R3.5, wall insulation at R2.5;
► fittings and special equipment;
► cabling, communications and power;
► 80% of travel at an internal rate, and 20% at an external rate ($500/sqm); and
► locker areas and site stores as part internal, part external, at average rate of $900/sqm.
36
Department of Education and Training Section 6:
Substructure, Superstructure & Finishes
Daylesford Secondary College

Architect: Morton Dunn Architect
37
Section 6 - Substructure, Superstructure & Finishes
6. SUBSTRUCTURE, SUPERSTRUCTURE & FINISHES

6.1 Introduction
In choosing a design solution for new schools and refurbishment projects, the Department helps
architects and school planning committees select from a variety of building systems consistent with
good architectural and engineering practice, durability and value for money. The Department has
developed a considerable body of experience from a range of projects that have been delivered and
subsequently evaluated, as well as from the feedback supplied by end users – the schools
themselves.
The purpose of this section is to provide school communities and consultants with the benefit of that
experience so that demonstrated examples of best practice can be incorporated into new projects.
The following material is arranged according to the standard cost elements of a building project and
generally provides details for minimum acceptable standards.
The materials and building practices listed are not exhaustive, and any materials not covered in this
document should be considered in relation to those included. It is recommended, however, that
specified fittings and equipment be sourced, where possible, from Australian suppliers in order to
assure replacement parts and facilitate maintenance. These comments do not apply to modular
relocatable buildings or unenclosed covered walkways.
All design, materials, workmanship, testing and commissioning shall comply with the latest revision
of the Building Code of Australia and relevant Australian Standards.
6.2 Substructure
6.2.1 Site Conditions and Investigation
The type of structure best employed is dependent on site conditions. Prior to the commencement
of design work, site investigations should be carried out, including:
► land surveys to determine slopes and above ground site features;

► watercourses, areas subject to inundation and overland flow paths; water table and levels;
► borehole and geotechnical investigations to determine, as best as possible, sub-surface
conditions; and
► an examination of past construction records in the area, sourced from local authorities,
schools, etc.
This will allow informed decisions to be made with respect to the stability or otherwise of founding
material, the suitability of excavated material for engineered and/or bulk fill, estimates of any rock
excavation, and the most appropriate substructure. It should be noted that rock excavation is both
expensive and time consuming. Consideration should be given to floor and services levels in relation
to possible rock.
All geotechnical investigations shall be conducted in accordance with AS 1289 to determine soil
strength, shrinkage and bearing parameters. Foundation soil types shall be classified in accordance
with AS 2870 and a relevant footing system designed to comply with building design and
38
performance criteria in accordance with loading combinations specified in AS/NZS 1170 Parts 1, 2, 3
and AS 1170.4.
6.2.2 Preparation and Groundwork
Earthworks
Appropriate planning and management of this activity should take place all in accordance with AS
3798 and authority requirements.
Service Trenching
Trenching should be carried out and reinstated as soon as possible to avoid injury to individuals.
Appropriate service utility clearance, trench base, and reinstatement material and compaction
should be completed to authority standards.
Stormwater – Site
A stormwater management plan should be created and maintained during the construction period.
The use of sand bags or alternate earth drains are required to avoid sediment runoff and
concentrated water flow into areas that would create property damage or injury.
6.2.3 Termite Management
Termite protection is required for all projects as termite attack is increasing in areas where they
were not previously encountered. For this reason, School Construction Rates have been adjusted to
provide for the cost of this treatment to all projects. (Refer to Section 5.5 in Special Factors)
AS 3660.1 “Termite management Part 1: New building work” is the relevant standard, and the
requirements of this standard are to be applied.
Note that chemical soil barriers are subject to a loss of effectiveness over time. Different chemicals
have different life spans, but no chemical currently on the market will last for the life of the building.
It is therefore advisable to seriously consider the type of barrier system, as the reapplication of the
chemical may be disruptive and/or costly. Chemical barriers created by means of reticulation
pipework enable simple re-application of the chemical.
The Department publication Use of Termiticides in Schools applies mainly to maintenance activities
for completed buildings, and particularly to the use of termiticide sprays.
6.3 Superstructure
6.3.1 Use of Appropriate Structural Solutions
Buildings should be designed to facilitate future school requirements as well as construction over
the winter period.
The structural system should be as simple and robust as possible. Load-bearing vertical structure
should be located in external wall-lines and in internal wall-lines that are unlikely to be relocated in
the event of future building refurbishment.
39
Wherever possible, it is recommended that a stiffened concrete raft solution be utilised for the floor,
appropriately designed for the site conditions. Such a solution can reduce long-term superstructure
damage from seasonal ground movements, and is very low maintenance (it incurs good life-cycle
costs).
For sites on slopes, or for sites with difficult founding conditions, it may be appropriate to raise the
floor structure.
Current local market conditions may also influence the final choice of structure, as costs of
alternative structural systems can and do vary with time, and can be influenced by site location.
A certificate of structural adequacy for all footing systems and structural members of the building
shall be provided with the final detailed design drawings and documentation.
6.3.2 Concrete
All concrete structures shall be designed in accordance with AS 3600.
Precast, tilt-up and concrete structural elements shall be designed in accordance with the relevant
codes AS3850.1 and 2, AS 3610, etc.
All steel reinforcement of concrete shall be in accordance with AS/NZS 4671 and designated grades
N, L, R and RF. Minimum reinforcement cover shall be in accordance with AS 3600.
6.3.3 Masonry
All masonry structural elements/components and construction shall comply with AS 3700 and
AS/NZS 2699.1 and 2.
Stack bonded masonry (brickwork or blockwork) is not to be used under any circumstances.
6.3.4 Steel
All exposed steel columns should be hot-dipped galvanised in accordance with the exposure
category in AS 3600. If paint is to be applied for decorative purposes, the appropriate primers and
treatment should be used.
Handrails should be hot-dipped galvanised in accordance with the exposure category in AS 3600
(450 g/m² for normal sites, 600 g/m² for corrosion sites) and not painted, as the paint will quickly
wear off.
6.3.5 Timber
All timber structural members shall be designed in accordance with AS 1720 and AS1684.
40
6.4 Roof
Simple roof forms are required, with roof guttering outside the line of external walls (i.e. no box
gutters). Attention should also be given to means of avoiding gutter blockage by leaves and debris.
During selection, consideration must be given to the continued availability of roofing materials.
6.4.1 Designs to Conform to AS/NZS 3500.3
AS/NZS 3500.3 Plumbing and Drainage Part 3: Stormwater Drainage is referenced by the Building
Code of Australia and thus roofing, gutters and downpipes are required to be designed to meet the
requirements of this standard. The standard enables calculations to be made regarding quantities of
rainwater collected by roofs as well as the sizing of gutters and downpipes to meet local rainfall
conditions within appropriate “design return” periods.
The design must incorporate a provision enabling any water overflow to escape outside the building.
Requirements for overflows are provided by AS/NZS 3500.3. Box gutters must not be used. Where it
is unavoidable, the use of box gutters must be approved by the Victorian School Building Authority,
DET.
6.4.2 Materials and Safe Access
Roofing material is to be surface/pierced fixed steel sheeting. The use of clip-fixed decking should be
kept to a minimum to minimise roofing costs.
All roofing must be of continuous sheets from ridge to eaves wherever possible, with a minimum
slope of at least three degrees.
The sheeting shall be pre-painted steel on zincalume substrate. The Department will consider
natural finish steel sheeting where it matches existing materials or must conform with local
government requirements or where the principal consultant provides acceptable evidence to
support the material choice.
Other materials may be used in special circumstances. Each application will be assessed on its
merits. Consideration should be given to the effects of galvanic corrosion when selecting roofing
materials.
To reduce damage caused by intruders walking on the roof:

► use the thickest available roof sheeting (ductile corrugated sheeting is available in 0.6 and
0.8mm whereas most standard profiles are only available in 0.42 or 0.48mm thickness);
► preferably use stronger profiles of metal roofing rather than corrugated roofing;
► decrease the batten spacing to a maximum of 1000mm for metal deck roofing and 600mm
for corrugated roofing; and
► increase the roof pitch.
Selection of the appropriate roof profile is a cost/benefit exercise. Stronger profiles are only
available in narrower sheets. See table below for comparison of typical sections available.
41
Profile Thickness Maximum Single Span Minimum Pitch
Standard Corrugated 0.48 (thickest available) 800 5°
Ductile Corrugated 0.6 1600 5°

Rib and Pan 0.48 (thickest available) 1600 2°
Ductile Corrugated 0.8 (thickest available) 1800 5°
Ribbed 0.48 (thickest available) 2000 3°
Slopes and spans of roofing should preferably exceed the manufacturer’s minimum requirements to
avoid pooling of water and dinting of roof profiles by roof traffic. Experience shows that roofing will
deflect under foot traffic loads at recommended maximum spans.
Roof sheeting may also be damaged in transit or during erection, creating defects in the designed
profile shape. Damaged sheets shall be rejected.
Safe Access to Roofs
Over and above requirements of the Building Code of Australia, Victoria’s Occupational Health and
Safety legislation places an obligation on owners and designers of buildings to ensure that persons
employed (including contractors) on their premises are provided with safe workplace conditions. The
relevant regulations in regard to roof access are the Occupational Health and Safety Regulations
2007, and in particular Part 3.3 – Prevention of Falls.
While each person accessing the roof must be covered by occupational health and safety procedures
implemented by the school, it may be advantageous to design suitable items to facilitate access to
the roof for maintenance purposes. This is particularly so if items of equipment requiring regular
maintenance are mounted on the roof. Note that a contractor engaged to undertake work on the
roof is considered to be a school employee for the purposes of the Act.
Simple devices such as ladder-fixing brackets located at suitable access points and roof-mounted
anchor points for safety lines will facilitate safe access to roofs.
Refer to Section 11 for further information on workplace health and safety.
6.4.3 Gutters and Downpipes
General
Site and roof drainage systems should provide inbuilt redundancy in both number (more than one
outlet) and type (down-pipes and ability of the gutter to overflow without nuisance; grated
stormwater (SW) pits and independent overland flow around the buildings). The back-up should
(ideally) be open ended (i.e. of virtually unlimited capacity if not well in excess of the anticipated
design flows – e.g. lower fronted eaves gutters) and not maintenance dependent.
42
The design should include complete levels for the buildings, civil and landscape works and ground
levels around the buildings. These should include levels for SW inlets and outfalls, grades around
(and away from) buildings, swales and surface drains. Over-sizing of infrastructure should be
encouraged, beyond meeting current design standards.
Roofing, gutters and downpipes should be of electrolytically similar materials to avoid corrosion. The
sheet thickness of gutters and downpipes (as well as their fixings) must be able to withstand
mechanical and other damage.
Low Level Gutters in Trafficable Areas
Guttering below 2400mm above ground level in trafficable areas will require fixing of a standard in
excess of normal manufacturer’s requirements.
Mesh Covers to Gutters
Mesh covers are sometimes fitted to gutters to prevent blockage by leaves. Plastic mesh is
unsatisfactory as the weight of debris will collapse the gutter. Mesh should be made of metal
compatible with the roof and gutter, and it must be secured in such a way as to prevent leaves
working beneath it (preferably, mesh should be inserted beneath the roofing). If mesh covered
gutters are blocked, they will be difficult to clean.
In heavy rain, mesh covering can deflect water across the gutter to discharge onto the ground or
path below. This needs to be considered in the choice of design, particularly over building entries.
Some mesh guards are dished slightly.
Location of Downpipes
Consideration should be given to locating downpipes, wherever possible, in protected areas away
from heavy student traffic to prevent damage to downpipes.
Downpipes must not be concealed in wall cavities where any leak will result in structural and
aesthetic damage.
Protection of Downpipes
Sheet metal downpipes at schools have been consistently deformed by impact. Downpipes are
required to be of a more robust quality from ground level to a minimum height of at least 1800mm.
This will require the use of materials such as sewer quality PVC pipe or, in more extreme cases,
galvanised steel water pipe. Alternatively, sleeves to a height of at least 1800mm should be used to
protect standard downpipes.
Give consideration to locating downpipes over grated pits and stopping downpipes short of the
ground level to prevent balls, etc., entering the stormwater system.
Damage Prevention
Damage generally occurs to guttering during after hours when vandals either swing from it or use it
to access the roof. Stronger fixing will not preclude damage, and guttering is not available in
sufficiently heavy gauge to resist damage. It is recommended that the height of guttering from
paving or garden areas be a minimum of 2400mm. Consideration should also be given during the
43
planning stage to design solutions which pre-empt or minimise damage to roofing and guttering at
low points in the building structure.
6.4.4 Roof Insulation and Ventilation
Insulation
Provide roof/ceiling insulation according to the table below (postcode areas for NatHERS zones are
supplied in Appendix 3):
NatHERS Zone 27 NatHERS Zone 20 NatHERS Zones 21 NatHERS Zones 24

i.e. Mildura i.e. Benalla & 22 i.e. Melbourne & 25 i.e. Ballarat
R4 R4 R3 R4
Recommended
(if heating & cooling) (if heating & cooling) (if heating & cooling) (if heating. & cooling)
R value
R3 R2.5 R3.5
(if heating only) (if heating only) (if heating only)
Note: An increase in School Construction Rates now provides funding to R3.5 for roof/ceiling
construction.
The insulation of walls and roofing must be addressed in the Schematic Design report.
Roof Ventilation
Consider roof ventilation above the level of ceiling insulation for summer cooling.
Roof Colour
Roofs are to be light in colour if appropriate for the surrounding environment. This will help reduce
summer overheating. The colour of the roof must be addressed in the Schematic Design report.
6.4.5 Skylights and Clerestory Windows
Windows alone are often unable to provide efficient daylighting for deep floor spaces where the
external wall is too far for daylight to reach, even with the use of light shelves and other devices.
Some internal spaces may not have external walls. In such places the use of clerestory windows or
skylights to introduce natural light (and ventilation if required) can be advantageous. However, all
forms of daylighting require careful design to introduce light without glare and heat.
South-facing clerestory windows are usually preferable to skylights. North-facing clerestory windows
are not considered advisable because of the penetration of direct sun into learning spaces. If there is
a compelling reason for such a design, such windows must be protected by shading devices which
employ suitable sun-penetrations software.
Many different forms of skylight have become available, including devices to control and select the
light admitted. Most are now rated under the skylight module of the Window Energy Rating Scheme,
known as WERS for Skylights. The scheme takes account of key differences between the energy
performance of windows and skylights and the differing responses of buildings to these fenestration
products.
Where skylights are installed to facilitate the entry of daylight, their area should be approximately
8% of the floor area served, provided they are externally shaded. A rule of thumb regarding
44
distribution of skylights is that their centres should be 1.5 times the ceiling height. The requirements
can be calculated with appropriate software. US-based advice, Skylighting Design Guidelines, is
available at: http://energydesignresources.com/resources/publications/design-guidelines/design-
guidelines-skylighting-guidelines.aspx.
It is beneficial to the spread of light and reduction of unwanted heat transfer if skylights are sealed
with an acrylic/prismatic diffuser. Double-glazed domes and double glazed ceiling level diffusers are
available. Shade all skylights which illuminate occupied areas. Skylights in heated areas shall be of
the non-ventilated type. All skylights should be fitted with safety grilles or other means of fall-
prevention for persons on the roof. Some types of skylight are made of impact resistant material and
will not require grilles.
For unheated areas such as toilets, changing rooms, corridors and vestibules, clear sections of
roofing may be useful. These should be designed to provide a passive solar benefit. Lighting
controls should also be provided so that lights can be switched off.
Tubular skylights and angular selective skylights are now available which restrict the light and heat
input when the sun is directly above and increase light input when the sun is lower in the sky. This is
done by means of light-intercepting devices inside the dome or laser cuts on the dome surface.
These units can also include dimming controls, double-glazed ceiling diffusers, etc.
6.5 External Walls and Floors
6.5.1 Cladding Materials
External wall cladding should be chosen from a select range of environmentally friendly materials
designed to provide:
► long term durability;
► low maintenance costs (e.g. cleaning);
► stain and graffiti resistance;
► an appropriate level of insulation for acoustic and thermal purposes;
► aesthetic appeal; and
► value for money.
Selection of appropriate surface finishes must proceed with a knowledge of the activities to be
conducted in the area.
Only surface finishes which maintain their original character and do not rely on regular maintenance
and cleaning should be selected. External cladding should be employed in such a way as to ensure
minimum cleaning; for example, corrugated iron must not be used horizontally.
Walls must be capable of being easily cleaned and repaired if damaged. Concrete block and other
materials prone to dirt and scuffing, or difficult to clean or remove graffiti from, should be avoided.
External walls should be of masonry, in general, and to a minimum height above ground level of at
least 2100mm (door head height). Masonry could be continued to the bottom of the eaves,
however lightweight cladding is an acceptable alternative.
45
Other alternatives such as full height lightweight cladding may be considered in certain
circumstances, for instance, low traffic areas and areas of low visual impact.
Externally, pre-coated surfaces should be used. External painting should be minimised and
restricted to secure areas.
Any solution recommended by the principal consultant must be cost effective (but not to the extent
that future maintenance is compromised) and agreed to by the Department’s Project Review and
Evaluation Panel (PREP) before implementation.
6.5.2 Wall Insulation
External wall insulation should be provided as described in the table below. Where internal walls
face onto breezeways that are open at both ends, they should be treated as external walls.
(Postcode areas of all NatHERS zones are supplied in Appendix 3.)
NatHERS Zone 27 NatHERS Zone 20 NatHERS Zones 21 NatHERS Zones 24

i.e. Mildura i.e. Benalla & 22 i.e. Melbourne & 25 i.e. Ballarat
R2 R2 R1.5 R2
Recommended
(if heating & cooling) (if heating & cooling) (if heating & cooling) (if heating. & cooling)
R value
R2 R1.5 R2
(if heating only) (if heating only) (if heating only)
Note: An increase in School Construction Rates now provides funding to R2.5 for wall construction.
6.5.3 Wall Colour and Texture
Consideration should be given to the light colouring of external walls to reflect heat, especially along
the west facade. Avoid matt colours and heavily textured surfaces.
Only surface textures which maintain their original character and do not rely on regular
maintenance and cleaning should be selected.
6.5.4 Flooring
Wherever possible, it is recommended that a stiffened concrete raft solution be utilised for the floor,
appropriately designed for the site conditions. Such a solution can reduce long-term superstructure
damage from seasonal ground movements, and is very low maintenance (it incurs good life-cycle
costs).
For sites on slopes, or for sites with difficult founding conditions, it may be appropriate to raise the
floor structure.
6.5.5 Floor Insulation
Floors should be insulated. Although concrete floors have an inherent insulation value of about
R1.5, the 600mm to 1000mm perimeter edge should be provided with insulation. Timber floors
should be insulated to an equivalent R1.5 level.
Insulation for timber floors can be provided in the form of CFC-free polystyrene boards or foil batts
suitable for exterior use and fixed between joists. Provide an air space between the floor boards
and the insulation. Sub-floor ventilation should also be minimised but still comply with the Building
Code of Australia in order to further minimise heat loss.
46
Timber floors to physical education spaces should not be insulated, but timber floors to multi-
purpose spaces in primary schools should be insulated.
The insulation of timber floors needs to be addressed in the Schematic Design report.
6.5.6 Balustrades
All required balustrades (both internal and external) should have a minimum height of 1500mm
(1.5m). Balustrades are to be provided in addition to handrails on stairs and ramps. Openings in
balustrades must be constructed so that they do not permit a 125mm sphere to pass through it. All
balustrades are to be non-climbable, providing no horizontal rails or potential footholds that could
be used for climbing. No furniture or joinery is to be attached to balustrades or placed within close
proximity. Circulation paths should be placed adjacent to balustrades that ensures the area is clear
of any hazards.
Special provisions apply for balcony seating within an auditorium. In these circumstances,
balustrades need to be consistent with NCC. Seating or any other furniture near a balustrade must
be fixed, so it cannot be used as a potential foothold.
6.6 External Windows
6.6.1 Glass
Glass in windows and doors shall comply with the Building Code of Australia and AS 1288: Glass in
Buildings – Selection and Installation.
Exterior glass in windows and doors must also satisfy Building Code of Australia Part J 2 for energy
efficiency measures.
Glazed doors, and glass panels that could be mistaken for openings, should have markings that
accord with the Building Code of Australia.
6.6.2 Standard Windows
The selection of windows should focus on standard designs and availability, standard construction
techniques, low maintenance and maximum user safety.
Glazing must conform to relevant regulations and Australian Standard. Minimum glass thickness is
dependent on location as specified in AS 1288.
Consideration must be given to cleaning costs, i.e. high-level glass should be avoided or provided
with means of safe access for cleaning.
Windows must be properly weatherproofed and should be provided with protection from climatic
influences by means of eaves or canopies.
Windows should be aluminium-framed and of commercial quality.
Care must be taken to ensure that the structural stability of the window meets appropriate wind
loading and impact resistance levels.
47
Once a window type is chosen, that type shall be carried throughout the design of the entire school.
6.6.3 Higher Quality Windows
Unprotected windows in high-traffic, playground and vandal-prone areas must possess a level of
impact resistance. This requires the specification of Grade A safety glass in accordance with AS 1288-
2066. Glazing within 1000mm of floor or ground level is covered by AS 1288; however, it may also be
necessary to specify Grade A safety glass for glazing between 1000mm and 1800mm where the risk
of breakage is considered to be high.
Enhanced solutions (including thickness, double glazing and tinting) may be appropriate to reduce
noise, sun glare, and heat gain and loss.
The School Construction Rates now allow for the use of Low E glass to north and west facades.
The principal consultant must qualify the situation when higher window quality is required.
6.6.4 Window Finish
Powder-coated window frames are to be light coloured if they are to be positioned in direct sunlight.
Manufacturers of powder coatings advise that light colours are more durable than dark colours as
they absorb less solar radiation. Bright colours are even more prone to fading than dark colours for
the same reason.
6.6.5 Window Configuration
Sashes should be either sliding or double hung.
Full-height glazing is to be avoided wherever possible to minimise safety and maintenance hazards,
particularly in areas where queuing or heavy traffic occurs. Ensure that window sills are located at
least 50mm above floor level, ideally 1200mm for thermal efficiency. Low windows are of no passive
solar heating or daylighting benefit.
While awning windows are not permitted at ground-level traffic areas due to the possible hazard to
passers by, highlight awning windows are acceptable where security can be maintained.
Operable louvres or awning windows to clerestories may be used to promote good cross ventilation,
with some inbuilt weather protection. High-level windows should be operated by a remote winder
that secures the windows when shut.
The use of frameless sliding glass or louvre windows is not permitted at normal levels due to
possible injury arising from impact.
6.6.6 Sun Control and Ventilation
Direct sunlight is not to penetrate windows during summer and shoulder seasons.
Where east- and west-facing windows are necessarily incorporated, the use of high-performance
glazing shall be considered to control sun penetration.
48
Design consideration shall be given to providing adequate (preferably cross flow) ventilation, and
should, wherever possible, provide natural lighting from two opposite sides of an activity area.
Issues Encountered – What to Do; What Not to Do
Excessive entry of natural light leads to heat and glare issues. Unsatisfactory designs feature:
► no external sun shading, often on the north side;
► poor design of sun shading;
► non-durable devices (e.g. timber pergolas); and
► ineffective screens made of expanded metal.
Where too much glare or direct sun penetration occurs, the response is to blank out the windows
with blinds or other means and switch the lights on, resulting in a frustration of the intended
objective.
Examples of successful control include:

► sun-shading devices of many different types provided to windows and skylights;
► inclusion of blinds of an appropriate type, particularly for media presentations, also see-
through blinds to utilise views to the north (these may be supplemented by external
shading);
► use of pop-up roofs with appropriately oriented or protected clerestory windows to provide
light and ventilation;
► adjacent verandas and covered walkways used as shading for windows; and
► orientation of building/window openings to select desirable light input.
In relation to older LTC (light timber construction) school buildings, these suffer from a lack of
natural light in their double-loaded central corridors. The recessed roof area also presents drainage
difficulties. Some solutions devised to overcome these issues include:
► raising the corridor roof to the level of adjacent roofs, and providing natural light through
skylights; and
► raising the roof to the level of adjacent roofs, with natural light provided by angling the roof
and installing clerestory windows along one side.
6.6.7 Sealing of Windows
Provide windows with weather seals.
6.6.8 Louvre Windows
The use of frameless louvre windows is not permitted at normal levels due to possible injury arising
from impact.
High-level windows should be operated by a remote winder that secures the windows when shut.
49
6.6.9 Insect Screens
The provision of insect screens is acceptable in food preparation areas only.
Insect screens may be considered for windows or openings which provide night purging as
protection from mosquitoes and other insects.
Any insect screens provided must be of commercial quality and fitted with aluminium or stainless
steel mesh.
6.6.10 Window Hardware
Hardware for aluminium windows must be of commercial standard. Domestic quality is

unacceptable.
All double-hung windows must have spring balances of an appropriate design. Window selection
should ensure that the balance mechanism is not so stiff that the window is difficult to open but stiff
enough to prevent the sash moving under its own weight.
Window operating devices should be operable by all potential users, including people with
disabilities.
6.6.11 Sizing of Windows
Windows should be oriented so that the majority face north and south, and the amount of east- and
west-facing glass is minimised (this must be addressed in the Masterplan report).
Window sizing should subscribe to the minimum requirements of the relevant Australian Standard.
In their sizing, the aim is to achieve a balance of daylight, view, heat gain and heat loss. Bearing this
in mind:
North Windows: Size north facing windows at 20% of the floor area they serve so that they
benefit daylighting and passive solar heating.
South Windows: Size south facing windows to minimise heat loss in winter while ensuring that
they provide adequate daylight to rooms all year round. A figure of 10% of
the floor area is suggested as a useful starting point for sizing.
East and West Minimise east and west facing glass, and make the maximum size of glass 5%
Windows: percent of floor area they serve. If windows are larger than this, consider
movable external blinds to totally cover the window, or fixed vertical fins or
egg crate shades.
Note: In accordance with “F4.2” of the Building Code of Australia, the aggregate light transmitting
area should not be less than 10% of a room’s floor area.
50
6.6.12 Shading of Windows
Shade north facing windows with appropriate eaves or a fixed shading device comprising a vertical
shading angle of at least 56 degrees measured from the window sill. Extend the shading device one
metre past each end of the window. On east- and west-facing windows, vertical shading is effective.
(The shading of windows must be addressed in the Schematic Design report.)
6.7 Doors and Hatches
6.7.1 External Doors
External doors should:

► in general, be of standard dimensions (of no more than 2100mm height) and comply with
the Building Code of Australia;
► not be too large, as large and heavy doors are difficult for small children to open (the current
trend for full-height doors creates a problem in this respect. If a large door is fitted with a
door closer of sufficient strength, this adds to the problem. The operating force for doors
should accord with the Building Code of Australia);
► be at least half glazed with safety glass for two-way vision in trafficable areas (the size of
glass panels must accord with AS 1428.1);
► be able to cope with heavy and constant usage;
► be sufficiently robust to provide appropriate security to the building;
► be properly weatherproofed and protected from climatic influences;
► be either solid core timber with three hinges per door
OR
be aluminium with appropriately heavy sections and fixing to prevent long term sagging,
with pivot hinges;
► have an additional hinge fitted to the top of the door where door-closers are fitted to
external doors or large internal doors;
► have any door fixings to lightweight metal provided with backing plates for support;
► be provided with restrainers, door stops, etc. to prevent impact to adjoining surfaces;
► be provided with metal framing;
► if aluminium, be constructed from a commercial-grade section and have a solid bottom
panel;
51
► have lever-style handles in accordance with the Building Code of Australia (handles and
mechanism should be sufficiently robust to withstand vandalism, abuse and the effects of
frequent use);
► provide a level of access appropriate to the purpose of the space for which they are used;
► be fire rated or smoke sealed as required by the Building Code of Australia;
► be fitted with weather seals to the bottoms and edges, and to the jambs meeting stiles of
double doors;
► provide air locks to main entrances accessing heated areas (air lock sizes should accord with
the Building Code of Australia;
► be provided with mat wells at all entrances (the mats should be recessed or have tapered
edges as shown in the Building Code of Australia);
► include fittings such as door handles in primary schools that are appropriate for small
children; and
► if a required exit, be a single-action opening door, openable from the inside as required by
the Building Code of Australia.
6.7.2 Hinge Stress
Failure of external doors is largely attributable to hinge stress. The over extension of doors by wind
or students will damage components such as frames and hinges. Damage also occurs when doors
are pushed against the action of door closers. Such damage can be minimised by:
► locating doors adjacent to walls to provide a definite door stop;
► locating doors in sheltered locations;
► providing all external doors with door stops or steel handrails on the hinge side;
► constructing aluminium doors with pivot type hinges complete with floor springs and
concealed head closers; and
► minimising the number of external doors (e.g. no external doors to general purpose
classrooms).
Door stops should not be located close to the hinge. The action of the door impacting on the stop
will break the bottom hinge. If a floor-mounted door stop creates a trip hazard when fixed in the
normal location beneath the handle, a door stay can be used, fixed to the head of the door.
6.7.3 Internal Doors
Internal doors should have the same qualities as external doors except that there is no requirement
for weatherproofing.
Internal doors need not necessarily be metal framed, except where frequent impact is likely, and
may also have loose-pin hinges.
Zoning
Internal doors should be provided to separate heated from non-heated spaces on the same level.
Doors are also required to separate one level from another, thereby preventing the rise of heated air
52
to an upper level. Consider door seals to improve the separation, especially on doors that open onto
stairwells.
6.7.4 Smoke and Fire Doors
Smoke and fire doors shall be provided as required by the Building Code of Australia.
Magnetic hold-open devices should be provided for these doors.
Equipment should comply with the various parts of AS 1670 fire detection, warning, control and
intercom systems.
Refer also Section 7.9 – Fire Protection and Section 7.9.3.
6.7.5 Selection and Detailing of Operable Walls
Operable walls can be problematic and require care in selection and the design of their installation.
Poor detailing and construction can result in inadequate acoustic separation and hinge failure.
Operable walls need to be operated and secured in position without a requirement for physical
strength.
The quality of operable walls varies considerably. These wall-doors are expensive, but selecting a
lower-cost door can make them a liability instead of an advantage.
6.7.6 Proprietary Aluminium Stud Partition Type Door Frames
Proprietary systems of aluminium framing for doors and glazed partitions designed to suit metal
stud wall framing have door frames which do not include corner reinforcement stakes. This means
that the force of a door closer operating on the head of the door frame breaks the joint between
head and jamb and allows the head to twist away from the wall face. This method of door framing
should be avoided, particularly where door closers are likely to be held open.
6.7.7 Door Hardware
Selection of Hardware
All hardware should be commercial quality and able to withstand heavy usage.
Back-sets need to be selected to suit the door. Many aluminium framed doors have locks with too
short a back-set, resulting in fingers being jammed against the door frame when the door is opened.
Master Keying
All locks should be part of the school master-key system.
53
Hinges and Handle Requirements
Post-occupancy evaluations have previously noted an insufficient number of hinges used on

doors, resulting in doors dropping and jamming. At least three heavy-duty stainless steel hinges
are required.
Refer also Section 6.7.2 – Hinge Stress
Large D-shaped door-pulls have been found to come loose and are a maintenance problem.
Smoke and Fire Door Hardware
Magnetic hold-open devices connected to the smoke detector/fire alarm system shall be provided to
doors between smoke and fire compartments. Equipment installation and system design should
comply with the requirements of AS 1670 and associated Australian Standards.
Refer also Section 6.7.4, Section 7.9 – Fire Protection and Section 7.9.3
6.8 Ceilings
6.8.1 Ceiling Materials
As appropriate in most areas, the minimum standard finish is 13mm plasterboard fixed to metal or
timber framing, or mineral fibre acoustic tiles with a minimum noise reduction coefficient (NRC)
rating of 0.7.
Ceiling finishes should be consistent with the acoustic standards described in Section 6.10.3 and
Section 6.11, and should ensure adequate light reflection.
In some areas flush plasterboard ceilings will be acoustically adequate; however, acoustically rated
ceilings will be needed to meet recommended performance in many spaces. (Refer to Section 6.11.7
for specific requirements on acoustic performance).
Ceiling finishes should be selected to provide an appropriate acoustic value for a room according to
its proposed usage.
It is recommended that acoustic tile ceilings be used in all general-purpose classrooms (GPCs). Note
that acoustic tile ceilings are not necessarily more expensive than plasterboard, depending on the
tile selected.
6.8.2 Spaces above Ceilings
Sufficient space above the ceiling should be allowed for services, and access must be made available
for future installations.
Provision should be made for ceiling baffles to minimise sound transmission between rooms.
54
6.8.3 Ceiling Heights
Area Springing Height (m)

General-Purpose Classroom 2.4 (min) – 2.7 (across room average)*
Multi-Purpose Room (150m²) 4.0
Physical Education Space – Primary School (298m²) 4.0**
Physical Education Space/Gymnasium – Primary and 6.0
Secondary Schools (688m²)
* General purpose classrooms should have a minimum average ceiling height of 2.7 metres to allow
for the inclusion of ceiling fans and the penetration of natural light. The minimum height of ceiling
fans, as measured to the underside of fan blades, shall be 2.4 metres from finished floor level.
** If the physical education facility is to be extended in the future, the added cost of providing a 6-
metre rather than a 4-metre high roof shall be funded from sources other than Department
(including extra foundation and structure costs). For design standards relating to ceiling heights for
Competition Grade Facilities, see Appendix 4.
6.8.4 Clearance Heights under Stairs and Bulkheads
Ensure that at least 2100mm clearance is provided in all accessible areas, including beneath stairs
and bulkheads.
6.8.5 Access to Lights
When designing ceilings, of access to light fittings for changing globes/tubes must be considered.
This is a matter of practical maintenance for the school, but it should be noted that safe access for
maintenance is also a requirement of occupational health and safety (OH&S) legislation.
Light fittings are to be mounted at levels below 2700mm above floor level. Where this is not
possible, specific means of safe access to change globes must be provided, e.g. step ladders with a
platform at the required working level.
6.9 Internal Walls

The type and suitability of internal wall framing is dependent on the height and materials to be fitted
to the walls. Additional framing/noggings will be required at lining material junctions and for joinery
as well as in some high traffic areas. Metal or timber framing is acceptable.
6.9.1 Room Dividers
Internal screens can enhance the flexible use of spaces in a school and enable a range of teaching
and learning strategies to be employed.
Moveable internal screens can serve a variety of purposes and should be capable of quick and safe
removal or relocation to facilitate alternative area use. They may serve display and space dividing
purposes, and should generally offer appropriate acoustic separation when in place.
55
Where such screens are to be frequently utilised, they should be of a type that minimises the impact
of any reduction in natural or borrowed light except where light exclusion or reduction is the
objective.
Fixed screens should also be carefully selected to provide space separation without compromising
light quality, and should facilitate supervision of the separated space where required.
6.9.2 Internal Glazing
Where internal glazing is to be used, similar criteria to external glazing should be employed.
AS 1288–2006 should be followed, particularly in relation to references to the use of glass in schools.
Internal glazing should only be installed in a vertical plane. This avoids costly premiums for the
cleaning of inclined glass.
6.9.3 Operable Walls
Where operable walls are to be used, particularly between classrooms, consideration must be given
to the following issues:
► acoustic qualities – often found unsatisfactory, yet must comply with the requirements of
Section 6.11.5;
► weight and size – operable walls can be difficult to manipulate due to their dimensions; and
► wear and tear – deterioration in performance and operability arising from use and damage
to seals, etc.
Other means of connecting spaces should be considered, but whatever means is utilised, acoustic
transmission between adjacent spaces requires careful consideration.
For a standard new primary school of 451+ children, the maximum number of operable walls
provided between classrooms is to be four, offering flexibility to provide eight general purpose
classrooms.
6.9.4 Colour
Light colours should be applied to internal walls to maximise daylight benefit. The colour of internal
walls must be addressed in the Schematic Design report.
6.9.5 Thermal Mass
Concrete slabs and masonry walls are effective in keeping down summer temperatures. Internal
masonry brick and concrete block walls should be promoted to reduce overheating in schools
located in NatHERS Zone 27 (e.g. Mildura – refer to Appendix 3 – Postcode Areas within NatHERS Zones).
The incorporation of thermal mass (concrete slabs and masonry walls) must be addressed in the
Schematic Design report.
56
6.10 Wall and Floor Finishes
Standards of finish must be maintained at levels adequate to cope with normal school usage but
don’t require constant maintenance or repair. “Domestic” standard finishes, for example, in relation
to plasterboard walls, carpets and splashbacks are not acceptable.
Finishes, materials and assemblies must possess fire-hazard properties compliant with the Building
Code of Australia.
6.10.1 Wall Finishes
Selection of appropriate surface finishes must proceed with the knowledge of the activities,
processes, materials and equipment relevant to individual spaces. Wall finishes must be of a
standard type, easily cleaned and repaired if damaged.
Finishes must be assessed to ensure they do not create problems related to toxicity and become an
occupational health and safety hazard.
Selected materials must also possess suitable wear and tear characteristics, including a high degree
of impact resistance. In certain instances, they must be able to cope with uses unintended in the
design (i.e. compressed sheeting to dado height in corridors and some classrooms, rather than
plasterboard). The materials must be stain and graffiti resistant, and have low maintenance
characteristics. Consideration should also be given to the low Spread-of-Flame Index and Smoke-
Developed Index as well as acoustic properties in accordance with the Building Code of Australia.
Minimum provision is outlined in the following table:
Area Suggested Wall Materials

High traffic areas/high use areas (e.g. corridors, • 13mm MDF or Villaboard to 1200mm high
classrooms) • 13mm plasterboard above
Low traffic/low use areas • 13mm plasterboard
Student toilet and shower/change areas • Masonry to ceiling height
• Villaboard on timber framing
Naturally some exceptions exist, such as finishes to gymnasium walls. Exceptions, however, must be
justified to the satisfaction of the Department’s Project Review and Evaluation Panel (PREP).
For higher noise-generating areas such as music, drama and technology spaces, consideration must
be given to sound attenuation between areas.
Splashbacks are generally a minimum 300mm high and shall be tiles, stainless steel or a material to
match the bench tops. Where splashbacks are of a material to match bench tops, they should be
coved. Joints between bench and splashback (if any) and joints between splashback and walls should
be sealed using a silicon sealant employed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Fillets
between adjacent surfaces are not satisfactory as they do not provide scope for elastic movement.
All grouting in toilets should be sealed.
57
6.10.2 Floor Finishes
Floors, as with other finishes in a school, are subject to very high levels of wear and tear and
sometimes to instances of inappropriate use.
In general, floor finishes should provide high durability, be of a standard commercial grade/type
enabling areas to be repaired or replaced economically, and must meet the Building Code of
Australia requirements for safety, including its Spread-of-Flame and Smoke-Developed Indices.
The following additional factors should be considered:

► slippage – where water, oil, grease, sawdust, steps/stairs, etc. may occur (refer to AS/NZS
4586 Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials; SAA HB 197 An
introductory guide to the slip resistance of pedestrian surface materials; and Natspec
Technote DES001);
► sound – acoustic compatibility with background and activity noise levels; and
► comfort – thermal and tactile comfort in relation to the usage of the room.
There are an enormous number of proprietary-type floor finishes available to suit both wet and dry
activities in schools.
This section of the document confines itself to those standard finishes which are commonly used in
school situations.
The following sections provide a base standard for the provision of floor coverings to a majority of
the floor area in a school. The use of other proprietary-type floor finishes may be acceptable
provided cost and performance criteria equivalent to the following examples can be met. Ongoing
maintenance costs are another important consideration.
58
The minimum standard for flooring in areas of a school are summarised in the following table:
Area Suggested Type of Material (Minimum Standard)
Carpet Vinyl/Linoleum Timber Epoxy Finishes

GPC-SC
GPC-PS
Art 2D-SC/PS
Art 3D
Graphics
Music - SC/PS
Drama
Info Tech
Home Eco
Fabrics
Science
Technology (Design)
Library
Phys Ed* (Cushioned)
Multi Purpose
Seminar
Lecture
Staff Admin (Wet Areas)
Staff Work
Canteen
Change Shower
First Aid
Student Centre
Toilet
Circulation
* For design standards relating to flooring for Competition Grade Facilities, see Appendix 4.
Carpet
For schools, use carpets which are graded “Contract Extra Heavy Duty” by the Australian Carpet
Classification Scheme (ACCS). ACCS licensees give a warranty with their carpets; this warranty is
subject to proper installation and maintenance (AS 2454 Textile Floor Coverings – Terminology and
AS/NZS 2455.1 and AS/NZS 2455.2 Textile Floor Coverings – Installation Practice will apply).
The ACCS licensee’s instructions for underlay should be followed (AS 4288 will apply).
The selection of carpet should take into account the properties of the underlying base or flooring.
The substrata must comply with manufacturers’ and Australian Standards requirements (see above).
Recent post-occupancy evaluations have found a number of carpeted floors subject to lifting,
possibly due to dampness in the floor beneath. Substrata must be tested before carpet is laid. AS
2455 specifies requirements for substrata.
Carpets should not be installed in areas subject to wetting.

59
Spread-of-Flame and Smoke-Developed Indices are to be used as required by the Building Code of
Australia.
Some carpets are “flocked” or “melded” products. The ACCS still applies.
Vinyl/Linoleum
All linoleum and vinyl flooring must be a genuine low maintenance product, with a clear upper surface
treatment incorporated during manufacture and guaranteed for at least five years. The flooring
material must be in sheet form and fully heat welded on installation (AS 1884 “Floor coverings –
Resilient sheet and tiles – Laying and maintenance practices” will apply).
The material shall be at least 2mm thick. For homogeneous products, the nominated colours and
patterns shall permeate this thickness. For heterogeneous products, the nominated colours and
patterns shall permeate at least 0.7mm of this thickness.
The suppliers’ instructions for underlay should be followed (AS 4288–2003 “Soft underlays for textile
floor coverings” will apply).
Vinyl flooring materials must be stain resistant. Importantly, they must be able to be “wet and dry”
cleaned (in turn they must be waterproof and weldable).
Multi-purpose/physical education facilities can be provided with alternative finishes such as

cushioned vinyl.
Timber
Timber floors for internal activities are restricted to gymnasium areas in secondary colleges (and, in
certain circumstances, drama facilities). Gymnasia can be provided with a sprung timber floor only
where competition sport is to be played under a joint-use agreement and the capital and
maintenance cost of the floor is shared. The timber floor may be provided over either concrete slab
or timber framed on concrete footings.
Epoxy Floor Finishes
These finishes are generally restricted to use in toilets, shower/change facilities or certain specialist
areas.
Epoxy finishes should be applied by trowel on application, not painted, and be a minimum of 6mm
thick.
Where tiles are employed in wet areas, all grouting must be sealed and impervious to moisture.
Regular resealing must be undertaken to avert potential health hazards.
6.10.3 Ceiling Finishes
Ceiling finishes should be selected to provide an appropriate acoustic value for a room according to
its proposed usage and to ensure adequate light reflection.
Sufficient space should be allowed for services, and access must be made available for future
installations.
60
Provision should be made for ceiling baffles to minimise sound transmission between rooms.
As appropriate in most areas, the minimum standard finish is 10mm plasterboard fixed to metal or
timber framing, or mineral fibre acoustic tiles with a minimum NRC rating of 0.7.
Consideration must be given to acoustic treatment in rooms such as music/drama and technology.
This may vary from exposed perforated insulation paper to proprietary-type ceiling tile systems and
strawboard panels.
6.10.4 Paint
Use of APAS approved products
The cost of paint is only a fraction of the cost associated with the time and effort involved. The
performance of paint can vary significantly from one product to another. For this reason products
that have been approved under the Australian Paint Approval Scheme (APAS) are to be used.
Only low VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) paints should be used.
APAS tests and certifies paints and coatings to ensure they meet stringent performance
specifications. The APAS “List of Approved Products” contains more than 2000 approved products
and is a comprehensive guide for specifiers. APAS lists include products with approved limits for
volatile organic compounds (VOCs) in paints and coatings and do not include products containing
lead, chromates or other toxic ingredients.
The basis of the scheme is the specifications prepared by APAS. Products are approved against these
specifications and are required to be produced in APAS approved manufacturing plants.
Refer to APAS Document D184 Guide to Specifications, Supply and Quality Assurance (available on
the web site http://www.apas.gov.au/) and Australian Standard AS 2311 Painting of Buildings.
To obtain a cross reference between the AS/NZS 2311 (Table 4.2) Paint Reference Numbers and the
relevant APAS specification, it is necessary to refer to the APAS Document D 125. For example, Paint
Reference Number B3 corresponds to Specification Number 0015/3, and these Specification
Numbers can then be entered into the specification, shown below as an additional column to the
Natspec Paint Type Table:
Paint type AS/NZS 2311 Paint Australian Standard APAS Specification

reference no. (Table 4.2) Number
Semi gloss solvent-borne: B3 AS 3730.5 0015/3

interior
Full gloss solvent-borne: B5 AS 3730.6, 0015/1
exterior AS 3750.22
Full gloss solvent-borne: B5 AS 3730.6 0015/1

interior
The “List of Approved Products” is available for purchase in electronic format (PDF file only) from
APAS.
61
APAS is administered by the CSIRO Materials Science & Engineering Division located at Highett,
Victoria. Contact:
CSIRO Materials Science & Engineering
37 Graham Rd (PO Box 56)
Highett Vic 3190, Australia
Tel +61 3 9252 6307; Fax +61 3 9252 6011; Email: apas@csiro.au
Preferred Materials
For general use, and particularly on exterior timber, latex (water-based) paints are usually favoured.
Only low VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) paints should be used.
Solvent-based enamels are preferred for metal surfaces and those subject to wear and tear (e.g.
doors, door frames, architraves, skirtings, painted window reveals).
Solvent-based semi-gloss enamel can also be used on internal walls.
Low-sheen acrylic (latex) can be used on internal walls.
Full-gloss acrylic should be used for external walls.
Latex paints can usually be applied over existing solvent-based paints, although a latex undercoat
may be necessary in more arduous situations. However, solvent-based paints should not be applied
over latex types. Latex paint finishes are usually identified simply since they can be removed by a
swab soaked in methylated spirits. Solvent-based paints remain sound under this test.
Colours
Light colours maximise the reflection of light and tend to make rooms seem larger, but often show
marks.
Light colours should be applied to internal walls to maximise daylight benefit.
Darker colours are more serviceable in high wear locations such as skirting boards.
Smooth colour transitions from room to room are important in achieving colour harmony.
The completed paint job will look deeper in colour than a small sample, particularly when the same
colour is used on all walls.
The colour of internal walls must be addressed in the Design Development report.
Gloss Levels
Flat and low gloss finishes best mask surface imperfections, but should be limited to areas not
subject to wear and tear or moisture, such as ceilings.
Semi gloss (satin) is a compromise between masking defects in a surface and providing a serviceable,
readily cleaned, finish.
62
Glossy finishes are preferred for surfaces subject to wear and tear, dirt retention, moisture,
condensation, or frequent cleaning; notably architraves, cupboards, door, and metal work.
6.11 Acoustics
The acoustic design of a project is discussed in general terms in Section 4.4.9 – Acoustics. This section
defines the acoustic design parameters and performance standards recommended for schools.
6.11.1 Statutory Requirements and Standards
Acoustic design requirements must be addressed in accordance with the following statutory
requirements:
► “Occupational Health and Safety (Noise) Regulations Statutory Rule No. 10/2004” which
specifies allowable noise levels in the workplace.
► “State Environment Protection Policy (Control of Noise From Commerce, Industry and
Trade) No. N-1” (SEPP N-1) which regulates noise emission in metropolitan Melbourne.
► Australian Standards AS/NZS 2107 “Acoustics – Recommended Design Sound Levels and
Reverberation Times for Building Interiors”. Within this Standard, Table 1, Section 1
provides recommendations for design sound levels in education buildings. It is
recommended that these levels be achieved.
Occupational Health and Safety (Noise) Regulations Statutory Rule No. 10/2004
These regulations specify the allowable noise levels and noise exposure standards in the workplace.
The allowable noise levels and exposure standards are applicable to all areas of the building that
could constitute a workplace; however, they are most commonly relevant in workshops, technology
classrooms, material preparation rooms and plant rooms.
A workplace must be designed to meet the following standards:

► peak noise levels no greater than 140dB(C); and
► an equivalent continuous noise level not exceeding 85dB(A) over 8 hours of a workday.
These are mandatory requirements.
Expert advice is generally required to determine if the above standards are likely to be exceeded. In
most cases a noise exposure control strategy will be required to ensure compliance with the
statutory standards. Noise exposure control strategies must be strictly in accordance with the
requirement of the Regulations.
State Environmental Protection Policy No. N-1 (SEPP N-1)
This document defines procedures for determining mandatory noise limits applicable to any
mechanical plant or equipment that may emit noise to a neighbouring noise sensitive location. A
noise sensitive location can be a residence or a motel or a hospital or similar.
Expert advice is generally required to determine if noise from a school is likely to comply with the
SEPP No. N-1 noise limits.
63
Noise sources that can lead to non-compliance include (but are not limited to) air conditioning
equipment, exhaust fans and compressors.
Designers need to confirm that the project design will be compliant with SEPP No. N-1 noise limits.
AS/NZS 2107 “Acoustic: Recommended Design Sound Levels and Reverberation

Times for Building Interiors”
This standard provides recommended design sound levels in a wide range of occupancies and
includes recommendations for many room types that occur in educational buildings. This standard
can be used or interpreted to define appropriate noise level design goals for spaces not specifically
addressed by the Building Quality Standards Handbook.
It should be noted that the noise levels recommended in the standard apply to an unoccupied space
and are not intended to cover noise from room occupants (i.e. voices).
This standard also provides recommended design reverberation times for a range of occupancies,
and includes recommendations for many room types that occur in educational buildings.
6.11.2 Acoustic Floor Planning
Floor planning should include specific consideration of acoustic design requirements.
Spaces with opposite acoustic requirements should be located as far apart as is practicable.
Examples include kitchens abutting classrooms, or music practice rooms abutting a library.
Where large open-plan teaching spaces are proposed, with no fixed walls between independent
teaching activities, dedicated quiet rooms or pods should be included in the space planning to
provide a facility for small groups who may need acoustic separation from the main group.
6.11.3 Sound Isolation between Spaces
The following information provides performance standards for the control of sound transfer
between spaces via walls not containing a door.
Room Category Recommended Room to Room

Weighted Standardised Level
Difference, DnT,w
Auditorium 5 50-55
General Purpose Classroom (GPC) 3 40
Open Learning Areas 4 45
Technology Classrooms 5 50-55
Materials Preparation – Machine Room 5 50-55
Art & Craft Studios 3 40
Office (Private) 2 35
Library 4 45
Meeting Room 2 35
Conference Room 4 45
64
Room Category Recommended Room to Room

Weighted Standardised Level
Difference, DnT,w
Seminar Room 3 40
Quiet Room/Pods 3 40
Corridors, Lobbies & Foyers 2 35
Reception Areas 2 35
Store Room or similar 1 30
Toilets & Washrooms 3 40
Kitchens & Kitchenettes 4 45
Staff Room 4 45
Gymnasium/Hall 5 50-55
Music Practice 5 (note 5) 55
Drama Room 5 50-55
Definition
The DnT,w rating is determined using Australian Standards AS ISO 140.4 and AS/NZS ISO 717.1. It
involves assessment at site by measuring the noise reduction between rooms over a range of sound
frequencies and then standardising the result.
Notes
1. With the exception of Category 1 (where rooms of two different categories abut), the
division system should be based on the higher category.
2. Where any Category 1 room abuts a Category 2 or 3 room, the division system should be
based on a Category 2 system.
3. Where any Category 1 room abuts a Category 4 or 5 room, the division system should be
based on a Category 3 system.
4. The DnT,w performance is to be achieved taking account of all sound paths, including the
ceiling void, floor, ductwork or ventilation openings, windows, perimeter wall junctions etc.
5. Music practice rooms should be designed to DnT,w 55 for all walls.
6. Any Category 3 or 4 walls dividing wet areas from any noise sensitive room shall incorporate
plumbing noise attenuation measures. Plumbing noise attenuation should take the form of a
double or staggered wall stud frame system. Pipes to the wet area should be fixed only to
the studs that are supporting the plasterboard that is facing into the wet area.
7. Walls with Category 3, 4 and 5 performance should extend from floor to slab soffit or from
floor to the roof soffit where there is a metal roof.
8. Walls with Category 1 or 2 performances should terminate at the underside of the ceiling.
However, a positive and lasting acoustic seal must be achieved at the head of the wall.
65
9. In the case of Categories 1, 2 and 3, the ceiling system must not be of perforated or slotted
construction, and would typically be 13mm plasterboard or a compressed acoustic tile
having a thickness of at least 15mm and a weight of 4kg/m² or more.
6.11.4 Satisfactory Construction for Sound Insulation between Rooms
The following list provides descriptions of construction systems that can be deemed to satisfy the
DnT,w performance recommended in Section 6.11.3.
Category 1
Wall Construction: Simple 64mm wide steel or 90mm wide timber stud with a single layer of
13mm plasterboard applied to each side.
Wall Extent: Wall may extend to the underside of any ceilings having a CAC (Ceiling
Attenuation Class) of greater than 30 (examples include flush 13mm plasterboard and 15-
18mm thick compressed acoustic tiles).
Cavity Insulation: Not required.
End Terminations of Other Walls: Standard building construction only. Termination to window
mullions permitted but should be acoustically sealed.
Glazing: Permitted but must be sealed and should be at least 6mm thick.
Category 2
Wall Construction: As for Category 1 except that acoustic insulation should be placed in the
wall cavity.
Wall Extent: The wall structure should project through the suspended ceiling, but framing and
plasterboard layers need not extend to divide the ceiling cavity.
Cavity Insulation: Acoustic grade, 50mm thick with a minimum density of 14kg/m³.
End Terminations of Other Walls: As for Category 1.
Glazing: Not to make up more than 15% of the wall area, and must be sealed 10mm
laminated glass.
Ceiling: Must have a CAC rating not less than 35. Must be overlaid with a 50mm thick,
24kg/m3 (minimum) density acoustic grade insulation for an extent of not less than 1200mm
each side of the partition line.
Category 3
Wall Construction: Single 64mm steel or 120mm timber stud system lined with 2 x 13mm
plasterboard on one side with 1 x 13mm plasterboard on the other side. Acoustic insulation
is to be placed in the wall cavity.
Wall Extent: Wall system to interrupt the suspended ceiling with not less than a 1 x 13mm
plasterboard layer extending across the ceiling cavity and being acoustically sealed around
the perimeter.
Cavity Insulation: As for Category 2.

66
End Terminations of Other Walls: Walls should not abut window mullions, window glazing or
simple lightweight partitions.
Glazing: Not recommended in these partitions.
Ceiling: Must have a CAC rating of not less than 30.
Category 4
Wall Construction: As for Category 3, however 2 x 13mm layers of plasterboard are required
on both sides of the wall studs.
Wall Extent: All plasterboard layers to interrupt the ceiling and divide the ceiling cavity.
End Terminations of Other Walls: Wall structure should interrupt the flow of the lining of any
flanking wall (e.g. sheets of plasterboard must not be permitted to pass uninterrupted past
the end of the Category 4 wall).
Glazing: Not Recommended.
Ceiling: No specific requirement relating to sound transmission.
Category 5
Wall Construction: Two rows of 64mm steel or 90mm timber stud separated by not less than
70mm, and lined with 2 x 16mm plasterboard on both sides.
Wall Extent: As for Category 4.
End Terminations of Other Walls: Not to form junctions with any lightweight wall or facade
system unless the structure of the abutting wall/facade is physically interrupted by the
dividing wall.
Glazing: Not permitted.
Ceiling: As for Category 4.
As a general recommendation for all acoustically rated walls:

► Wall perimeters to be fully stopped and sealed.
► Walls are not to be degraded acoustically by penetrations for electrical or plumbing fixings
or fixtures.
► Heads of walls terminating at the underside of suspended ceiling are to be sealed using
compressible acoustic foam and/or flexible acoustic sealant beads.
► Walls dividing the ceiling cavity are to be sealed at the head, sides and at any and all services
penetrations.
► Air conditioning and or ventilation openings in ceilings must not compromise the sound
insulation between rooms and should be treated/modified accordingly. Where a duct
penetrates an acoustically rated wall, it should be of steel walled construction and internally
67
acoustically lined for not less than 1200mm each side of the penetration. The penetrating
duct must be acoustically sealed into the wall penetration using a flexible non-hardening
acoustic sealant.
6.11.5 Sound Isolation between Spaces and Connecting Doors
The presence of doors significantly limits the sound insulation between abutting rooms.
Walls with unsealed standard doors need not be rated above Category 2. However, the following
performance standards are recommended for doors to occupied spaces.
Room Recommended Room to Room Category

Sound Reduction Index Dw for Wall Containing Door
Auditorium 32 4
General Purpose Classroom (GPC) 25 2
Office (Private) 20 1
Library 25 2
Meeting Room 25 2
Conference Room 30 2
Seminar Room 30 2
Quiet Room/Pods 25 2
Corridors & Lobbies & Foyers 25 2
Reception Areas 20 1
Toilets & Washrooms 20 1
Kitchens & Kitchenettes 20 1
Staff Room 25 2
Gymnasium/Hall 30 3
Music Practice 32 5
68
Deemed to satisfy systems:
Performance Door Type Door Thickness Acoustic Seals
20 Semi solid core 32 No
25 Solid core 35 Yes : Type 1
Acoustic Seals
Type 1: Simple/standard compression seals applied to the head and sides of a ‘light weight’
aluminium or timber frame. No bottom seal.
Type 2: Light-duty non-adjustable acoustic seal rated to Dw 30 fitted to the head and sides of a stiff
steel or timber frame.
Type 3: As per Type 2; however, seal system to be adjustable and rated to Dw 32.
Operable Walls
Operable walls commonly require acoustic rating. Designers should establish the proposed use of
rooms each side of the proposed operable wall and determine the acoustic rating using the Table in
Section 6.11.3.
Operable walls capable of achieving a performance greater than Dw 35-38 are generally quite costly,
and operable walls capable of the 35-38 range are commonly used between learning spaces.
Operable walls must be installed in accordance the wall system suppliers recommendations. The
ceiling void above any acoustically rated operable wall must be divided using a solid baffle
constructed with two layers of 13mm plasterboard on a suitable framing. The baffle must be fully
sealed around its perimeter.
When selecting an operable wall based on laboratory ratings, it should be noted that it can perform
in the order of 8 rating points lower when tested on site. Therefore if the wall is selected based on
laboratory ratings, a rating in the order of 43 to 46 is required.
End termination of the operable wall should be reviewed and approved by the operable wall
supplier or a qualified acoustic consultant prior to installation.
69
6.11.6 Reverberation Control and Ambient Noise Level
The following are recommended reverberation times for school buildings:
Room Reverberation Recommended Maximum

Time (seconds) Ambient Noise Level, LAeq(dB)
Auditorium AS/NZS 2107* 30-35
General Purpose Classrooms 0.4-0.6 30-35

(GPCs)
Open Learning Areas 0.6 30-35
Technology Classrooms 0.6-0.8 40-45
Materials Preparation – Machine AS/NZS 2107* AS/NZS 2107*

Room
Art & Craft Studios 0.6-0.8 40-45
Office (Private) 0.4-0.6 40-45
Library 0.4-0.6 40-45
Meeting Room 0.4-0.6 40-45
Conference Room 0.6-0.7 35-40
Seminar Room 0.4-0.6 40-45
Quiet Room/Pods 0.4 35-40
Corridors, Lobbies & Foyers 0.6-0.8 45-50
Reception Areas 0.6-0.8 40-45
Toilets & Washrooms NA 45-50
Kitchens & Kitchenettes 0.6-0.8 50-55
Staff Room 0.4-0.6 40-45
Gymnasium/Hall AS/NZS 2107* 45-55
Music Practice 0.7-0.9 25-30
Drama Room AS/NZS 2107* 35-40
* Note: Refer to the details of AS/NZS 2107 to determine the recommended reverberation time for
this space.
70
6.11.7 Satisfactory Systems for Reverberation Control
General Purpose Classrooms
Floor Walls Ceiling
Carpet or Carpet Tile Generally plasterboard or glass with Acoustic tile with an NRC rating of not
(90% coverage) display boards covering 30% of one less than 0.5 and forming not less than
wall. 80% of the ceiling area.
Open Learning Areas
Floor Walls Ceiling
Carpet or Carpet Tile Generally plasterboard or glass. Acoustic tile with an NRC rating of not
(90% coverage) less than 0.7 and forming not less than
90% of the ceiling area.
General Purpose Science Room
Floor Walls Ceiling
Timber or Vinyl Generally plasterboard or glass with Acoustic tile with an NRC rating of not
display boards covering 30% of one less than 0.7 and forming not less than
wall. 90% of the ceiling area.
Technology Classrooms, Art and Craft Class Rooms and Materials Preparation Area
Floor Walls Ceiling
Timber or Vinyl Generally plasterboard or glass. Acoustic tile with an NRC rating of not
less than 0.7 and forming not less than
Offices, Meeting Room, Seminar Room, Quite Room and Staff Room
Floor Walls Ceiling
Carpet or Carpet Tile Generally plasterboard or glass. Acoustic tile with an NRC rating of not
(100% coverage) less than 0.5 and forming not less than
Corridor, Lobbies, Foyers and Reception
Floor Walls Ceiling
Timber or Vinyl Generally plasterboard or glass. Acoustic tile with an NRC rating of not
71
Kitchens
Floor Walls Ceiling
Vinyl or Tiled Generally plasterboard. Acoustic tile with an NRC rating of not
6.11.8 External Noise
Due consideration should be given to the appropriate design of the school building facade such that
the recommended ambient noise levels tabulated in Section 6.11.7 would be achieved with
windows and doors closed.
An appropriately qualified acoustic consultant should evaluate school sites that are impacted by
noise from traffic, rail activity, commercial/industrial noise and/or aircraft noise. The results of the
evaluation should be used as a basis for gaining advice on appropriate facade designs.
Noise from aircraft should be attenuated to the recommended noise levels set out in AS 2021.
6.11.9 Rain Noise
The design should specifically address the need to control excessive noise from rain in learning and
speech use areas. Rain noise shall not exceed the ambient noise levels tabulated in Section 6.11.7 by
more than 5dB(A) during a moderately heavy rain event (up to 25mm/hr rate).
As a basic requirement, (which does not necessarily meet the performance specification above)
metal roofing should have a thermal/acoustic insulation blanket between roof purlins/battens and
the roofing, which is at least 75mm thick.
72
Section 7:
Section 6 - Substructure, Superstructure & Finishes Internal Services
Hazel Glen College

Architect: Minx Architecture Pty Ltd
73
Section 7 - Internal Services
7. INTERNAL SERVICES
7.1 Material Selection

When designing any given service, the designer is required to make use of the most cost effective
materials and installation techniques available, commensurate with appropriate levels of service and
durability, and in accordance with the philosophy outlined in this handbook.
Where classes, types, etc. are referred to, they are in accordance with the relevant Australian
Standard.
7.2 Sanitary Fixtures
7.2.1 General
Fixtures shall be of the same model and manufacture throughout a school. Fixtures for later stages
shall match the first stage.
Where alternative types are to be considered, they shall only be selected if the fixture selection is
more cost effective for the particular application.
All vitreous china fixtures shall be white unless directed otherwise by the Principal Consultant.
Technical Data Sheets for plumbing fixtures in secondary college facilities related to science, home
economics and technology (trade) are contained in Appendix 2.
In accordance with the Dangerous Goods (Storage and Handling) Regulation 2012, the design of
laboratories shall be in accordance with Australian Standard AS 2982 – Laboratory Design &
Construction – Part 1 General.
7.2.2 WC Suites
Student Areas: Floor mounted vitreous china pan with concealed in-wall cistern with anti-vandal
fixing accessories, or compliant cistern-less systems with anti-vandal fixing
accessories.
Staff Areas: Floor mounted vitreous china pan with concealed in-wall cistern with anti-vandal
fixing accessories, or compliant cistern-less systems with anti-vandal fixing
accessories.
Toilet Seats: Use of a double flap toilet seat is not required. Single flap seats should be provided.
74
7.2.3 Urinals
Student Areas: Slab type 304 stainless steel, 1.2mm thick for 3 metre maximum length, 1.6mm
thick for lengths exceeding 3 metre, grated platform type.
Concealed in-wall cisterns with anti-vandal fixing accessories, or compliant cistern-

less systems with anti-vandal fixing accessories.
Ventilation, wall finishes and flooring should be considered in the control of odours.
Note on Water Usage:

Automatic flushing was previously recommended for primary schools but water
shortages now indicate a need for other solutions. Provision of proprietary “microbial”
cubes in urinals (in conjunction with a simple specialised daily cleaning routine) has
been successfully used in commercial locations. Despite the apparent success of
waterless urinal operation, normal cisterns should still be provided for flushing (with
water supply turned off) to allow for all contingencies.
Staff Areas: Wall-mounted vitreous china with wall-mounted exposed cistern or as for student
areas if more than two stalls are required.
7.2.4 Basins
Student Areas: Wall-mounted vitreous china (nominally 500mm x 400mm, with a 140mm
minimum depth) with two soap holders and integral tapholes to suit specified
tapware OR an installed bench with a flat-rim inset basin.
Stainless steel troughs can also be employed in student toilet areas.
Staff Areas: Self-rimming vanity basin, vitreous china (nominally 500mm x 400mm, with a
140mm minimum depth) with two soap holders and integral tapholes to suit
specified tapware.
Although wall-hung basins are not recommended, where used, they should be fixed over the top of a
tiled backing. Manufacturer’s options for stronger support brackets should be identified.
In accordance with AS/NZS 3500 Part 4.2 Hot Water Supply Systems – Acceptable Solutions, the
delivery temperature of water for personal hygiene purposes (primarily bathroom taps) is legally
required to be 45ºC for primary schools and secondary colleges.
7.2.5 General Purpose Sinks
Employ a flat rim 0.9mm thick satin finish 304 stainless steel sink. Bowl size to be nominally 380mm
x 330mm, with a 150mm minimum depth. Number of bowls, location of bowls, and overall length of
sink is to suit the particular application. Sinks are to have integral tapholes to suit specified tapware.
Sinks used by children may need to be fitted at a lower than normal level. If adults, however, are also
required to use these sinks or assist children in their use, their needs should be considered. Sinks set too
low can result in occupational health and safety issues for staff.
75
7.2.6 General Purpose Tubs and Troughs
Employ satin finish 304 stainless steel tubs and troughs to suit particular requirement.
7.2.7 Showers
Employ conventional shower sets to suit particular requirement, with taps located clear of discharge
from rose outlet. Shower roses shall be AAA-rated unless flow restrictor valves are fitted to the taps
supplying the shower. Consider the use of push button on/off shower controls.
In accordance with AS/NZS 3500 Part 4.2 Hot Water Supply Systems – Acceptable Solutions, the
delivery temperature of water for personal hygiene purposes (primarily bathroom taps) is legally
required to be 45ºC for primary schools and secondary colleges.
7.2.8 Cleaners’ Sinks
Cleaners’ sinks should be provided in a dedicated space that is appropriately designed in terms of
floor and wall finishes as well as ventilation. Any storage within this space must be in accordance
with relevant Australian Standards and legislation.
Sinks should be wall-mounted vitreous china, with a chrome-plated hinged bucket grate. Bowl size
to be nominally 500mm x 400mm, with a 150mm minimum depth.
7.2.9 Boiling-water Units
Employ a wall-mounted or under-bench type as appropriate, with capacity to suit particular

application and featuring a time clock device for energy efficiency. Boiling-water units shall have a
five-litre maximum capacity. Boiling-water units are for hot drinks and deliver water at 95°C.
Under-bench domestic hot water units for personal hygiene in schools must now deliver water at a
maximum of 45°C (refer AS/NZS 3500.4).
7.2.10 Drinking Fountains and Troughs
Drinking water must be distributed throughout the school to cater for the needs of any grouping,
including wheelchair users. Drinking water should be provided on the basis of one tap per 30
students.
Facilities may be unitised pillar type drinking fountain units or stainless steel drinking troughs.
Facilities must be designed to allow students to fill water bottles. Consideration should be given in
the design process to locating fountains and troughs in a manner which minimises damage or
vandalism.
Drinking Troughs
Wall-mounted or floor-mounted 1.2mm thick satin finish 304 stainless steel trough with rear upstand
skirt to conceal pipe work, and holed for drinking taps. Trough dimensions nominally 300mm wide x
150mm deep, with taps at nominal 450mm centres. Tapware shall be lever spring-action drinking
cocks with mouthguard and 100mm long flanged horizontal extension to tap.
76
7.2.11 Ablution Troughs
For general purpose, wall-mounted or floor-mounted 1.2mm thick satin finish 304 stainless steel
trough with rear upstand skirt to conceal pipe work, and holed for cold only (or hot and cold as
appropriate) spray taps/outlets. Trough dimensions nominally 300mm wide x 150mm deep, with
taps/tap sets at nominal 450mm centres for primary schools and 600mm centres for secondary
colleges.
Notes: 1. For some applications, flat rim troughs may be appropriate.
2. In some environments, acid-resistant 316 stainless steel may be required with waste
to discharge to an acid neutralising tank or solvent/oil interceptor tank. Hand
washing at these troughs is not recommended as soap discharges can affect
performance of treatment apparatus.
7.2.12 Floor Waste Gullies (FWG)
Floor waste gullies shall be 100mm in diameter and chrome-plated for all toilet blocks with external
access. Floors should be graded towards them. Floor waste gullies shall be provided in other areas
where floor wash down is required or as required by regulations.
7.2.13 Tundishes
Cone shaped and of a size to suit application, fabricated from 0.8mm thick copper sheet, and
chrome-plated where exposed except in plant rooms and similar.
7.2.14 Clay and Ablution Troughs
Special-purpose 1.2mm thick satin finish 304 stainless steel trough with special purpose tapware and
waste outlets. Refer to Clay and Ablution Trough Technical Data Sheet – Appendix 2.
7.2.15 Drip Trough and Racks
Special-purpose 1.2mm thick satin finish 304 stainless steel trough, with special-purpose tapware.
Refer to Drip Trough and Rack Technical Data Sheet – Appendix 2.
7.2.16 Frame Baths
Special-purpose 1.2mm thick satin finish acid-resistant 316 stainless steel sink, with special-purpose
tapware. Waste treatment to suit particular application. Refer to Frame Bath Technical Data Sheet –
Appendix 2.
7.2.17 Photographic Troughs
Special-purpose 1.2mm thick satin finish acid-resistant 316 stainless steel or PVC trough, with
special-purpose tapware. Waste to discharge to a mixing tank. Refer to Photographic Trough
Technical Data Sheet – Appendix 2.
7.2.18 Potting Troughs
Special-purpose 1.2mm thick satin finish 304 stainless steel trough. Waste to discharge to a silt pit.
Refer to Potting Trough Technical Data Sheet – Appendix 2.
77
7.2.19 Laboratory Sinks
Flat rim 1.2mm thick satin finish acid-resistant 316 stainless steel. Bowl size to suit particular
application. Laboratory-type tapware may be bench-mounted or sink-mounted to suit particular
application. Waste to discharge to an acid neutralising tank. Refer to Secondary College Science Room
– Plumbing Fixtures – Technical Data Sheet – Appendix 2.
7.2.20 Safety Sprays
Wall-mounted with aerated chrome-plated eye wash outlet, trigger operated and with a nominal
1800mm length of hose.
7.2.21 Fume Cupboards
Refer to Section 5.11.1 – Fume Cupboard for services requirements.
7.2.22 Hand Driers
The hand drier in toilets shall be a direct-wired push-button type with a preset timer for at least 45
seconds running. It shall be suitable for 240 Volt, 50 Hz supply and rated at not more than 2kW with
an air flow of not less than 150m3/h through a fixed (non swivel) nozzle. The noise rating shall be
less than 65dB(A) at 1 metre. Assemblies shall be complete with concealed mounting hardware to
suit the wall type.
A proximity sensor for the drier may be considered rather than a push button, provided such a system is
vandal-proof. An isolation switch should be wall-mounted at a high level above the drier.
7.2.23 Sanitary Facilities for People with Disabilities
Sanitary facilities for adults, including cubicles for ambulant adults with disabilities, must comply with
the Disability (Access to Premises – Buildings) Standards 2009 and the Building Code of Australia.
Sanitary facilities for children should satisfy AS 1428.3.
Pan to wall detail:
To facilitate room cleaning, pans that extend fully to their rear wall should be specified, or else an infill
section installed between the rear of the pan and wall.
7.3 Sanitary Plumbing
7.3.1 Pipe Work
Pipe work shall comply with AS 3500.2 and the following additional requirements:
► preferred pipe work material is PVC unless noted otherwise;
► all pipe work shall be concealed if possible;

► traps for wastes on fixtures requiring treatment apparatus shall be of polypropylene or
stainless steel as appropriate; and
► exposed external pipe work shall be of copper alloy (70/30 brass).
78
7.3.2 Trade Waste Application
A trade waste application (including trade waste plan and a trade waste treatment apparatus
drawing, as appropriate) is to be prepared and lodged with the relevant authority on behalf of the
school.
7.3.3 Treatment Apparatus
The following treatment apparatus is to be considered if other provisions are not made:
► acid neutralising tanks – refer Appendix 2 for standard detail;
► wet feed neutralising tanks for electroplating process equipment – refer Appendix 2 for
standard detail;
► wet feed neutralising tanks and PVC dosing tanks – refer Appendix 2 for standard detail;
► plaster interceptor tanks;
► settling tanks – refer Appendix 2 for standard detail;
► grease interceptors – refer Appendix 2 for standard detail;
► solvent/oil interceptor tanks – refer Appendix 2 for standard detail;
► silt traps – refer Appendix 2 for standard detail;
► mixing tanks – refer Appendix 2 for standard detail; and
► straining traps – refer Appendix 2 for standard detail.
7.3.4 Trade Waste Operation Documentation
Provide the school council with a “monitoring and maintenance of trade waste” manual to ensure
that the operation remains effective.
Supply the school with a record of its trade waste application and plans.
7.4 Water Supply
7.4.1 General
The supply of water is governed by relevant Australian Standards as well as regulations and by-laws
exercised through local water authorities. Victoria’s Safe Drinking Water Act 2003 (refer Department
of Human Services) deals specifically with the regulation and quality of drinking water supplies.
The principal consultant will nominate which fixtures are “cold only” and which are “hot and cold”.
In primary schools, hot water is generally supplied to the following areas:
► staff and administration areas;
► student showers;
► canteen;
► art room; and
79
► accessible toilets for students with disabilities.
In secondary colleges, hot water is generally supplied to all areas except student toilets.
7.4.2 Pipe Work, Valves and Fittings
Pipe work, valves and fittings shall comply with AS/NZS 3500. All pipe work in above-ground
inaccessible spaces shall be copper tube “Type B” (insulated) in accordance with AS 1432 2004.
Consider the use of flow restrictors and pressure reducing valves in a combined water and energy
management system in order to reduce pipe sizes and headworks fees.
7.4.3 Tapware
Tapware shall generally be satin chrome finish with anti-vandal star pattern design handles. Cold-
water handles shall be coded “blue” and hot-water handles coded “red”. Cold-water handles/taps
shall be fixed on the right-hand side of fixture and hot-water handles/taps fixed on the left-hand
side. All tapware shall be of the same model and manufacture throughout a school. Tapware for
later stages shall match the first stage.
Tapware for laboratories and other special-use areas shall be of a design suitable for the proposed
use.
Tapware in sanitary facilities for people with disabilities must comply with AS 1428.1.
Water Efficiency Labelling and Standards (WELS) ratings must be provided for all tapware included under
the current legislation.
7.4.4 Flow Rates (SWEP Requirement)
Under the Department’s Schools Water Efficiency Program (SWEP), water flow rates are set at:
► basins – 4 litres/minute (an exception is the sick bay at a permitted 6 litres/minute if the
basin is the only tap outlet);
► classroom sinks – 6 litres/minute (exceptions are sick bays, home economics and science
preparation rooms at a permitted 9 litres/minute);
► staff sinks – 6 litres/minute (exceptions are the main staff room and canteen at a permitted
9 litres/minute); and
► wash troughs – 9 litres/minute (exceptions are cleaners troughs at a permitted 12
litres/minute).
Refer also to Section 7.2 – Sanitary Fixtures.
7.4.5 Hot-water Units
Hot-water units shall be provided as required. These must be designed in accordance with AS 3500
Part 4 and AS/NZS 3500.4.
Hot-water systems must operate independently of space heating systems.
The design and selection of the most appropriate hot-water service supply will depend on the nature
of the space, its location, usage and the activity therein. Hot-water units should be carefully sized
80
and selected to match the anticipated demand for hot water. The oversizing of units will create
excessive year-round energy waste and expense, and should be avoided. These matters must be
addressed in the Design Development report.
A range of different systems may be appropriate, depending on the application, and include:
► gas storage units;
► continuous-flow gas or electric water heaters; and
► solar hot-water units.
Hot water shall be stored at a minimum of 60°C to inhibit the growth of legionella bacteria.
In both primary schools and secondary colleges, all new hot-water installations, at the outlet of
sanitary fixtures used primarily for personal hygiene, shall deliver hot water not exceeding 45°C.
In selecting the most appropriate hot water supply, the following should be considered:
► Local storage units should be used for areas generating prolonged usage such as shower-
change areas and science rooms.
► Natural gas domestic hot water units are to be used if natural gas is available on the site.
Consideration for electric under bench heating could be given if excessive gas pipe runs are
involved. Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) should not be used at any site where natural gas is
available.
► Continuous-flow electric water units should be considered in areas where short-term low
quantity usage is required (e.g. staff tearooms) and no natural gas (only LPG) is available.
These units should also be considered in other applications.
► The use of solar hot-water units (with a gas or electric boost) should be considered in areas
of suitable climate. (Schools are currently eligible for Victorian Government rebates on the
purchase of a solar hot-water heater.)
► Pressure equalising systems such as “Platypus” may be applicable in some large schools but
they are not generally cost effective in systems using decentralised hot water to reduce hot
water usage.
► The use of timer units should not be considered for gas systems since they are usually
impractical, rarely cost effective, and often unreliable.
► The use of timer units for high efficiency boiling hot-water units are not cost effective given
the good insulative properties of modern units and low out-of-hours electricity costs.
► Any timer controls should be centralised and connect back to a master multi-channel site
clock.
► The storage capacity of water heaters shall be minimised as far as possible.
► All units shall be energy efficient and gas units shall have a 5 Star Rating Energy Label or
better (and preferably electronic ignition). See Section 7.2.9 if boiling water units serve sinks,
etc. Consider timers for shut down on holidays, weekends, night-time and curriculum days.
The selection of an energy-efficient domestic hot-water heater or the selection of solar hot water
must be addressed in the Design Development report.
81
7.4.6 Water Supply Issues
The design of the water supply system shall address the following issues as appropriate:
► isolation of areas/fixtures by suitable valving to permit maintenance;
► provision of mixing valves where domestic hot water is supplied to personal hygiene outlets
from storage water heaters;
► provision of backflow prevention devices to protect other areas from any hazard areas;
► provision of master control valve systems to demonstration benches;
► electronic taps for canteen wash basins;
► chrome plating on all exposed pipe work;
► provision of simple pressure-limiting devices to reduce overall water consumption;
► fitting of all showers with low flow heads; and
► consideration of the Department’s Schools Water Efficiency Program (SWEP) which may
have requirements relevant to water supply design.
7.5 Gas Services
7.5.1 General
Gas services shall be natural gas or liquefied petroleum gas.
Completed installation shall be in accordance with AS/NZS 5601.1 and AS/NZS 5601.2 and the local
supply authority.
In the selection of the most appropriate gas appliances, the following should be considered:
► gas appliances should have electronic ignition;
► gas appliances should be sealed combustion units;
► no atmospheric burners or pilot lights should be permitted;
► central plant shall have modulating heat output in response to changing load requirements;
► LPG should not be used at any site where there is natural gas;
► appliance thermostats shall be locked off from user alteration;
► units shall operate by simple on/off control or by time duration;
► local gas-heating appliances (ducted/space) shall be high-efficiency condensing units; and
► small space heating to offices or sick bays should utilise electric wall-mounted radiant panels
unless central hydronic heating is available.
7.5.2 Connection Process
For new connections and gas supply upgrades, the plumber and/or gas consultant must contact the
appropriate WoVG SPC Gas Retailer (currently AGL) to ascertain whether additional gas supply is
available from existing gas supply assets. The retailer will in turn contact the gas distributor for that
particular geographic area, and if there are any gas infrastructure works required, the gas distributor
82
will provide to the gas retailer a quote and Supply Offer, with the retailer forwarding this quote and
Offer onto the party making the initial inquiry. All quotes and offers should be forwarded to the SRAB
for an independent assessment prior to signing.
Once the offer has been signed and forwarded back to the retailer, the works required will be
completed. Consultants and plumbers must allow up to 60-days’ notice from the date of the initial
inquiry to the proposed connection date.
Email contact should be made with AGL at the following email address:
AGL Energy Limited

Locked Bag 14120 MCMC
Melbourne VIC 8001
T: 1800 680 430

F: 1800 634 823
E: gasnewconns@agl.com.au
www.agl.com.au
7.5.4 Tariffs
For new and existing projects, the estimated annual usage will determine the tariff assigned.
Generally, there are two tariffs available:
► Tariff V - <10,000GJ per annum – is a bundled tariff, and the rates vary by Distribution Zone
► Tariff D - >10,000GJ per annum – is an unbundled tariff and subject to an offer from AGL at
the current prevailing gas market price.
An assessment of the annual usage should also be undertaken to ensure that the correct tariff is
assigned post-completion of the upgrade works.
For new projects, as the gas connection point will need to be rolled into the WoVG SPC, the following
details need to be provided to the SRAB to enable it to arrange for the new gas connection to be added
to the WoVG SPC:
► plumber’s name, telephone number and email address (if known at this stage);
► school name, telephone number and address (if existing school);
► principal’s name, telephone number and email address;
► MIRN (Meter Installation Reference Number) if known;
► any existing gas usage assessment reports where available, and copy of any communications
with AGL.
7.5.4 Meters
Consider providing gas sub-meters to high energy-use areas and/or equipment (such as trade blocks
but not kilns) in order to obtain energy-use profiles. This, however, is not a high priority.
83
7.5.5 Gas Supply to Relocatable Buildings
Where mains gas is provided to the site, consider a natural gas reticulation system to relocatable
buildings described in the initial design, as well as branch take-offs for future additions.
If gas is to be provided to relocatable buildings, consider positioning the reticulation system in common
services trenches with stormwater lines.
7.5.6 Pipe Work – Above Ground
All above-ground permanent pipe work shall be “Type B” copper tube to AS 1432. All joints are to be
brazed where practical. All pipe work is to be concealed from view in normally occupied areas.
Provide protection from mechanical damage where exposed. Ensure adequate permanent
ventilation to enclosed pipe risers. Provide isolation valves at each floor-level take-off. Allow 10%
spare capacity in pipe work sizing. Where LPG is to be used and natural gas is likely to be available
within five years, allow for natural gas in pipe work design.
7.5.7 Emergency Isolation Valves
Provide clearly labelled and accessible isolation valves within each room served with a general
purpose fuel gas outlet. Locate valves generally adjacent emergency exits within that room.
7.5.8 Outlets
Provide fixed turret type outlets for laboratory bench-top use. Provide the demonstrator’s bench
with an isolation valve to restrict gas supply to student outlets. Provide isolation valves and connect
to each gas appliance.
7.5.9 Gas Booster
Gas booster devices are to be avoided where possible. Where required, locate carefully and ensure
that adequate acoustic measures are provided to meet acceptable ambient and internal noise
criteria.
7.6 Heating
7.6.1 General
Energy Design Process

A design process is to be undertaken which includes:
► a project meeting with all stakeholders and agreement to goals; and
► treatment of mechanical, electrical and building fabric design as the one exercise.
The most appropriate heating system for a particular application will depend on the nature of the space
to be heated and the activity therein. A range of different systems may be appropriate, depending on
the application. These include:
► power-flue console heater;
► high efficiency condensing ducted gas space heating (in conjunction with ducted cooling);
84
► reverse cycle air conditioning (where cooling is an entitlement);

► ground source heat pump;
► hydronic heating (hot water radiators);
► electrical radiant heaters (panel, tube); and
► gas radiant heaters (where ceiling height and government regulations permit).
Undesirable systems include:
► slab heating; and
► electric fan heaters (heat shifter fans may be considered in transferring heat to small areas such
as offices adjacent to heated rooms).
System selection should take into account required amenity levels and employ a life-cycle process (over
15 years) to determine the most appropriate system based on total ownership costs.
Selection of a suitable system should be based on its ability to provide heating in an appropriate and
adequate manner.
All plant is to be energy efficient and have a 5-Star Rating Energy Label or better if a star rating is
available. The need for personal heating devices should be avoided through good design. Spot radiant
heaters can be installed, if required, but only as a last option.
Ensure that plant is not over-sized and hence more expensive than need be or inefficient when operating
at low capacity.
Energy Targets
No heating system should be installed until an energy target has been established and the performance
of the proposed heating system compared against that target, and revised if necessary.
The mechanical services design and installation shall also be in accordance with the relevant Mechanical
Energy Performance (MEP) industry standard guideline.
Building Design Considerations
No heating system shall be designed or installed until due consideration has been given to a satisfactory
reduction of the heating load. Items to be considered include:
► orientation of building blocks, with their longer axis set out in an east/west direction;
► minimisation of areas of east-facing and west-facing glass (less than 5% of floor area each);
► external shading of east-facing, west-facing and north-facing windows;
► insulation of roof (both reflective and bulk), walls and floors (if timber). Insulation shall be
made from a material that has a zero Ozone Depletion Factor (ODF);
► zoning of areas so that heated areas are grouped and isolated from non cooled areas by means
of doors. If possible, heated areas should be separated from the outside by air locks; and
► location of doors, if possible, on the eastern side of the building to avoid cold southerly winds
(as well as hot northerly winds).
85
Zoning
Consider zoning low occupancy areas separately for heating systems through the use of isolation valves
and local heating controls.
Passive Solar Heating of Non Heated Spaces
Spaces not provided with fossil fuel heating (e.g. toilets, storerooms and corridors) should be heated
with passive solar energy.
Ceiling Fans and Heating
The design of the heating system must include the use of high-efficiency ceiling fans. Ceiling fans
operated slowly in conjunction with heaters help reduce energy consumption and should be installed so
that the minimum height of the fan blades is 2400mm above finished floor level.
Daylighting and Heating

No heating system shall be designed until consideration has been given to reducing the internal heat
load of electric lighting by maximising the use of daylight from shaded windows or skylights.
Installation Regulations and Standards
All installations must conform to the Building Code of Australia and comply with all relevant and
current Australian Standards. These include but are not limited to AS/NZS 1668.1, AS 1668.2, AS
2913, AS 1677.2, AS 4254.1, AS 4254.2, AS/NZS 3000, AS 1324.1, and AS/NZS 3666.1.
Energy efficiency requirements of the Building Code of Australia may impact on selection of plant
and equipment.
Fuel Source
As a general rule:
► use natural gas in preference to LPG and electricity;
► use natural gas in preference to LPG for the heating of relocatables; and
► do not use LPG when natural gas is available on site.
Plant and Equipment
All plant is to be energy efficient and have a 5 Star Rating Energy Label or better if a star rating is
available. The need for personal heating devices should be avoided by good design. Spot radiant
heaters are to be installed, if required, but only as a last option.
If possible, inside air should not be used for combustion.
Gas fired plant shall not produce unacceptable nitrous oxide (NO×) pollution. Ensure that gas fired
heating plants emit NO× at a rate no greater than 200mg/kWh of delivered energy.
High efficiency condensing boilers should be used.
86
Ensure that centralised plant is capable of operating only when required to deliver heat. Out-of-hours
use should be separately heated.
Ensure that plant is not over sized and hence more expensive than need be, or inefficient when
operating at low capacity.
Gas plant should have electronic ignition.
Consider providing the following features to plant and equipment :

► heat recovery modules in heated areas where there are high ventilation rates;
► extra insulation on boiler if upgrades are being undertaken (modern boilers are often well
insulated);
► local timer controls linked to a central time controller, with temperature sensing to avoid
overheating;
► lockable and tamperproof thermostats; and
► insulating pipe work where hydronic systems are used.
If hydronic systems are used, ensure that the pipe work is well insulated.
Unflued gas heaters are not permitted except if gas radiant. Unflued radiant gas heaters remain a good
option in spaces with high ceilings and large ventilation rates, e.g. trade and technology rooms.
The following table offers guidance on the recommended heating system types for selective areas
within a school. It is a guide only, and the installation of any heating plant should be justified by the
amenity required in the area. System selection should be based on a life-cycle analysis.
Heating System Type General Physical Music Art/Craft Library Staff Computer Science/ Tech
Purpose Education Admin Studies
Classroom Home Eco
(GPC) (PE)
Power-flue Console Heaters X X

High Efficiency Condensing X
Gas Heaters
High Efficiency Condensing X X

Gas Heaters + Cooling
Reverse Cycle Air conditioning X X

(in appropriate NatHERS
Zones)
Ground Source Heat Pumps X X
Hydronic (Hot water X X

Radiators)
Gas Radiant (Panels, Tube) X X X X
May be applicable
X Generally not applicable
87
The following table provides relative cost indices for various types of heating systems on a square metre
basis. The actual cost of various options will depend on amenity requirements, system design and site
constraints. This table should be used as an initial guide only.
Heating System Type Typical Installation Typical Operating Typical Maintenance

Cost – $/m²/annum Cost – $/m²/annum Cost – $/m²/annum
Power-flue Console Heaters 4 5 3
High Efficiency Condensing Gas 5 4 4

Heaters
Reverse Cycle Air conditioning 6 10 5

(in appropriate Zones)
Ground Source Heat Pumps 10 6 7
Hydronic (Hot water Radiators) 7 8 10
Gas Radiant (panels, Tube) 3 5 2
10 = Highest Cost
Filters
Filters are to have a design pressure drop of 25 Pa.
Filters are to be located so they can easily be removed for cleaning and replacement.
Return-Air Paths
Return-air paths reduce energy use in ducted air systems. Ensure that the return-air path is not subject
to infiltration and is appropriately insulated.
Ductwork
Heating air ductwork is to be insulated to R1.5, well sealed, and designed to minimise air flow
resistance. Ensure the return-air plenums are sealed. Do not use ceiling spaces for return air paths.
Outside Air Quantities
Where fan-forced ducted systems are used, outside air quantities should be minimised yet comply with
ventilation regulations and provide appropriate indoor air quality levels.
Controls
All heating systems shall use simple yet effective controls to minimise the use of heating equipment
while maintaining acceptable internal conditions. (Refer Section 7.6.5 for details.)
Sub-metering
All electric heating systems should consider the use of electricity sub-metering by blocks in order to
easily carry out energy cost audits, including the cost of out-of-hours use.
88
Testing and Commissioning
Testing and commissioning should include two aspects:
► Firstly, the design should specify energy efficient equipment. Where appropriate, testing and
commissioning should confirm this performance.
► Secondly, documents should ensure the handover of accurate and detailed building and
systems records and operational directions. Such documentation should not only set out
details of the installation and its energy efficient operation but also clearly record all design
assumptions and capacities in order to facilitate future modifications and building adjustment.
If appropriate, provide a certified air distribution and diffusion test report which includes an adjustment
and balance report. For hydronic systems, include a water balancing report.
Maintenance Strategy
Consultants shall provide an ongoing maintenance strategy for later implementation by the school.
7.6.2 Centralised Plant versus Individual Units
Consideration should be given to the following factors when considering centralised plant:
► warm up time;
► room occupancy patterns (primary school rooms are generally occupied by the same people
while secondary colleges are subject to continually changing and varying occupancy);
► control systems;
► efficiency of systems, particularly in part load circumstances;
► solar gain, especially in north facing rooms; and
► zoning of building.
Ensure that centralised plant is capable of operating only when required to deliver heat.
Where spaces are to be used out-of-hours they should be separately heated.
7.6.3 Primary Schools
Unitary gas heaters should be used for classrooms and larger spaces, and include convective powered
flue or wall furnace types. Radiant gas consoles or wall-mounted heaters should not be used in these
areas.
Ducted warm-air furnace heating may be considered, depending on architectural floor plan and building
construction.
Ducted warm-air furnace heat should be used for administration and staff areas.
Wall-mounted gas radiant heaters should be used for large volume spaces with high ceilings (e.g. halls).
High-level wall-mounted or ceiling radiant electric heaters could be used where floor/wall space is
limited (e.g. canteens).
89
Toilets, storerooms and corridors should not be heated other than through a spill-over from adjacent
areas.
Unitary space heater locations should aim for even heat distribution and be sited away from corners
and close to cold parts of the room (e.g. windows). Layouts should allow 200mm both horizontally and
vertically from walls, fixed furniture, pin boards, etc. and around floor-level heaters for safety and
maintenance. Allow a space of at least 1000mm horizontally from the heater to nearest occupant.
Independence of main systems in areas to be used out-of-hours should be considered.
7.6.4 Secondary Colleges
Designers should consider potential vandalism to heating systems when preparing designs for
classrooms.
Central heating systems with re-circulating air or return-air should be used except in rooms where dust,
fumes or odours are generated.
Toilets, storerooms and corridors should not be heated other than through a spill-over from adjacent
areas. Physical education centres should be heated only when directed.
Independence of main systems in areas to be used out-of-hours should be considered.
7.6.5 Heating System Controls
Control systems should have a centralised master time clock to ensure after-hours switch-off as well as
local controls allowing variations to suit local conditions. Time clocks with temperature sensing will help
avoid overheating.
The thermostat setting should not be higher than 19°C.
Heater controls should be student tamperproof and accessible only by a key. Thermostats should be
lockable and tamperproof.
Where appropriate, heating controls should take into account climatic conditions and allow for early
morning warm up to modulate temperature according to space conditions. Heating controls should also
take advantage of internal heat generated by occupants and office equipment.
Control systems should accommodate power failure and ensure that the resetting of the system is a
simple procedure.
Spot radiant heating should be controlled by local time switches (45 to 60 minute maximum operating
times are recommended before a restart is required).
7.6.6 Gas-Fired Plant
If possible, inside air should not be used for combustion.
Gas-fired plant must not produce unacceptable nitrous oxide (NO×) pollution. Ensure that gas-fired
heating plants emit NO× at a rate no greater than 200mg/kWh of delivered energy.
90
High-efficiency condensing boilers should be used.
Gas plant should have electronic ignition.
Unflued gas heaters are not permitted except for radiant gas heaters. These heaters remain a good
option in spaces with high ceilings and large ventilation rates (e.g. trade and technology rooms).
7.6.7 Water Heating Boilers
Boiler Types
Boilers should be designed and installed in accordance with Australian Standards AS 1375, AS 4552
and AS 3814.
For gas-fired boilers, provide controls that allow for automatic ignition and stopping. The Building
Code of Australia may require some boilers to be fire-enclosed and separated from the building.
Air Supply
Provide combustion and ventilation air to suit the boiler. Arrange for it to be unaffected by adverse
influences such as cross drafts and negative pressures.
Water Supply
Provide feed water and expansion tanks with capacity to accommodate the expansion of water
contained within the boilers and the associated piping system. Do not fit valves between tanks and
boilers.
Piping
Provide piping sized to permit the free movement of liquid and gases.
Plinths
Boilers should be mounted on concrete plinths.
Flues
Provide a separate flue to each boiler. For pressurised boilers, do not discharge multiple flues into a
single flue. Support flues to compensate for thermal expansion as well as flue weight, wind loading
and other imposed loads.
Provide a removable base or access covers for flue cleaning and inspection. Provide a trapped drain
at the base of each flue and pipe to waste.
The minimum flue exit velocity at full load should not be less then 15m/s.
For gas-fired boilers, insulate the flue to the point of exit from the building.
7.6.8 Plant Rooms
Avoid fully or partially underground plant rooms.
91
Boiler and furnace plant rooms should be exclusive to that purpose.
Where possible, the plant room should have at least one external wall. Access to the plant room should
be from outside or from a corridor. Access should not be from a store, wet area or any area likely to
contain flammable substances.
7.7 Ventilation
Ventilation is useful in reducing the overheating of large spaces, especially where numbers of
students gather. Ventilation is also useful for overnight cooling.
The main requirement under the Building Code of Australia is the provision of fresh air to all occupied
areas by way of natural or mechanical ventilation.
For school air conditioning, assessment of fresh air provision must be based on either fixed openings or
open-able devices such as doors and windows that are directly connected to the outside of the building.
The Building Code of Australia requires that this be a minimum area proportional to the occupied room
floor area. Typically the minimum area of fixed or open-able devices must be 5% of the total floor area. If
the above area of fixed or open-able devices can be achieved, the room is deemed to comply with the
natural ventilation requirements of the Code.
If the natural ventilation requirements of the Code cannot be met, then outside air must be supplied to
conditioned spaces at the rate set down in Australian Standard AS 1668.2.
7.7.1 Energy Targets
If cooling is proposed, no natural ventilation system should be installed until an energy target for the
building has been established and the performance of the proposed cooling system compared with
that target, and revised if necessary.
Reduction of Ventilation Requirement
No natural ventilation system shall be designed or installed until consideration has been given to
reducing the cooling load to be satisfied. Items to consider include:
► minimisation of areas of east- and west-facing glass (less than 5% of floor area each);
► external shading of east-, west- and north-facing windows;
made from material that has a zero Ozone Depletion Factor (ODF);
► zoning of areas so that cooled areas are grouped and isolated from non cooled areas by means
of doors (if possible, cooled areas should be separated from the outside by air locks); and
► location of doors, if possible, on the eastern side of the building to avoid hot northerly winds (as
well as cold southerly winds).
7.7.2 Natural Ventilation
Hand-operated remote operating mechanisms for upper openings shall be provided.
92
Consideration should be given to the provision of limited areas of higher volume to act as hot air
drains and promote the use of natural ventilation.
Consideration shall be given to the security of inlet and outlet openings that are required to be left
open at night.
Consideration shall be given to the elimination of dust intrusion.
Consideration shall be given to keeping air speeds low so as not to move paper.
Consideration shall be given to the alternate summer/winter use of natural ventilation to ensure
that winter heating loads are not increased.
7.7.3 Toilet and Change Room Exhaust System
All toilet and change areas should be mechanically ventilated.
Rigid sheetmetal trunking ductwork with flexible duct run-outs limited to 5 metres in length should
be provided. Duct velocities shall not exceed 6 metres per second.
Exhaust air inlet points over each shower cubicle and each group of two sanitary fixtures should be
provided.
Adequate make-up of exhaust air quantity should be ensured, including provision of relief vents.
Control systems are to be tamperproof.
Exhaust fans should be time-clock controlled.
7.7.4 Commercial Kitchen Exhaust Systems
All commercial kitchen exhaust hoods shall be designed and installed in accordance with AS 1668.2.
Size hoods to cover all cooking equipment and provide a minimum 150mm overhang.
Manufacture the hood from 1.4mm thick, series 304 stainless steel. Weld all joints and provide a
general-purpose polish finish.
Provide perimeter gutters with threaded cap drain points.
Install separately switched, vapour proof fluorescent luminaires to provide 200 lux at working
surface.
Provide washable, expanded aluminium grease filters with integral frame handles in sufficient
number to maintain the design air quantity within the manufacturers’ limits.
Ensure an adequate make-up of exhaust air quantity.
Provide two-speed fans with manual control station adjacent to the hood and complete with a LED-
run indicator. Exhaust fans should be interlocked and/or time controlled to ensure that they only
operate when required.
93
7.7.5 Kiln Exhaust Systems
Size hoods to cover kiln openings and discharge points.
Manufacture the hood from 1.6mm thick galvanised mild steel sheet.
Ensure an adequate make-up of exhaust air quantity.
Provide a local manual control station adjacent to the hood and complete with a LED-run indicator.
7.7.6 Fans
Fresh Air Fans
Provide fans that have quiet operation, deliver the required air quantity against the resistance of the
system as installed, and have a maximum static efficiency at the required duty.
At the time of initial design and fan selection, degradation of the fresh air filters over time should be
taken into account.
Ensure all components are corrosion and weather resistant.
Ensure that fans are statically and dynamically balanced.
Use direct drives and avoid belt drives where possible.
Use 3-phase, 415V motors where practical and 1-phase, 240V motors elsewhere. Motors shall have a
degree of protection rated to a minimum of IP54.
Provide phase failure, over and under voltage protection relays, with auto reset to all fans requiring
3 phase power supplies.
Provide flexible connections to prevent transmission of vibration to ductwork.
Provide each assembly with at least four anti-vibration mountings, selected to give an isolation
efficiency of not less than 95%.
Exhaust Fans
Select the fan type with regard to system efficiency, acoustic performance and capital cost.
Locate fans with regard to adequate security, maintenance access and acoustic performance.
Ensure all components are corrosion and weather resistant.
Ensure that fans are statically and dynamically balanced.
Use direct drives and avoid belt drives where possible.
Use 3-phase, 415V motors where practical and 1-phase, 240V motors elsewhere. Motors shall have a
degree of protection rated to a minimum of IP54.
94
Provide phase failure, over and under voltage protection relays, with auto reset to all fans requiring 3
phase power supplies.
Ensure all exhaust fans are capable of being effectively sealed off when not in use to eliminate
unwanted infiltration and exfiltration.
Provide flexible connections to prevent transmission of vibration to ductwork.
Provide each assembly with at least four anti-vibration mountings, selected to give an isolation efficiency
of not less than 95%.
Ceiling Fans
Provide ceiling sweep fans to all teaching areas, including libraries, and to administration areas,
thereby ensuring adequate air movement.
Ensure that fans are statically and dynamically balanced, and that they consist of a three-bladed, all
metal construction suitable for 240V supply.
Provide one control station per fan with a minimum of three speed settings in forward and reverse
direction. Controls should be of commercial quality to withstand robust usage.
The minimum height of ceiling fans (as measured from the underside of the fan blades) shall be
2400mm from finished floor level. To ensure adequate movement of air, do not install fans too close to
the ceiling.
Mount fans clear of lights to avoid stroboscope effect.
Provide sweep fans on the basis of one fan per 25m² of floor area. They should feature time-out
controls so that they only operate when required.
For upgrade projects, consider the replacement of ceiling fans installed prior to 1980.
7.7.7 Air Filters
Filters should be selected and installed in accordance with AS 1324.1.
Select filters that are odourless, non-toxic, non-migrating, non-evaporating, non-hardening, resistant
to microbial growth, and which do not shed fibres in service.
Rigidly attach filter frames to the air-handling plant casing (such as duct, or return-air plenum) with a
system of bolting or blind pop riveting. Locate bolts or rivets clear of the filter element. Do not fix to
the casing insulation. Ensure that the installation of the filter does not reduce its rated performance.
Ensure that individual filter inspection and maintenance can be readily carried out without
disturbing the filter bank.
Ensure that there are no leaks between the filter-holding frame and the casing to stop air bypassing
the filter media. Frames should be capable of withstanding distortion arising from the final pressure
drop across the filter.
95
Permanently and legibly mark, on a suitable section of the filter, the following:
► filter type and class;
► direction of airflow;
► proprietary type, model and serial number; and
► filter performance rating to AS 1324.1.
Before start-up, ensure that the installation is free from debris and dirt, and check the integrity of
the filter bank and plenum installation.
7.7.8 Ductwork
Standard Ductwork
Ductwork should be designed, installed and constructed in accordance with AS 4254.1 and AS
4254.2. The Building Code of Australia requires supply air and return air ductwork to be insulated.
Rigid Ducting
Fabricate ductwork and fittings from galvanised steel sheet, machine bent and free from waves and
buckles. Remove burrs and sharp edges and ensure that there are no protrusions into the airways.
Provide supports at 2400mm maximum centres for ducts up to 3000mm in external perimeter and at
1300mm maximum centres for larger ducts. Supports should be provided adjacent all changes in
direction to fix the ductwork in position and prevent noticeable sag.
Ductwork exposed to weather is to be constructed and installed as follows:

► Seal all exposed ductwork joints through the use of watertight protective shields. Seal all
duct supports where they attach to the duct, and seal all reinforcement attachments so that
moisture cannot be retained in any gap or crevice.
► Profile or cover the top side of ductwork exposed to weather to shed water.
Provide ductwork insulation in accordance with the Building Code of Australia.
Flexible Ducting
Flexible ducting should be an “acoustic” type fabricated from a helix of zinc coated spring steel wire,
lined and jacketed with perforated aluminium laminate, and insulated with 25mm thick fibreglass
jacket with aluminium laminate to achieve a “4 zero” rating.
Flexible duct runs shall not exceed 5000mm. Ducting shall be installed without restriction to airflow
and shall be supported with 20mm wide straps at regulate intervals to prevent sagging.
7.7.9 Air Grilles
Provide proprietary grilles and outlets that are commercially proven and in current volume
production (if possible, from the one manufacturer), free from distortion, bends, surface defects,
irregular joints, exposed fastenings and operation vibration.
96
Grilles should be mounted with secure and concealed fixings and with flanges lining corners neatly
mitred and buffered, and with no joint gaps.
Use outlets and grilles that meet noise level requirements for occupied spaces.
Grilles should be constructed out of aluminium and have a thermostat powder coating finish to AS
3715. Dampers and visible ductwork behind the grilles should be painted matt black.
7.8 Cooling
7.8.1 Preliminary Note on Thermal Comfort and Cooling Policy
The Department is considering the introduction of new maximum and minimum thermal comfort
standards. An associated element will be the implementation of energy efficient design. A detailed
investigation is currently underway, and pending the release of further information, this version of
the Handbook applies.
7.8.2 General
Perceptions of thermal comfort are subjective and variable. It is influenced by a number of factors
including orientation, humidity, air movement, activity level, external shading, walls, roof insulation
and natural ventilation. In areas where prolonged climatic extremes are evident and passive design
techniques cannot be used in maintaining comfortable room temperatures, air conditioning systems
are installed.
Air conditioning systems are provided to schools on the basis of their location within the Nationwide
House Energy Rating Scheme (NatHERS). All schools within climate zones 20 and 27 (refer Appendix
3- Postcodes within NatHERS Zones) will receive air conditioning to their entitled spaces under the
space and area guidelines.
Outside of these climate zones, there are some circumstances in which specific schools and buildings
will be provided with air conditioning. These include:
► all special development schools regardless of their location;
► information technology server rooms;
► all relocatable buildings;
► capital works projects where new buildings are designed as multi-storey builds;
► capital works projects where a new building will have a shared arrangement with the
community; and
► buildings designated as Community Fire Refuges (CFR) by Emergency Management Victoria.
Selection of Cooling System
The most appropriate cooling system for a particular application will depend upon the nature of
space to be cooled and the activity therein. A range of different systems may be appropriate
depending on their application. These include:
► evaporative cooling; and
► refrigerated air cooling, including split air conditioning or console units as well as packaged
units.
Schools should engage with a qualified technician to provide assistance in selecting the most
appropriate system. The technician will be able to provide guidance on what the most suitable system is
97
for each size space. Accurate sizing is essential as it ensures the most effective and efficient system is
chosen.
Schools should also employ a life-cycle analysis process (over 15 years) to consider total ownership
costs. Life-cycle analysis of systems should address:
► capital cost including associated infrastructure costs such as electric sub-mains;
► maintenance costs for a realistic life of the system and its components; and
► energy costs on the basis of likely energy tariff rates, envisaged usage requirements (climatic
demands and hours of operation) and the ability of a particular system to be controlled in such
a way as to match its operation time to actual occupancy requirements.
The following table offers guidance in the selection of cooling systems for various school areas where
cooling is required. It is a guide only, and the installation of any cooling plant should be justified by the
amenity required in the area. The system selected should be based on a life-cycle analysis and in
consultation with a qualified technician.
Cooling System General Physical Music Art/Craft Dedicated Staff Computer Science Tech Home
Type Purpose Education Library Admin Studies Eco
Classroom (PE)
(GPC)
Evaporative
Cooling X X X
Refrigerated
Cooling X X X
Split Air
conditioning X X X
Systems
(Console Units)
May be applicable
X Generally not applicable.
Energy Targets
No cooling system should be installed until an energy target has been established and the
performance of the proposed system compared with that target, and revised if necessary.
There are many methods to determine the performance and energy efficiency of air conditioning
units. The Energy Rating label can be used to easily identify performance and energy efficiency.
Labels are mandatory on all domestic single phase, non-ducted air conditioners sold in Australia, and
voluntary on ducted systems. The labels allocate stars to a product based on its performance. The
more stars a product has, the more efficient it is.
Specific performance figures can also be found on the GEMS Registration Database. This database
provides detailed data such as energy efficiency ratios (EER) for cooling and co-efficient of
performance (COP) for heating. These measures are ratios of output (capacity) divided by the power
input. Higher ratios suggest greater efficiency.
Reduction of the Cooling Load
No cooling system shall be designed or installed until consideration has been given to reducing the
cooling load to be satisfied. Items to consider include:
98
► minimisation of areas of east- and west-facing glass (less than 5% of floor area each);
► external shading of east-, west- and north-facing windows;
made from material that has a zero Ozone Depletion Factor (ODF);
► zoning of areas so that cooled areas are grouped and isolated from non cooled areas by means
of doors. If possible, cooled areas should be separated from the outside by air locks; and
► location of doors, if possible, on the eastern side of the building to avoid hot northerly winds (as
well as cold southerly winds).
Ceiling Fans and Cooling
No cooling system shall be designed or installed unless ceiling fans have been installed.
Natural Ventilation
No cooling system shall be considered, designed or installed until the use of natural ventilation has been
considered.
Daylighting and Cooling
No cooling system shall be designed or installed until consideration has been given to reducing the
internal heat load of electric lighting by maximising the use of daylight from shaded windows or
skylights.
Sub-metering
All cooling systems should consider the use of electricity sub-metering (by blocks) for cooling in order to
carry out energy cost audits, as well as the costing of out-of-hours use.
Testing and Commissioning
All installed systems should be tested and commissioned in accordance with the manufacturers’
recommendations to ensure that they work as specified.
Energy Efficient Operation
To ensure the most energy efficient operation of the chosen system, the following should be
undertaken:
• using programmable thermostats to set temperatures and operating times;
• eliminating any poorly insulated ducting that may decrease the performance of the chosen
system;
• placing any ceiling vents centrally within rooms;
• ensuring good air circulation around the inside and outside units (i.e. the removal of nearby
curtains, furniture or plants for inside units, and the removal of dust and plants for outside
units);
• covering the outside unit from the sun to reduce risk of over-heating;
• closing all doors and windows during operation of the chosen system; and
• using economy mode.
99
Maintenance Strategy
Consultants should provide an ongoing maintenance strategy (including documentation) for use by
school in relation to all refrigerated and evaporative coolers.
7.8.3 Evaporative Cooling
General
The design and installation of evaporative coolers should be in accordance with AS 2913.
The cooler capacity should be based on a minimum of 35 air changes of the room volume served.
Design air change rates vary throughout the State. Check with the cooler manufacturer for the
recommended air change rate.
The design of the building must provide sufficient openings to discharge the large volumes of introduced
air.
The unit casing shall be either stainless steel, marine grade aluminium or stabilised UV resistant polymer
with a suitably matched fibre glass or polymer water sump. Capital cost and operating environment
shall be taken in to account when selecting the unit. All components (including the fan, pump and
motors) shall be non corrosive and suitable for operation in a moist environment.
Noise generation should be considered when selecting an axial or centrifugal fan unit.
Each unit should be provided with a water sump dump valve to flush out sludge and concentrated salts.
The sump bleed and drain valve discharge pipe shall not discharge onto metal roof surfaces but be
piped to the nearest stormwater down pipe.
Smaller downwards discharge coolers may be supported off the rigid supply air duct. A suitable
corrosion resistant support frame off building members for larger units should be supplied.
Filters
Filters should be easily removable for cleaning.
Ductwork
Internal duct insulation shall be moisture resistant or contain a moisture resistant membrane. Flexible
duct external insulation of glass or mineral fibre should be a minimum of 25mm thick.
The use of attenuated ductwork should be considered. The length of ductwork should be minimised.
Automatic dampers to close units when not in operation should be provided.
Controls
Each evaporative cooling unit shall have a variable or multiple fan speed controller, an ON/OFF pump
controller, and automatic dump valve operation.
The thermostat setting should not be lower than 24°C.
100
Time-delay and time-control switches should be considered. Controllers should be linked to a central
time clock.
Water Supply
Local water supply should be taken into consideration when supplying the units. A water treatment plant
may be required in some hard water areas.
Consideration should be given to evaporative coolers only in locations where there is reticulated town
water. In other locations, refrigerative coolers should be provided.
Installation
An adequate and permanent means of access and an appropriate platform for servicing units should be
provided.
A hose spigot point adjacent to the unit is to be provided for unit cleaning.
Servicing Schedule
Consultants are to provide a servicing schedule for later implementation by schools in accordance with
relevant legislative requirements. Evaporative coolers should be serviced four times a year for health
considerations.
7.8.4 Air conditioning – Room and Packaged Plant
Packaged air conditioning units include split systems and packaged unitary systems. The units come
complete with replaceable filters, insulation sufficient to prevent condensation in all operating
conditions, and operating and safety controls.
Noise generation should be considered when selecting an air conditioning unit and/or system.
Selection
Select equipment capable of operating continuously at the ambient temperature ranging from –5°C
to +50°C in cooling and –15°C to +15.5°C in heating mode, without excessive head pressure, unstable
operation or icing.
All equipment supplied shall be from a known brand manufacturer with a well-established presence
in Australia (minimum 5 years). The manufacturer shall also have a well-established service and parts
support network within Victoria.
Systems with energy efficient (high) coefficients of performance should be selected.
The units shall have hermetically sealed rotary compressors with reverse cycle capability and an
automatic de-icing cycle.
Installation
For security purposes all ground-mounted units should be mounted on concrete plinths within
lockable security mesh enclosures.
101
Support and fix all outdoor and indoor units securely. Provide anti-vibration mounts under all units.
Provide clearance around outdoor units for airflow and maintenance access as recommended by the
manufacturer. Provide access for inspection and maintenance.
Install electrical wiring neatly. Provide Colorbond steel metal top hat sections to cover wiring where
exposed to weather or on view.
Maintenance access and platforms for large roof-mounted plant should be provided.
Controls
Provide a complete and fully automatic electronic system which allows year-round operation of the
plant to meet specified conditions without manual adjustment, and which also includes all plant
safety devices. Time-delay and time-control switches should be considered. Controllers should be
linked to a central time clock.
Temperature controls should be set so that no cooling occurs below 26°C and no heating above
18°C.
For further information regarding ambient temperatures and comfort, refer to WorkSafe Victoria’s
Workplace amenities and work environment compliance document
(https://www.worksafe.vic.gov.au/__data/assets/pdf_file/0004/9229/Workplace_amenities_CC.pdf)
Refrigerants
Refrigerants used should have a zero Ozone Depletion Factor (ODF) and comply with current
environmental guidelines. Acceptable refrigerants include R407c and R410a.
Refrigerant leak detectors should be considered (refer to SAA HB 40.1, SAA HB 40.2 and SAA HB 40.3).
Maintenance Schedule
Consultants are to provide a servicing schedule for later implementation by the school.
Adequate means of access for the servicing of units should be provided.
Filters
Filters should be easily removable for cleaning.
Insulation
Ductwork in roof cavities shall be insulated to the R1.5 minimum standard and preferably R2.
The provision of wall/ceiling insulation and window shading devices will effect the performance of units.
Liaise with the principal consultant to determine the design conditions.
102
7.8.5 Refrigeration
Refrigerant Pipeworks
Design and construct refrigerant pipes in accordance with AS 4041. All safety requirements for fixed
applications shall be in accordance with AS/NZS 1677.2. Pipework shall be refrigerant-quality
deoxidised phosphorus seamless copper tube with brazed connections.
The refrigerant circuit shall include an accumulator, liquid, equalising and gas shut off valves, and
solenoid valves. All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safe operation of the
system.
All pipework should be insulated with slip-on closed cell elastomeric pipe insulation, having a wall
thickness of not less than 10mm inside the building and 15mm outside. All insulation must be
properly glued (after pressure and leak testing) and provide a complete seal to prevent any
condensation. Pre-insulated refrigeration pipework must not be used.
Pipework shall be properly and tidily fixed and supported at a minimum of 2 metre centres by
galvanised mild steel brackets. All pipework shall be tagged with condensing unit identification
numbers at 3-metre intervals.
Condensate Drains
An insulated uPVC condensate drain shall be installed for each air conditioning unit. Provide 25mm
nominal diameter drains for split-type systems and 32mm nominal diameter drains for packaged-
type systems.
All condensate drains are to be terminated at ground gullies or tundishes to allow easy and clear
inspection of drainage from each air conditioning unit.
All tundishes are to be extended to the nearest storm water or sewerage connection in accordance
with the local government authority requirements. If no such connection points are readily available,
the contractor shall provide a tundish at the building alignment and an underground drain line to a
suitable rubble pit for the collection of condensate.
7.8.6 Electrical Supply
Electrical supply for air conditioning units, evaporative coolers, outside fans and exhaust fans shall
be derived from the building’s electrical distribution board. The contractor shall provide sufficient
electrical capacity to support air conditioning and fan systems demand. Air conditioning and fan
systems shall be supplied via dedicated circuit breakers located in the electrical distribution board.
In the event of a power failure, all equipment shall, after reinstatement of power, automatically
return to its operational state prior to failure.
Any electrical supply upgrade should allow for all proposed and foreseeable future air conditioning
installations. The allowance for future air conditioning will avoid abortive works with respect to new
switchboards and sub-mains.
All cooling/heating systems should consider the use of electricity sub-metering (by blocks) for
cooling/heating in order to carry out energy cost audits, as well as the costing of out-of-hours use.
103
All electrical services works shall be carried out in accordance with all relevant Australian guidelines
and standards, including but not limited to the Building Code of Australia, AS 3000, the relevant
power authority and the Office of Electrical Safety.
Refer also to Section 7.10 – Electrical Lighting and Power.
7.9 Fire Protection
7.9.1 Fire Hydrants
Provide a hydrant system to satisfy the minimum requirements of the Building Code of Australia, AS
2419 and local fire authority.
Preferred hydrant installations are external dual-head individually-controlled outlets, with access and
hard standing for a fire appliance to connect to the hydrant. Maximum hose length should not exceed 20
metres. Hydrant fixtures and installation should conform to Water Services Association Water Code
WSA 03 and AS 2419.1. Internal hydrants are not preferred.
7.9.2 Fire Hose Reels and Extinguishers
Fire hose reels and fire extinguishers shall be provided to not less than the minimum requirements
of the Building Code of Australia.
All pipe work to hose reels shall be DN32 minimum and, where below and within buildings, be
copper tube “Type B” in accordance with AS 1432 (unless contrary to AS 2419.1).
Fire hose reels shall not be provided in external unsecured areas.
Where the effectiveness of hose reels may be restricted by locked rooms, appropriate operational
measures shall be arranged with the relevant building surveyor.
7.9.3 Smoke and Fire Doors
Smoke and fire doors shall be provided as required by the Building Code of Australia.
Magnetic hold-open devices should be provided for these doors.
Equipment should comply with the various parts of AS 1670 fire detection, warning, control and intercom
systems.
7.9.4 Smoke Detectors and Sound Alarms
Smoke detectors and sound alarms (incorporating International Standards Organisation [ISO]
emergency signals) shall be provided to not less than the minimum requirements of the Building
Code of Australia and the relevant Australian Standards.
7.9.5 Emergency Signs and Lighting
Emergency signs and lighting shall be provided to not less than the minimum requirements of the
Building Code of Australia.
104
7.9.6 Maintenance Log Books
Maintenance log books should be provided to schools in accordance with the provisions of the
Department’s Annual Contracts: Guidelines for Building Services Maintenance in Schools as well as
the Building Regulations.
7.10 Electrical Lighting and Power
7.10.1 General
Life cycle analysis of systems which meet the amenity criteria should address:
► capital cost, including associated infrastructure costs related to electric sub-mains, metering
and control gear;
► maintenance costs associated with a realistic life of the system and its components; and
► energy costs on the basis of likely energy tariff rates, envisaged usage requirements (climatic
demands and hours of operation) and the ability of the lighting system to be controlled in such
a way as to match its operation time to occupancy requirements.
This analysis must distinguish between <160MWh per annum and >160MWh per annum sites, and be
easily accessible for use by the Department’s Schools Resource Allocation Branch (SRAB) and post-
commissioning audits. It must state the Whole of Victorian Government (WoVG) state purchase
contract rates used for <160 sites as well as WoVG energy rates and network tariffs applied at >160
sites.
Where schools have existing equipment/components, every effort shall be made to match brands of
equipment/components.
All external fittings will need to be vandal-resistant and tamper-proof. The extent of protection will be
based on the security level of each school.
Electrical systems need to be provided for normal operating conditions in Victoria.
An ESD consultant should be engaged as part of the design team in matters pertaining to ecologically
sustainable design (ESD). As a minimum, the design should meet the requirements of the Building Code
of Australia Section J.
7.10.2 Design
It is important that lighting be considered in two forms: natural and artificial. For natural daylighting,
the correct sizing and location of openings is the key factor. For artificial lighting, the correct sizing and
location of energy efficient equipment and control systems is important.
Design and construction should minimise the fossil fuel required to provide acceptable indoor light
levels. Factors which will assist this include:
► Fabric and Services

An awareness that the windows and skylights (the building fabric) and the artificial lighting (the
services) both contribute to energy efficiency and are inseparable considerations.
105
► Zoning
The building should be zoned into different lighting and control zones depending on the
closeness to windows and skylights, and the tasks required to be performed.
► Energy Targets
Energy targets should be set for each project.
► Circuit Design
When utilising daylight, the lighting circuit should be designed to minimise artificial lighting.
Circuitry should allow for night time use as well as maximum daylight availability.
Where there are high levels of equipment (such as in staffrooms), consideration should be given
to the creation of two circuits within the general purpose power circuit design. This would
accommodate both 24 hour supply and supply which switches off after hours.
► Powerline Carrier Systems

Powerline carrier systems are not currently recommended because of their present
unreliability.
7.10.3 Supply – General
The provision of incoming supply needs to be carefully planned with future developments in mind
and be brought to the attention of the supply authority at the first instance when future capital
works programs are known. Assumptions made in determining load (i.e. usage, demand and the
infrastructure required) must be clearly stated, as must any variations received after an offer from a
distributor, before signing an agreement (“supply offer”) with that distributor.
Designers need to adequately size mains and submains to include sufficient capacity for planned
future stages of school developments on the same site, including all relocatable buildings necessary
to meet peak enrolments. Power pillars within close proximity to the proposed relocatable
complexes to be considered for the provision of power to these complexes.
The Department is a participant in two Whole of Victorian Government (WoVGS) state purchase
contracts (SPC) for the supply of electricity to all schools. A decision on which contract is applicable
for a new site (meter) or for a new connection in the upgrade of an existing site will be dependent
on the estimated annual usage and, in the case of larger schools, the likely electricity load or
demand at the site. Current SPC suppliers are:
► Red Energy, for all sites with an expected annual usage of >160MWh (refer Section 7.10.4);
and
► Powerdirect (a subsidiary of AGL), for sites with an expected annual usage of <160MWh
(refer Section 7.10.5).
7.10.4 Red Energy – For all sites with an expected annual usage of >160MWh.
Note that sites which require installation of new substations (kiosks) are likely to be the subject of an
agreement (“supply offer”) with the local distributor, and would normally join this contract.
106
New Connections
In helping to identify electricity infrastructure requirements, it is strongly recommended that an

energy engineer (refer Section 4.8.1 – Energy Engineer), or person responsible for this function, make
early contact with the local distributor to determine cost-efficient site infrastructure and network
tariff. It is critical that the energy engineer be in no doubt as to what network tariff will be applied in
the offer made by the distributor.
Sites supplied under this contract will receive an unbundled bill that will separate the retail energy
component from distributor charges (i.e. network tariffs) which are passed on, on behalf of the
distributor, by the retailer.
A key component of the network tariff may be a “minimum demand” component. To ensure that
schools are provided the most cost-efficient tariff within their particular circumstance, an Energy
Cost Worksheet (ECW) summary, signed-off by the energy engineer, should be used as the basis of
calculation.
The following guidelines are recommended in confirming ECW calculations and abetting discussions
with distributors prior to the signing of any agreement (“supply offer”).
Network Tariffs
The impact of a minimum demand network tariff on future energy costs should be considered when
planning a new facility. For new and upgrade projects (and prior to the signing of a formal
agreement with the distribution business), review the network tariff proposed and ensure that it is
advantageous to the school from an operational and cost perspective. This review must take into
account the short and longer term impact on both capital and recurrent costs, particularly at new
and growing schools.
All design must meet the maximum demand assessment of the local distribution authority. Any
differences between this and the initial assessment prepared by the electrical consultant must be
resolved prior to the presentation of the EWR (Electrical Works Request) to the retailer by the REC
(Registered Electrical Contractor).
It is imperative the “person responsible” ensures that information contained in the EWR (and in
particular, related to load) is consistent with what has been agreed to and signed with the
distributor. Any differences must be resolved prior to it being submitted to the retailer. This is
necessary since agreements are often signed more than 12 months prior to an actual commissioning
based on the EWR.
Agreements (“supply offers”) provided by the local distribution authority must be reviewed by the
builder and the electrical contractor prior to quoting for this aspect of the project.
To assist in this process, the Department has arranged for an independent assessment of all
calculations related to maximum demand for new and major refurbishment projects affecting
electrical works. It is recommended that this service be utilised. A fee may apply for this assessment.
The following process will apply:
107
Consulting Stage
1. Architect to contact the Department’s Schools Resource Allocation Branch (SRAB). by email
to obtain the contact information for the independent assessment.
To allow for the independent assessment to be completed, the following information must
be provided:
► outline of project, including any planned stages;
► architect’s name, telephone number and email address;
► electrical consultant’s (energy engineer’s) name, telephone number and email address;
► electrical contractor’s (REC) name, telephone number and email address (if known at
this stage);
► school name, telephone number and address (if existing school);
► principal’s name, telephone number and email address;
► national metering identifier (NMI) if an existing supply, meter number (if existing
school);
► advice as to whether the existing supply point will be upgraded/altered, or new supply
point is required;
► existing site – copy of a recent invoice;
► any existing electrical audit report (for existing installations); and, where available,
► copy of any communications with the local distribution network company.
2. Existing sites with an estimated usage of >160MWh per annum, and where Red Energy is not
the retailer, should be transferred to Red Energy immediately by contacting the SRAB.
Where Red Energy is the retailer under the state purchase contract (SPC), the consultant can
arrange to obtain the 30-minute data by contacting the SRAB to confirm existing maximum
demand and provide information back to the architect/electrical consultant.
3. New sites with an estimated usage of >160MWh per annum, or with a load that requires a
minimum demand network tariff, must be added to the >160MWh per annum state
purchase contract (SPC).
4. The electrical consultant’s calculations of estimated usage and maximum demand for new
works are to be sent to the contact provided by the SRAB assessment for review and to
verify assumptions.
5. Where issues are identified, the independent assessor will discuss and resolve issues with
consultants and architects.
6. Electrical consultant to request from local distribution authority a “Supply Offer” based on
confirmed estimated maximum demand.
7. The Supply Offer is to be forwarded to the SRAB who will arrange for an independent
assessment to confirm ratings and identify all costs. The independent assessment will
provide a summary report to all stakeholders (There is no cost associated for this.).
108
Sign off By Principal
Sign off by the school principal.
Tender
Submit all necessary electricity “Supply Offers” in tender documentation.
Construction and Submission of Electrical Works Request (EWR)
The independent assessment will compare with existing proposal. Any difference must be highlighted
and a brief explanation provided.
Once the EWR is finalised, the Registered Electrical Contractor (REC) must submit the EWR to Red
Energy via email to any of the following contacts at least 20 business days prior to the date that the
connection is required:
Michelle Hertaeg (Michelle.hertaeg@redenergy.com.au)

Kimberley Barnett (Kimberley.barnett@redenergy.com.au)
Manmeet Korala (Manmeet.Korala@redenergy.com.au)
Telephone number for above contacts is: 03 9425 0590
7.10.5 Powerdirect – For sites with an expected annual usage of <160MWh.
Sites supplied under this contract will receive a bundled bill based on the applicable Powerdirect state
purchase contract tariffs (e.g. E, E1 or D) for the relevant distributor’s area.
The school (or superintendent) is required to engage a registered electrical contractor (REC) in order
to have the relevant Electrical Works Request (EWR) and Certificate of Electrical Safety (CES)
completed. This information must then be forwarded via fax or email to Powerdirect New
Connections, attention Shona Wales, MAC Specialist, tel: 03 8633 6823, fax: 03 8633 7402, email:
swales@agl.com.au
Once any electricity works have been completed, schools in this category should carefully monitor
consumption over a period of 3-6 months to determine if there is a likelihood that it might exceed 160
MWh per annum, in which case they should contact the Department to determine whether supply
should move to the >160 MWh per annum contract.
It should be noted that once a new metering connection is completed, an account under the WOVG
contract will be created in the school’s name which then generates ongoing invoices for usage. It is
imperative that in the submission of a new metering request, agreement is reached with the builder,
project manager and school as to who is responsible for paying invoices up until the school/building
is handed over.
Green Power
The purchase of green power will be in accordance with Department guidelines and is an automatic
inclusion in both the above contracts.
109
Meters
Provide electrical meters on a per-block basis to individually measure lighting, power and plant
Provide subsidiary electrical meters on a per-block basis to allow individual measurement of lighting,
power and plant usage so that energy use profiles can be easily obtained.
Each of the above contract retailers will arrange for the installation of appropriate metering for
billing purposes only and not subsidiary meters.
Photovoltaic Metering
In the case of a solar installation, schools should ensure that the installer has received approval from
the local distribution authority prior to installation.
Once approval from the local distribution authority has been received and the solar installation has
been completed, the installer must contact the current WoVG SPC electricity retailer and provide all
necessary paperwork to allow for a reconfiguration of the billing meter to register energy that is excess
to school requirements and exported back to the grid.
For further information regarding all WoVG SPC energy contracts, please contact Brett Duff, Schools
Resource Allocation Branch (SRAB), tel: 03 9637 2063, fax: 9637 2440, email:
duff.brett.a@edumail.vic.gov.au
7.10.6 Main Switchboard
Design
Equipment and conductors shall have a short-circuit rating of not less than the maximum
prospective symmetrical RMS short-circuit current values on incoming terminals at the operational
voltage.
The short-circuit rating shall withstand fault currents for a minimum of one second.
The degree of protection required shall be IP20 for internal installations and IP54W for external or
plant room installations.
Provide at least 25% spare capacity in the ratings of main incoming busbars and main
switch/isolators, and 25% spare capacity for extra sub-circuits and circuit breakers.
Ensure there is sufficient capacity in the switchboard for planned future stages of school
development, including all relocatable buildings necessary to meet peak enrolments.
Switchboards and associated electrical conductors must be protected by fire-resisting construction

(refer Building Code of Australia, clause C2.13).
An emergency luminaire should also be considered above the location of the switchboard to facilitate safe
viewing in the event of partial power failure.
Location
Locate the main switchboard to suit the layout of the site, taking into account the following:
► easy access for supply authority meter reading;
► minimising the consumers’ mains cable length;
110
► centrality of the switchboard to electrical loads served; and

► its access for maintenance without undue disruption to the operation of the school.
The main switchboard is generally located in the administration area because of its central location
and function. An emergency luminaire should also be considered above the location of the
switchboard to facilitate safe viewing in the event of partial power failure.
Switchboards located in a path of travel to an exit must have a non-combustible smoke-proof enclosure in
order to comply with the Building Code of Australia.
7.10.7 Distribution Switchboards
Generally, the same conditions apply as in Section 7.10.2 with the exception of the following:
► miniature DIN rail-mounted fault-limiting circuit breaker switchboards should only be
installed. Separation shall comply with Form 1 of AS/NZS 3439.1;
► fault rating of busbars shall be calculated at the incoming termination of the distribution
switchboard but at not less than 18kAmp/second;
► where RCD protection of general purpose outlets is required, this should be provided at the
relevant circuit protective device within the distribution board; and
► specify the maximum number of general purpose outlets or final sub-circuits per RCD device.
Spare capacity should be included in the switchboard for planned future stages of school
development. Distribution switchboards and associated electrical conductors must be protected by
fire-resisting construction (refer Building Code of Australia, clause C2.13).
7.10.8 Wiring
As teaching spaces may alter from time to time, consideration should be given to designing a flexible
support system for cabling in a variety of configurations.
Cables need to be concealed for safety reasons. Systems such as skirting duct, wall duct, floor duct
and service columns should be considered to avoid tripping hazards. Exposed cabling is not
acceptable.
Provision for future additional cabling should also be taken into account.
All cables shall be double insulated (i.e. PVC, XLPE-insulated with a PVC sheath), MIMS or fire-
resistant polymer insulated and sheathed. Single insulated “building wire” will not be accepted.
Copper conductors shall be multi-stranded and not less than 1.5mm2 for lighting or 2.5mm2 for
power final sub-circuits.
Cables with conductor sizes greater than 35mm2 per phase shall be single core double insulated with
a multi-stranded conductor.
Cables should be sized to carry the intended electrical load, taking into account the maximum
demand, methods of installation, short circuit capacity and voltage drop. Utilise AS 3008 Part 1
when sizing cables.
111
7.10.9 Power and Special Connections
General Purpose Outlets
All general purpose outlets (GPOs) shall be connected to a final sub-circuit and protected by an ELCB
(RCD) rated at not more than 30mA. Sub-circuits excepted are those permanently supplying
appliances storing perishable goods (refrigerators, freezers), appliances with high earth leakage
currents (stoves, pie warmers, kilns, dish and clothes washers, etc.), and life-supporting equipment
(fish tanks, etc.).
Single phase outlets shall:

► comprise a rocker operated switch and 3-pin plug base with flat earth pin, mounted on a
common moulded impact resistant plastic flush plate and separate surround plate;
► incorporate a permanent method of circuit identification (IP stud, label, etc.);
► be stainless steel or weather resistant in wet areas such as kitchens and laundries; and
► be weather resistant where installed in plant-rooms and external areas.
Locate 10-amp single-phase double general purpose outlets in accordance with the following:
► at 15-metre intervals along corridors;
► four per general classroom (i.e. two at the front and two at the rear); and
► extra general purpose outlets to special class rooms as required.
Three-phase outlets shall:

► be surface or semi-recess mounted;
► be of weather resistant type (i.e. Clipsal 56 Series); and
► incorporate: (a) rotating switch mechanism, (b) 5-pin plug base, (c) spring-loaded flap, and
(d) screw-neck to plug base.
General purpose outlets that are normally used by occupants (except maintenance personnel), even if
infrequently, should accord with the Building Code of Australia.
Permanently Connected Equipment
Isolating switches should be provided for each item of permanently connected equipment. Isolating
switches shall be:
► rated at not less than the circuit protective device;
► mounted adjacent each item of equipment; and
► flush-mounted for internal installations and surface-mounted weatherproof for external

installations.
112
Special Conditions
Emergency stop (off) push buttons should be provided for trade rooms and laboratories adjacent to
each exit door. Push buttons shall incorporate mushroom head with latch and twist release. Push
buttons will trip off all power circuits within the respective room/laboratory.
A minimum of two power outlets on a dedicated circuit should be provided to each communication rack.
7.10.10 Artificial Lighting
Standards
All works shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, the following (latest published version shall
apply in each case):
AS2601 The Demolition of Structures (especially PCB removal)

AS1680.0 Interior lighting; Safe movement
AS1680.1 Interior and workplace lighting; General principles and recommendations
AS1680.2.1 Interior lighting; Circulation spaces and other general areas
AS1680.2.2 Interior lighting; Office and screen-based tasks
AS/NZS1680.2.3 Interior lighting; Educational and training facilities
AS1680.3 Interior lighting; Measurement, calculation and presentation of photometric data
AS/NZS1680.4 Interior lighting; Maintenance of electric lighting systems
AS2293.1 Emergency escape lighting and exit signs for buildings; System design,
installation and operation
AS/NZS2293.2 Emergency evacuation lighting for buildings; Inspection and maintenance
AS2293.3 Emergency escape lighting and exit signs for buildings; Emergency escape
luminaires and exit signs
AS/NZS3827.1 Lighting system performance; Accuracies and tolerances; Overview and general
recommendations
AS/NZS3827.2 Lighting system performance; Accuracies and tolerances; Compliance requirements
AS/NZS60598.1 Luminaires; General requirements and tests
AS/NZS60598.2.1 Luminaires; Particular requirements; Fixed general purpose luminaries
AS/NZS60598.2.2 Luminaires; Particular requirements; Recessed luminaires
AS/NZS60598.2.6 Luminaires; Particular requirements; Luminaires with built-in transformers or
converters for filament lamps
AS/NZS60598.2.19 Luminaires; Particular requirements; Air handling luminaires (Safety requirements)
AS/NZS60598.2.22 Luminaires; Particular requirements; Luminaires for emergency lighting
AS/NZS61000.6.1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); Generic standards; Immunity for residential,
commercial and light-industrial environments
AS/NZS61000.6.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC); General standards; Immunity for industrial
environments
AS/NZS61347.1 Lamp controlgear; General and safety requirements
AS/NZS 61347.2.11 Lamp controlgear; Particular requirements for miscellaneous electronic circuits used
with luminaires
IESNA LM79 LM79-08 Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products
IESNA LM80 LM80-08 Approved Method:
Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources
113
Light Sources
All lighting installations shall comply with the requirements of Section J of the Building Code of
Australia.
Provide instant re-strike high-efficiency light sources such as T5 or LED lamps. Install special purpose
lamps and luminaires in special areas (i.e. photographic laboratories, media rooms, etc.) as required.
Fluorescent lamps shall comply with AS/NZS 4782.1, Minimum Energy Performance Standards
(MEPS) and be 16mm diameter (T5), triphosphor lamps.
Luminaires used in conjunction with T5 lamps shall be of a design originally intended for the T5
lamp. T5 retrofits for existing fluorescent luminaries are not acceptable.
The use of linear LED replacement tubes in existing fluorescent tube fittings is not recommended. It
is recommended that existing T8 and T12 fluorescent tube type fittings are replaced with new
energy-efficient T5 fluorescent tube or LED fittings when schools undertake energy-efficient lighting
upgrades.
If linear LED replacement tubes are used, the existing fitting must be in good condition. There is a
risk that the replacement tube may fall out if the existing fitting is in poor condition. LED
replacement tubes can also have a lower light output than the fluorescent tubes being replaced.
Existing fluorescent tube type fittings need to be modified by an A grade electrician for the LED
replacement tube to work.
Bare or exposed lamp luminaires are only acceptable if permitted by the following table and fitted
with wire guards. All luminaries shall have photometric files to NATA accreditation and EMC
compliance as per Australian Standards. Where a prismatic lens is used, a minimum of Y19 is
recommended.
Light emitting diodes (LEDs) shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer such as Cree,
Osram, Nichia, Tridonic, Xicato or Luxeon with proven experience in LED production. The luminaire
manufacturer shall meet any certification available by the LED manufacturer.
LEDs and drivers in fittings shall be replaceable. This is to avoid the need to dispose of the whole
fitting in the event of LED fault or failure.
LED light engines shall preferably conform to Zhaga Interface Specifications (current edition of
relevant Book). Certification is preferred but not mandatory provided the supplier can prove
certification is underway, or the inherent interchangeability and replaceability of the offered product
in accordance with Zhaga Interface Specification Books.
If Zhaga is not an adopted protocol of the nominated manufacturer, then a modular replaceable LED
engine system must be used, and information provided to the lighting consultant to define this. No
LED products will be used without replaceable LED engine systems, unless specifically detailed as an
exception in the project scope of works.
114
LED light engines shall comply with the following safety and performance standards:
Product type Safety Standard Performance Standard

Self-ballasted LED-lamps for IEC 62560 Edition 1 IEC 62612/PAS (publicly
general lighting services >50V - available specification)
Safety specifications
Control gear for LED modules AS/NZS 61347.1 and IEC IEC 62384
61347.2.13
LED Modules for general lighting - IEC 62031 Edition 1

Safety specifications
LED Luminaires AS/NZS 60598.1 IEC/PAS 62722.2.1 Ed. 1:

Luminaire performance – Part 2.1:
Particular requirements for LED
luminaires
Recommended Design Criteria
The following table summarises the proposed design criteria for school lighting. These are based
upon recommendations contained within AS1680 Interior and workplace lighting - Part 2.3: Specific
applications - Educational and training facilities: 2008.
Uniformity is expressed as minimum-to-average value over the typical working plane at the
following heights;
► Primary school – 600mm above floor
► Secondary school – 720mm above floor
► Laboratory – 900mm above floor.
115
Classrooms
FITTING /
LUX UNIFOR GLARE MOUNT DIFFUSER
AREA TYPE LAMP COMMENTS
LEVEL MITY RATING OPTIONS TYPES
TYPES
General 240 lx 0.7 19 S or SM T5 or LED L/P Walls ideally 100-120 lx
Purpose average
Classroom Ceiling ideally 30-50 lx
average
Preparation 240 lx 0.7 19 S or SM T5 or LED L/P
Computer / 320 lx 0.7 16 S or SM T5 or LED L/P Direct/indirect and
Media / IT dimmable preferred
Art /Craft 320 lx 0.7 19 S or SM T5 or LED L/P May require some local
task lighting
Music / 320 lx 0.7 19 S or SM T5 or LED L/P
Drama
Science / 320 lx 0.7 19 S or SM T5 or LED L/P
Home
Economics
Textiles / 320 lx 0.4 19 S or SM T5 or LED L/P May require some local

Ceramics task lighting
Graphic 320 lx 0.7 19 S or SM T5 or LED L/P May require some local
Design task lighting
Trade Studies
May require some local
– ceilings 320 lx 0.7 22 S or SM T5 or LED L/P
task lighting
<3m
Trade Studies
T5 or LED May require some local
– ceilings 320 lx 0.7 22 S or SM L/P
or MH task lighting
>3m
Laboratory 320 lx 0.7 19 S or SM T5 or LED L/P
Staff Areas
FITTING /
TYPES
Staff Office 320 lx 0.7 19 SM or R T5 or LED L/P
/ Admin
Sick Bay 80 lx 0.5 16 S or SM T5 or L/P Indirect lighting
LED preferred
May require local task
lighting
Staff Room 240 lx 0.5 19 SM or R T5 or L/P
LED
116
General Areas
FITTING /
TYPES
Entry 160 lx 0.5 19 SM or R T5 or LED L/P
Lobby
Corridors 80 lx 0.5 22 SM or R T5 or LED L/P Consider wall
illumination for student
displays
Toilets 160 lx 0.3 19 S or SM T5 or LED L/P
Lockers 80 lx 0.3 19 S or SM T5 or LED L/P
Store Room 80 lx 0.3 22 S or SM T5 or LED L/P May need wire guards if

subject to accidental
contact
Plant Room 80 lx 0.3 22 S or SM T5 or LED Guard or
IP
Special Purpose
FITTING /
TYPES
Performing 160 lx 0.5 19 SM or R T5 or 0-100% dimming
Arts - Lobby LED required
Performing 80 lx 0.5 19 SM or R T5 or 0-100% dimming
Arts - LED required
Auditorium
Performing 240 lx 0.5 19 S or SM T5 or Guard For set-up not
Arts - Stage LED performance
Performing 320 lx 0.5 19 R T5 or L/P May require mirror
Arts – Make LED lighting
Up
Library – 320 lx 0.7 19 SM or R T5 or L/P
Reading LED
General LED
Carrels & LED
study areas
Library – 120 lx 0.7 19 SM or R T5 or L/P Light level measured on
Stacks vertical LED bookstacks
Gymnasium* 300 / 0.5 19 S or SM T5HO or Guard Dual switched levels to
500 lx LED or allow for competitions
MH
School Hall 160 lx 0.5 19 S or SM T5HO or
or R LED or
MH
Dark Room special n/a n/a Special lighting
equipment
* For design standards relating to lux level for Competition Grade Facilities, see Appendix 4.
117
Legend:
S Suspended
SM Surface mounted
R Recessed
T5 T5 Fluorescent
T5HO T5 High Output Fluorescent
LED Light Emitting Diode
MH Metal Halide
L/P Lensed
IP IP Rated
Guard Wire guard
A common style of lamp should be used throughout the project, thereby minimising the
requirement to store different lamp types for maintenance.
Reflectors, where required, shall have a total reflectivity of at least 80%.
If downlights are required, select LED or compact fluorescent types. Air space shall be provided
around the downlight in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations or a suitable surface
mounted luminaire should be selected in its place.
The expected service life of a typical luminaire is 15 years; consider the replacement of any
luminaires older than this.
For renovations, consideration should be given to the relocation of existing luminaires into lesser
utilised areas (in conjunction with motion sensors) and the installation of new technology luminaires
(for example, LED) to capitalise on energy efficiency and reduced maintenance.
In larger areas with higher ceiling heights, consider the following solutions;
► Metal halide luminaires – observing the following ‘rule of thumb’ minimum mounting
heights to avoid excessive glare;
o 70 watts – above 3 metres
► High-output T5 luminaires for ceiling heights above 5 metres
LED luminaires – observe manufacturer’s recommendations regarding mounting heights.
118
Ballasts
Electronic ballasts for fluorescent luminaires shall: comply with AS/NZS 4783, AS/NZS 60928, AS/NZS
60929, AS/NZS 61347 and AS/NZS 3100; have a Ballast Energy Efficiency Index of A2 (if switched) or
A1 (if dimmed); have a Ballast Lumen Factor of 1.0; and be rated for 50,000 hours of operation at 50
degree C (in the ballast chamber).
Subject to a cost/benefit analysis, dimmable ballasts may also be considered in conjunction with
daylight sensors.
Auditoriums and halls should consider 0-100% dimming for effect and/or energy efficiency in
relation to the task.
Illumination Levels and Glare Indices
Illumination levels and glare ratings shall be in accordance with the Recommended Design Criteria
Table p. 119.
The aggregate design illumination power density expressed in W/m² must not exceed the sum of
allowances specified in Section J6 of the Building Code of Australia after taking into account the
applicable control credits.
Switching groups (whether by manual or automatic devices) must not exceed 100m² of floor area.
Arrange luminaires to provide general uniform lighting throughout the illuminated space in
accordance with AS1680. Where higher local illuminance levels are required for specific tasks,
provide suitable local task lighting or provide suspended luminaires over the task.
Light Switches
In general, arrange local switching to each room. Locate light switches on the jamb side of the main
entry door to the relevant room.
Where a large room such as a library has two or more entry points, provide multi-gang two-way and
intermediate switching at all doors to suit the specific configuration of the space.
Arrange switching or daylight sensors to provide separate control of perimeter luminaires close to
windows (as a rule of thumb, to a depth of twice the height of the windows); dimming of these in
response to daylighting is preferred to switching.
The size, type and location of lighting controls which are normally used by occupants (except
maintenance personnel), even if infrequently, should accord with the requirements of the Building
Code of Australia, particularly Section J.
Access/Security Lighting
Internal security lighting shall be provided in the form of unswitched or after-hours automatically
switched luminaires. Luminaires shall incorporate low energy (high efficiency) light sources and
should be located at building entries, changes of direction to external pathways, and stairs in
corridors.
119
Security and after-hours access lighting should consist of high-efficiency light sources. LED or metal
halide should be used for general flood lighting. T5 fluorescent lamps or LED luminaires are
appropriate for perimeter and access lighting. These should be controlled by a daylight
(photoelectric) sensor in conjunction with a time clock.
Emergency and Exit Lighting
Emergency and exit lighting shall be provided as required under the Building Code of Australia and in
accordance, generally, with AS 2293 Parts 1 and 2. Any alternative systems should be assessed for
compliance by the relevant building surveyor in accordance with the Code. Systems shall consist of
single point type luminaires, and generally employ:
► 2 watt LED self-contained non-maintained mode emergency recessed type;
► 2 watt LED self-contained non-maintained mode emergency surface-mounted type; and
► 3 watt or 4 watt LED self-contained maintained exit signs (Running Man legend).
Older light sources such as halogen may only be used where LED versions are not available (for
example, in frog-eye gymnasium emergency luminaires).
Test Push Buttons or a Central Testing System shall be provided for testing the emergency and exit
lighting in accordance with AS/NZS 2293.2. (Generally, the latter system would be applied to larger
secondary colleges).
Lighting Switches
Lighting switches shall generally be of the polycarbonate rocker type, flush mounted where
practicable, and adjacent to the closing side of doors.
In plant-rooms, switches shall be of an industrial type rated to IP56.
Flush-mounted switches on columns and walls shall be mounted in standard-size metal wall boxes to
suit wall construction. PVC wall boxes may be used for PVC conduits but only where permitted.
Lighting switches shall be suitably rated to carry the switched load, with a minimum of 16 amp for
fluorescent loads.
Where multiple switches are provided, they should be clearly labelled as to the lights they serve.
Alternatively, a plan indicating which lights are controlled by which switches should be placed next
to the switch panel.
Controls
Lighting controls should be provided to ensure that lighting is only on when required – that is, when
the space is occupied, and little or no daylighting is present.
The following table recommends lighting control systems for applications.
120
Usage
Space Type Conditions Recommended Control
Pattern
Classroom Usually Multiple tasks like Daylight sensors for lighting within 2 x
occupied overhead projectors, window height. Motion sensors - take care to
whiteboard or blackboard, position them to detect minor movement
reading, class since occupants are usually seated. Multiple
demonstrations presets should be considered often
white/blackboard might need to be focussed
or turned off if the projector is running.
Occasionally Occupied by different Daylight sensors for lighting within 2 x
occupied groups of students and window height. Motion sensors - take care to
teachers daily position them to detect minor movement
since occupants are usually seated. Multiple
presets should be considered often
or turned off if projector running. Consider
absence detection -might be a better option
for unfamiliar users.
Corridors Any Occasionally or usually Corridor motion sensors with elongated
occupied throw. Be sure that coverage does not extend
beyond the desired area.
Daylighted Consider PE cell on/off control in addition to
the above.
Gymnasium Usually Requires varied lighting Manual switching - may need multiple lighting
occupied levels for activities modes, i.e. half lighting for practice, full
lighting for competition (See Appendix 4 for
further information on Competition Grade
Facilities).
Motion sensors - may need anti-vandal cages
to protect against impact by basketballs etc.
Be sure that the HVAC system will not falsely
trigger the sensors.
Occasionally Requires varied lighting Manual switching - may need multiple lighting
occupied levels for activities modes, i.e. half lighting for practice, full
lighting for competition. Possibly ceiling-and
wall-mounted PIR motion sensors. Be sure
that the coverage areas of the sensors are
sufficiently overlapped to keep the lights on
when the room is occupied.
121
Usage
Space Type Conditions Recommended Control
Pattern
Laboratories Usually Daylighted Daylight sensors for lighting within 2 x

occupied window height. Motion sensors - take care to
position them to detect minor movement
since occupants are usually seated. Multiple
presets should be considered often
or turned off if the projector is running.
Libraries— Usually Daylighted Daylight sensors for lighting within 2 x
Reading Areas occupied window height. Motion sensors - take care to
since occupants are usually seated.
Lights left on after hours Consider networked control system.
Libraries— Occasionally Stacks are usually Motion sensors - take care to position them
Stack Areas occupied unoccupied to detect minor movement given large
bookshelf obstructions.
Office, open Usually Daylighted Daylight sensors for lighting within 2 x
plan occupied window height. Consider daylight-driven
dimming. Motion sensors - take care to
No daylight. Varied tasks Motion sensors - take care to position them
from computer usage to to detect minor movement since occupants
reading are usually seated.
Lights left on after hours Consider networked controls and/or motion
sensors.
Office, Primarily one Daylighted Daylight sensors for lighting within 2 x
enclosed person, window height. Consider daylight-driven
coming and dimming. Motion sensors - take care to
going position them to detect minor movement
Occupants are likely to Motion sensors - take care to position them
leave lights on and to detect minor movement since occupants
partitions or objects could are usually seated.
hide an occupant from the
sensor
Photocopying Occasionally Lights are left on when Motion sensors - take care to position them
, Sorting, occupied they are not needed to detect minor movement since occupants
Assembling are usually seated. Be sure that machine
vibration will not falsely trigger the sensor.
Toilets Any Has cubicles Ceiling-mounted ultrasonic motion sensor.
Single toilet (no partitions) Ceiling-mounted ultrasonic motion sensor.
Store Rooms Any Lights left on all day or Motion sensors or push-button timer
after hours switches.
Centralised lighting control systems which operate by a time clock and/or are linked to the school bell,
to automatically turn lighting off, should also be considered.
122
Refer also Section 8.7.2 – Security and Access Lighting and the Department’s Emergency & Security
Management website:
https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/Services/Schools/Infrastructure/Emergency/Pages/default.aspx.
(Note that this site requires an Edumail user ID and password for access.)
7.11 Special Services

All electrical services work shall be undertaken in accordance with AS/NZS 3000 and relevant power
authority.
7.11.1 Fume Cupboards
The construction, siting, installation, maintenance and use of fume cupboards is detailed in
Australian Standard AS/NZS 2243.1. Section 4.4 states that “operations which may produce
flammable or toxic vapours should be carried out either in a fume cupboard or, if this is not possible,
they should be provided with local exhaust ventilation.”
Technology Areas and Hazard Levels
Depending on the courses offered by a school, there will be differing hazards associated with the
likes of automotive engine testing, moulding plastics, etc. Schools must indicate to the consultant in
their educational specification the courses they intend to offer and how they want to operate them
so that a risk assessment can be undertaken and requirements determined.
Exhaust ventilation fans should be considered a minimum requirement for fume cupboards.
Science Areas and Recommended Provision
It is recommended that each preparation room have a fume cupboard (preferably single-sided) and
that one also be made available to senior chemistry classes. Fume cupboards are usually not
required in physics areas but they might need to be considered in biology and agricultural science
(again, generally for senior classes, and depending on the chemicals used and experiments
conducted).
Construction
Construction materials should be selected to provide suitable resistance against chemicals handled.
Generally a PVC shell with a chemical resistant one-piece laminated work surface is suitable for most
demonstration applications. Sliding sashes shall be toughened glass or clear acrylic and feature
adequate corrosion resistant counter weights. Sashes shall remain in place whenever stopped with a
fixed minimum opening of 50mm.
Services
The following minimum services integral to fume cupboard construction should be provided:
► Power one double general purpose outlet (GPO) located either at the external top or
side of the chamber but not within the chamber;
► Lighting one separately switched fluorescent luminaire (flame proof and corrosion
proof) to provide 400 lux at the base;
123
► Sink one 200mm diameter, 150mm deep conical cup sink;

► Water one gooseneck style cold water supply outlet over sink; and
► Waste an acid neutralising tank into which waste can be discharged.
Controls
The following features should be provided:

► separate fan and light controls;
► separate controls for water and gas services external to the chamber;
► labelled emergency isolation switches for electricity and gas; and
► automatic isolation of electricity and gas in the event of inadequate air flow.
Performance
Select a fan and volume control system to maintain the required face velocity through an open sash
area. The face velocity across the fully opened sash must measure 0.5 metres per second, and air
exhausted through a fume cupboard must not be re-circulated to other rooms. The fume discharge
point must be three metres above the roof. The noise level of the fan (as measured at the
operator’s level) should not exceed 62dB(A).
Commissioning tests (as indicated in AS/NZS 2243.8) must be performed by the supplier upon
installation and the results reported to the school.
There must be an adequate supply of replacement air to compensate for the volume exhausted.
Centrifugal fans should be considered as a first choice in this operation.
Siting
The Australian Standard includes diagrams which indicate the distance fume cupboards should be
from doors, walls, bench tops, etc. to minimise air flow disturbances.
7.11.2 Compressed Air
Compressors
Consider air-cooled rotary-scroll and rotary-screw oil-free compressor types. Compressors shall be
driven by TEFC (totally enclosed fan-cooled) squirrel cage induction motors rated to IP54. Ensure
that adequate acoustic control measures are provided to maintain acceptable noise levels.
Receivers
Compressed air receivers should be provided in accordance with AS 1210, sized to maintain the
number of compressor start/stop cycles within the manufacturer’s limits, and be completed with the
following:
► inspection opening;
► dial type pressure gauge;
► valved drain point and automatic condensate drain; and
124
► pressure relief valve.
Filters
Determine the level of filtration required to suit each application. Provide, in every case, a minimum
filtration system comprising a woven media material capable of removing water droplets and
particulate material to 1.0 µm. Ensure that separated liquids are automatically drained away from
filter material. Each filter shall be completed with an integral pressure differential gauge assembly
showing required replacement times.
Pipe Work
Permanent pipe work is to be “Type B” copper tube to AS 1432, excepting suitable flexible
connections to the compressor unit. All joints are to be brazed where practical, and continuous pipe
lengths should be maximised. All pipe work is to be concealed from view in normally occupied
areas. Protection from mechanical damage, where exposed, is also to be provided. Install automatic
condensate drains to the mains pipe work. Grade mains at 1:100 to drain points. All branches shall
be taken from the top of the main pipe work, and all pipe work shall be sized to ensure that pressure
loss does not exceed 10% of the design supply pressure.
Valves
Provide globe type valves for isolation and throttling purposes, and plate check type valves for non-
return applications. All valves shall be connected by flange or union.
7.11.3 Reticulated Gas Services
Scope
The provision of reticulated bottled gas systems for specialist applications excludes LPG and vacuum
systems.
Standards
Non Flammable Gases: AS 2896
Oxygen and Acetylene: AS 4289 – 1995
Storage Facilities: Dangerous Goods (Storage and Handling) Regulations Statutory Rule
No. 323/1989
Enclosures
Determine suitable locations for permanent storage of cylinders with regards to safe storage and
handling procedures, security of plant and equipment, and capital costs. Preference should be given
to external storage locations. Within each storage area, all cylinders (whether “on-line”, “on-
standby” or “spare”) shall be securely restrained in an upright position. All cylinders for “portable”
use shall be secured to stable, wheeled trolleys. Ensure an adequate separation of Class 2.1 and
Class 2.2 materials.
125
Pipe Work
Copper pipe work is generally acceptable for most services except acetylene where stainless steel
shall be used. Pipe work should be sized for a pressure loss not exceeding 5% of the reticulated
supply pressure.
7.11.4 Dust Extraction System
Dust Extractors
Units shall be self-contained mechanical cleaned type, located with regard to acoustic performance,
equipment security and serviceability. Each unit shall feature:
► statically and dynamically balanced centrifugal mild steel fan, direct driven by a 415V, 3-
phase TEFC (totally enclosed fan-cooled) motor rated to a minimum of IP54 (maximum fan
speed 1440 rpm);
► woven fabric media with abrasive resistant properties, selected for optional performance
with regard to operating cost, collection efficiency and service life;
► acoustic attenuation of the fan assembly and discharge ductwork where necessary (noise
levels within occupied areas and externally should be made acceptable);
► electrical driven shaker assembly to clean filter media;
► bin type dust collector with robust sealing assembly; and
► explosion relief vent with minimal ductwork and changes in direction to a safe discharge
area.
Ductwork
All ductwork shall be of circular type galvanised steel, suitable for “high pressure” application in
accordance with “HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and Flexible” published by SMACNA
Incorporated (USA), and feature:
► sizing for transport velocities not less than 18 metres per second;
► radiused bends and angled take-offs to main ductwork;
► steel flange type bolt clamps on joints enabling easy removal for clean out;
► “clean out” access panels, where required, and removable caps at end of duct runs; and
► blast gate dampers where required for balancing purposes.
7.11.5 Lightning Protection
A risk assessment will be carried out in accordance with AS/NZS 1768. A risk index of greater than or
equal to 12 shall require the implementation a lightning protection system.
7.12 Centralised Energy Systems

Centralised energy systems should be avoided. Satellite boilers and smaller packaged air conditioning
plants provide greater flexibility, control and energy savings.
126
Effective temperature and time-clock controls should be provided to all centralised boilers and
packaged plant. Complex building automation (energy) systems should be avoided.
Refer Section 7.6 – Heating, Section 7.7 – Ventilation and Section 7.8 – Cooling.
7.13 Storage
Well-designed storage provides the space in which to keep essential articles and equipment. It must
also facilitate their efficient use and handling.
The provision of storage can represent a significant cost to the design and development of a school,
both in terms of accommodation and ease of access. School Construction Rates currently allow for
locker areas and site stores to be considered at a part-internal and part-external average rate of
$900/sqm.
The different abilities of anticipated users must be kept in mind when installing new storage or re-
assessing existing storage facilities. In addition to adult users, students may also have access to
stored items. AS 1428.2 and AS 1428.3 provide guidance. Safety and convenience are paramount.
Consider the following factors:

► make storage access as convenient as possible (relevant storage spaces should be directly
accessible from activity spaces);
► locate bulk storage so as to be convenient for the receipt of deliveries;
► protect articles from breakage, moisture, heat, cold, misuse, theft, etc.;
► control distribution or use;
► provide a safe location for dangerous items; and
► share storage between spaces to enable the creation of larger, more useful spaces.
When designing storage areas, the Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2007 S.R No. 54/2007,
including provisions of the Manual Handling and Prevention of Falls Regulations, must be taken into
consideration. This is particularly important in designing archive storage areas where preference should
be given to small-sized archive boxes.
127
Section 8:
Section 7 - Internal Services External Services
Boronia K-12 College

128
Section 8 - External Services
8. EXTERNAL SERVICES
8.1 Introduction
When designing any given service, the designer is required to make use of the most cost effective
materials and installation techniques available, commensurate with appropriate levels of service and
durability, and in accordance with the philosophy outlined in this Handbook.
Where classes, types, etc. are referred to, they are in accordance with the relevant Australian
Standard. All dimensions are in millimetres unless noted otherwise.
8.2 External Stormwater Drainage
8.2.1 General
A drainage system shall be provided to drain the site. All drainage in the region of buildings and
paved areas shall be by combination of open inverts, kerb and channel, and underground drains as
appropriate. Surface drainage in grassed areas may be collected by swale drains.
Design of the drainage system shall be based on design methods outlined in Australian Rainfall and
Runoff, and the relevant authority’s requirements.
Where the site layout and falls provide an acceptable means of overland flood relief, the Average
Recurrence Interval (ARI) adopted for design shall be not less than 5 years. In other cases the ARI
shall be not less than 50 years.
The legal point(s) of discharge shall be obtained from the relevant authority.
8.2.2 Rainwater Collection
Consideration should be given to the retention of stormwater on site through the use of tanks. This
water can be used as an alternate source for the irrigation needs of the school. (The cost of this
installation is now included in the school rates and is no longer a special factor.) Consideration must
be given to the following when determining the suitability of rainwater tanks:
► the purpose of the rainwater tank – whether for irrigation or connection to specific fixtures
such as toilet cisterns (or both);
► the location which best maximises the catchment area;
► the estimated roof catchment yield;
► security issues; and
► maintenance issues.
In accordance with AS/NZS 3500 Part 1.2 Water Supply – Acceptable Solutions, water collected and
stored in rainwater tanks and used as an alternated water supply must not be used for human
consumption.
In addition to complying with all relevant standards, installations should comply with the Standards
129
Australia Handbook HB 230, Rainwater Tank Design and Installation Handbook. This document provides
practical information for the collection, storage and use of rainwater. Although it is aimed at urban
environments and private residences, the information is relevant to school use. It also provides a means
of calculation of anticipated water harvesting yields.
Bladder-type tanks
Bladder type tanks are recommended for use beneath floors, decks, etc. However, they should be
located in a position where they are accessible for maintenance.
Post-occupancy evaluations have reported leaking underground bladders that cannot be

accessed for repairs.
8.2.3 Pipe Work and Structures
All pipework and structures should conform to Water Services Association of Australia Water Code
WSA 03.
Pipe sizes shall be not less than:

► DN (nominal diameter) 100 for connection direct to down pipes;
► DN150 downstream of any grated pit; and
► DN225 downstream of any side entry pit.
Pipe work materials shall be:

► for DN100 and DN150, solvent-jointed UPVC conforming with AS/NZS 1260;
► for DN225 and greater on straight runs without junction fittings, rubber ring jointed
reinforced concrete conforming with AS/NZS 4058 or rubber ring-jointed fibre reinforced
cement pipes conforming with AS 4139, of the appropriate class; and
► for DN225 and DN300 straight runs with junction fittings, solvent-jointed PVC conforming
with AS/NZS 1260 or rubber ring-jointed fibre reinforced cement conforming with AS 4139,
of the appropriate class.
Junctions of pipes DN300 or smaller shall be made either with oblique or sweep-junction proprietary
fittings, or at pits.
Junctions of DN100 or DN150 pipes with DN375 or larger pipes may be made with saddle-type
fittings.
Junctions of pipes DN225 or larger with DN375 or larger pipes shall be made at pits.
Pit covers shall be of a tight fitting bolted-down design or have sufficient weight to prevent their
easy removal.
All pit construction should conform to the relevant authority standard.
130
Downpipe Filters
Post-occupancy evaluations have reported the use of unsatisfactory downpipe filters which block in
heavy rain. “Leafeater” type screened downpipe rainheads are one recommended option. Here the
upper section of the downpipe discharges onto an angled mesh surface across a “rainhead” attached
. to the lower part of the pipe. Leaves are screened by the mesh and fall clear because of the angle,
allowing water to pass through the mesh and into the “rainhead”. These devices are normally located
just below the eaves.
An alternative strategy that has been successfully use in schools entails stopping downpipes short of
ground-level and catching the discharge in grated pits
8.2.4 Stormwater Drainage Issues
The design of the drainage system shall address the following issues as appropriate:
► on site retention;
► erosion control;
► litter control;
► sedimentation control; and
► maintenance.
Drainage Problems
Recent post-occupancy evaluations have found a number of schools with inadequate stormwater
drainage, resulting in flooding and unsatisfactory site conditions. Drainage seems to have been paid
little priority.
Grated stormwater pits were set too high above adjacent ground level, and drainpipes under floors
leaked, creating smells and damage to the structure.
8.3 External Sewer Drainage
8.3.1 Pipe Work and Structures
The preferred pipe work material is uPVC except where discharge or other conditions require an
alternative material. All pipe work and structures should conform to Water Services Association of
Australia Sewerage Code WSA 02.
Sewer inspection chambers shall be provided to facilitate maintenance, and be located at junctions
of major sewer drainage runs and at not more than 60 metre intervals.
Additional overflow relief gullies shall be provided to maximise the protection of buildings against
blocked sewers.
8.3.2 Sewer Design Issues
The design of the sewer drainage system shall address the following issues as appropriate:
► grease arrestors;
131
► neutralisers;
► solvent/oil interception;
► acid drains;
► trade wastes; and
► maintenance.
8.4 External Water Supply

The supply of water is governed by the relevant Australian Standard as well as regulations and by-
laws exercised through local water authorities. (Victoria’s Safe Drinking Water Act 2003 (refer
Department of Human Services) deals specifically with the regulation and quality of potable water
supplies.)
Pipe work, valves and fittings shall comply with AS/NZS 3500.3, with the additional requirement that
all pipe work below buildings and concealed in buildings shall be copper tube “Type B” in accordance
with AS/NZS 4058.
The preferred pipe work materials are:

► for DN32 and greater, UPVC except for the limitation above and the limitations of AS/NZS
3500.1; and
► for DN25 and smaller, copper tube “Type B” in accordance with AS/NZS 4058.
8.4.2 Backflow Prevention
Provide all backflow prevention devices as required by the relevant authority and AS/NZS 3500.3.
8.4.3 Irrigation Systems
Provide irrigation systems as appropriate to garden and grassed areas. Refer Section 10.5.2 – Irrigation
Systems.
8.4.4 Other External Supply Issues
The design of the external water supply system shall address the following issues:
► enclosure of equipment to prevent vandalism; and
► dual supply to site where practical.
8.4.5 Potable Water Tanks
In some rural areas of Victoria, schools may not have access to reticulated mains water, and are
therefore reliant on a private water tank for potable water.
Potable water tanks should consider the following design specifications, installations and maintenance
to ensure that it provides safe potable water.
132
Risks can be mitigated through the design, installation and maintenance of a rainwater supply system:
Rainwater collecting potable tanks

► the roofs surface must be suitable for the collection of rainwater (roof materials such as
bitumen and lead paint are considered hazardous);
► roofs and gutters should be easily accessible in order to be regularly cleaned and
maintained;
► a leaf stopper should be installed;
► light-proof the tank and plumbing;
► install a first flush device;
► mount the TV antenna off the roof;
► the tank should be securely covered;
► screens should be installed on all tank inlets, outlets and vents;
► water should be disinfected; and
► tank should be able to be drained for periodic desludging.
Groundwater collecting potable tanks

► light proof the tank and plumbing;
► securely cover the tank;
► maintain buffer distance between bore and onsite wastewater system;
► maintain onsite wastewater system;
► install ultraviolet disinfection;
► install screens on all tank inlets, outlets and vents;
► install water filtration;
► surround bore with a concrete slab sloping away from the bore casing;
► secure bore cover; and
► mount pump on a separate concrete slab with bunding.
Schools are responsible for managing their potable water supply system and ensuring that the water
provided for drinking is safe. For a comprehensive guide on the maintenance and management of
private water supplies refer to A guide to completing a water supply management plan- for schools
using private drinking water supplies.
8.5 External Gas
8.5.1 Natural Gas Meters
Meter enclosures shall be well secured. Meter by-pass pipe work facilities should also be provided.
133
8.5.2 LP Gas Storage
Size bulk storage tanks and cylinders with regard to the maximum required vaporisation rate,
practical delivery intervals and cost. Carefully locate bulk storage tanks and cylinders with regard to
statutory requirements, physical security, and ease of refilling or replacement.
Provide external tanks with 75mm thick concrete plinths extending 500mm beyond the tank
enclosure and with an 1800mm high chain mesh enclosure and lockable access gates. Tank finish
shall include abrasive cleaning, prime painting and top coating. A lockable, corrosion protected
sheet metal enclosure with concrete base should also be provided for external cylinders.
8.5.3 Pipe Work – Below Ground
All consumer pipe work shall be “Type B” copper tube to AS 1432. All joints are to be brazed where
practical. Pipe work installed in the ground shall be complete with a corrosion resistant external
wrapping. Ensure an adequate separation distance from other in-ground services, structures and
earthing electrodes. Do not install pipe work within concrete slabs and avoid installing pipe work
under buildings where possible. Size pipe work to limit pressure loss to mandatory limits, and
include a 10% safety factor. Where LPG is likely to be replaced by natural gas within five years, allow
for natural gas in the pipe work design.
8.5.4 Gas Booster
Gas pressure booster devices are to be avoided where possible. Where required, locate them
carefully and ensure that adequate acoustic measures are provided to meet acceptable ambient and
internal noise criteria.
8.6 External Fire Protection
8.6.1 General
Provide a hydrant system to satisfy the minimum requirements of the Building Code of Australia, AS
2419 and local fire authority.
8.6.2 Fire Hydrants
Preferred hydrant installations are external dual-head individually-controlled outlets, with access and
hard standing for a fire appliance to connect to the hydrant. Maximum hose length should not exceed 20
metres. Hydrant fixtures and installation should conform to Water Services Association Water Code
WSA 03 and AS 2419.1. Internal hydrants are not preferred.
Pipe work, valves and fittings shall comply with AS 2419.1.
The preferred pipe work material is uPVC except for the limitations on use imposed by AS 2419.1.
8.6.4 Other Issues
The design of the external fire protection system shall address the following issues:
134
► fire brigade booster connection;

► booster pumps;
► source of water supply if street mains supply is inadequate or not available;
► hose couplings compatible with relevant fire brigade;
► use of street hydrants to minimise the number of on site hydrants;
► appropriate valving for hydrants and hose reels; and
► signage and notices.
8.7 External Electric Light and Power
8.7.1 External Power
All general power outlets provided externally shall be of the following type:
► surface mounted;
► weather resistant with IP56 protection rating;
► have rotating switch mechanism;
► feature an integral 3-pin with flat earth single phase socket or 5-round pin three phase
socket;
► include spring loaded flap;
► screw neck to plug base; and
► feature keyed switch mechanism, if necessary.
Sub-circuit cabling should be installed to outlets either internally concealed within the building
structure or within rigid non-metallic or metallic conduit. Non-metallic conduit subject to UV
radiation should be suitably treated to prevent degradation.
8.7.2 Security and Access Lighting
Security lighting to carparks, pathways and the perimeter of all buildings should be provided to
ensure safe access. Consider also the needs and applications associated with out-of-hours tuition,
community hiring of facilities, and vandalism.
All external lighting for security and access shall be in accordance with AS1158.3.1.
Consider post-top mounted luminaires equipped with either metal halide lamps with electronic gear
or LED light sources for energy efficiency. Locate luminaires at 3.5 metres above ground or higher to
avoid vandalism.
Useful security hints and practical advice can be obtained from the Department’s Security Services
website
135
Controls
Lighting shall, in general, be controlled by a photoelectric cell in conjunction with a time controller.
Motion detectors may be used to activate security and access lighting provided that consideration is
given to avoidance of nuisance activation, i.e. a narrow detection field may be better than a
wide field.
Motion detector switching is not appropriate for any lighting that has start-up and restrike periods
(i.e. high intensity discharge lamps).
Light Sources
Security and after-hours access lighting should consist of high-efficiency light sources. LED or metal
halide should be used for general flood lighting. T5 fluorescent lamps or LED luminaires are
appropriate for perimeter and access lighting. These should be controlled by a daylight
(photoelectric) sensor in conjunction with a time clock.
Luminaires
Luminaires should be vandal-resistant and of a minimum IP65 rating, and have a power factor corrected
to 0.85 lagging or better, with superimposed pulse igniter circuits where igniters are required.
8.7.3 Underground Services
Underground cable conduits should be supplied and installed for the enclosure of HV and LV cables.
Cable conduits for HV and LV cables shall be laid at 750mm and 500mm (to top of conduits) below
finished surface levels respectively.
Where cabling is subject to mechanical damage or is installed with less cover than specified above,
metallic protection to cabling must be provided.
136
Section 9:
Section 8 - External Services Communication Services
Hazel Glen College

137
Section 9 – Communication Services
9. COMMUNICATION SERVICES
9.1 Introduction
The Department is one of the largest users of IT in Australia and among worldwide leaders in the use
and implementation of information and communication technologies (ICT). The State school system
consists of over 1700 sites which are connected to a WAN (Wide Area Network), and each has its
own LAN (Local Area Network). Furthermore, every school receives high-capacity broadband
internet through the Government’s initiative, VicSmart.
ICT standardisation is used to allow the Department to provide support and management of ICT
services across both the shared WAN and local school LAN’s.
The Department’s Information Technology Division has produced guidelines on the design and
installation of ICT in schools to support ICT standardisation. These guidelines follow appropriate
infrastructure and industry standards. These include:
► ICT Design Models for Schools (Standards – Best Practice Guide); and
► ICT Design for Learning Spaces (Patterns – Application of standards, with examples from
“Building the Education Revolution”).
The ICT Design Models for Schools must be studied before a new school is designed or an existing
school embarks upon updating its ICT capabilities. This document provides more information on all
aspects of an ICT installation and goes into greater detail than this handbook. In overall terms, it:
Introduces issues that affect the design of ICT installations;
Discusses:
o Infrastructure and Connectivity;
o ICT devices;
o Peripherals and Innovation;
o Professional Learning and Support
ICT may also require customisation to suit the needs of local school students, staff and visitors of
varying abilities.
In a project, the main sub-consultant involved with ICT will be the communications engineer. This
consultant may be able to advise further on ICT matters or may require a specialist in
communication design. In any case, the school is advised to obtain advice on their ICT requirements.
The consultant must ensure that the ICT design complies with the Department’s best practice ICT
Design Models for Schools. The consultant should discuss the ICT proposal with the
school/Department representative, and implement any school requests where practical.
Consultation is to continue throughout the project, including discussion on the introduction of new
technologies that may have developed during the planning period.
In general, communication services in schools cover data (administrative, curriculum, etc.),

emergency warning systems, video (including audio-visual), voice (telephone), library automation,
public address, TV antenna (including satellite dish), and security. Multi-campus sites are now
required to be linked for communication services.
138
Wireless technologies have been installed at every school since 2004 and are required to be installed
in new buildings in accordance with the standards outlined in the ICT Design Models for Schools.
Wireless technology in schools has grown rapidly to a fleet of over 32,000 WAPs, supporting mobile
access for over 500,000 devices. This included the deployment of eduSTAR.net, an enterprise-class
wireless network to provide students and teachers with mobile access to technology.
Schools across Victoria are integrating ICT into their curriculum in ways that enhance student
computer literacy, share knowledge and information.
For further information on the Department’s use of ICT, visit:
► ICT Support, Services and Advice

http://www.education.vic.gov.au/school/teachers/support/Pages/tecsupport.aspx
► Online Learning and Teaching Resources

http://www.education.vic.gov.au/school/teachers/support/Pages/elearnresources.aspx
► ICT Procurement (via the whole of Department contract procurement arrangement)

http://www.education.vic.gov.au/school/principals/infrastructure/Pages/ictproducts.aspx
https://www.edustar.vic.edu.au/catalogue/Pages/HardwareHome.aspx
9.1.1 National Broadband Network (NBN)
The NBN is being ‘rolled out’ throughout the country and will come on line gradually. When it is
available to an address, the land owner will be notified and a date set for when the existing network
will be switched off. Since all Victorian government schools are provided with fibre-to-the-premises
by Telstra through VicSmart, NBN will not impact the ICT component of schools.
It is possible to check if there is NBN in the relevant area at nbnco.com.au or via a Google search for
the appropriate site. The telephone enquiry number is 1800 687 626.
The landowner (DET on behalf of the State of Victoria) will arrange with NBN to maintain telephone
and internet services. DET will arrange this with a Whole of Victorian Government (WOVG) service
provider. Application to connect to the NBN will be dealt with by the school’s consultant.
9.2 Infrastructure
9.2.1 Cabling Design and Infrastructure
Information and Communications Technology (ICT) requires cabling to deliver electronic capabilities
for existing and future technologies.
Lead-in cabling, cable trenching and distribution frames are clearly explained in Telstra guidelines that
are available from the Optus help desk (tel. 1300 659 749).
Professional data cabling consultants should be engaged (as sub-consultants to the communications
consultant) to design and document the requirements of the school.
Some key considerations of cabling design are:

Cable type and quantity: will determine how much e-learning can be implemented and the
economies available;
139
Design of the cabling infrastructure: will determine user flexibility and amount of change that
is available over the life of the cabling (typically 10+ years);
The quality of the installation will determine the performance able to be achieved;
The continued increase in wireless devices and Internet use.
In addition, consideration should be given to desirability and practicality of the extent of cabling
infrastructure installed to enable an ‘intelligent building’; the integration of data, voice video, security
audio visual, building automation (for building services and access control), etc, over Internet protocol
(IP).
9.2.2 Cabling Design Elements
Cabling Design will follow the requirements of each individual school size and growth potential. Key
considerations are:
Provision of growth space in a communications room must be large enough to be
future-proof;
Choice of cable (category) should cater for future expansion. The Department recommends
all copper cabling, connectors, patch panels and patch cords are minimum Class Ea (Category
6A) standard;
Cable distribution cabinets must be sized to allow for future expansion;
Copper cable runs (possibly utilised for telecommunications) have maximum lengths between
panels and outlets;
Optical fibre is required between buildings. The Department recommends minimum OM3
grade, multimode outdoor rated cable;
Optical fibre is required within buildings where copper distance limitations are not met or
communications devices require fibre connections. For these purposes the Department
recommends minimum OM3 grade, multimode cable;
Cables must not be overly bent requiring the design of suitable cable pathways within a
building.
It is essential to note that all the cabling for the ICT Infrastructure must support the School
administration and learning objectives. Therefore the installation must be of the highest standard and
covered by the appropriate compliance certificate and minimum of 25 years warranty.
9.2.3 Number of Network Points Required
Cabled power and data points should provide the flexibility to adopt to a range of learning space
designs. Thus a combination of floor boxes, ceiling mounts, wall points and wireless access is
recommended.
140
Learning Space Capacity: 25 students and 1 staff member
Optimal number Usage

of data points
Specialised Student use.
6* For example and subject to the shape of the room. Considerations: Is the learning space
the row, street, bank or integrated spaces for computers
2 Wireless access points (WAP) on ceiling central to the room. 1.5 WAP’s per learning space
may suffice. E.g. 3 WAP’s shared between 2 learning spaces
1 Network data projector on ceiling at each data projector location
1 Telephone placed at a convenient area for staff and/or student use based on school policy
1 Staff use (0.5-2 metres left or right from interactive whiteboard)
* Depending on a number of factors including the learning space design, student wireless devices and
access to fixed wired devices, a school may feel it is necessary to increase (or decrease) the number
of data points for students per learning space.
9.2.4 eduSTAR.net Wireless Connectivity
The eduSTAR.net enterprise wireless network provides key wireless infrastructure to support the
growing use of mobile devices in Victorian education.
The eduSTAR.net Enterprise Wireless Network is accessible to:

School educators, administrators and leadership 24 hours x 7 days per week.
School learners (students) have access to the service 6 am and 8 pm, weekdays.
School wireless networks (WLAN) add flexibility and mobility to staff and students throughout
the school.
The benefits of installing a WLAN in a school include:

Staff/Students can effectively use laptops and mobile devices collaboratively in open spaces.
Installing a WLAN requires less physical work than installing or adding to a LAN.
WLANs can expand in size and functionality; access points can be added and be upgraded.
WLANs can start off small and grow in size and complexity as needed.
WLANs allow users to move freely around the room, to wherever access points are in
operation.
The use of wireless devices is and will be ever increasing. However, wireless communications does
not replace a cabled system; it complements and adds flexibility. Wireless access points (WAPs) need
power – to be plugged-in – and a connection to the building’s data network.
It is signal strength that determines the speed and reliability of wireless network access so good
coverage is essential to a successful system. Information on WAP mounting, wireless best practices
and safety can be found at the following link:
Wireless Access Point Mounting, Best Practices and Safety
The recommended Wireless Access Point for extending school wireless environments is the Cisco 3700
series. These can be purchased via the Department’s eduSTAR catalogue.
141
Although it is suggested above that 1.5 WAP’s are suitable for 25 students, this is very much an average
and depends on:
How many devices are in use at the same time? The Department recommends 1 WAP to 17
devices to support 1-to-1 device use in schools;
The quality and condition of the WAP;
The construction materials of the school building.
As always, future growth requirements for wireless connectivity must be considered and any wireless
expansion design must comply with the Department’s best practice ICT Design Models for Schools.
9.2.5 VicSmart Network
The Victorian school system consists of over 1700 sites which are connected to the VicSmart WAN
(Wide Area Network), and each has its own LAN (Local Area Network).
VicSmart WAN connects schools to each other, central systems (business systems, learning systems)
and to the internet via the shared service eduSTAR.ISP.
9.2.6 eduSTAR.ISP - Internet Service
The school internet service (eduSTAR.ISP) provides all schools with filtered access to the internet. This
service is provided at no cost to schools.
The school internet service provides the following capabilities:

Safe and filtered access to the internet;
Hosting for school public websites;
Email services;
Management and administrative console.
Figure: VicSmart and eduSTAR.ISP Overview
142
9.2.7 Communication Room & Cabinets
The communication room should be in a central location for the school servers and switches that run
the school network. It has heat-producing machines that require it to be air conditioned to avoid
overheating. It is not a suitable location for a workplace. ICT staff should have a separate office with
remote access to administer the servers and switches. The room needs to be carefully designed to
allow for easy access to the rear and front of machines. The communications room should be a
dedicated room for ICT and associated equipment only. Designed growth space should be a
minimum of 40% of the original installation. The room should be secure and lockable and be
equipped with suitable air conditioning to cater for future growth.
9.3 Communication Services

In general, communication services in schools cover the following and will be installed complete in
new schools:
Data;
Voice (telephony); including VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol), if desired;
Security.
In existing schools, it is necessary to work with the existing systems so that major alterations are not
required, except in extraordinary situations.
Any new development involving communications must be registered with Telstra via the following
link to the Telstra Smart Community website:
http://www.telstra.com.au/smart-community/?red=/smartcommunity/.
9.3.1 Data
Data is the primary element that is transported around by cables in an ICT network. The form it is
used for is determined by the end device function, e.g. telephones mean voice, wireless access point
means a wireless signal, a wall data point is where a desktop can be plugged in. In essence, anything
to do with information sharing can use the data infrastructure. For example:
Student and Staff Internet and WAN access;
Video-conferencing;
Unified communications (voice/video/messaging), e.g. Skype and Lync;
CCTV and IP video surveillance;
Audio visual throughout the school;
Public address & emergency warning (see 9.6);
Clock-bell services (see 9.7);
Interactive whiteboards and panels;
Library automation;
Building car park access control;
Printers and copiers;
TV antenna (see 9.5).
Along with the flexibility of information sharing capabilities, cyber safety of those involved must be
considered.
143
9.3.2 Voice (Telephones)
A traditional system comprises copper wiring from Telstra. Older type wiring is known as PSDN and
is usually installed as a 3 pair service (this allows for 3 separate services to run off the wiring e.g. a
phone line, a data line and a fax. The phone lines terminate in the school at a PABX that allows a call
to be directed to a particular receiver. Newer types of supply are called ISDN and are made of
optical fibre which increases the capacity dramatically, with a choice of 10, 20 or 30 pairs and the
distribution is also via the PABX. ISDN is also able to support VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
where the voice cables are actually the same as data cables and can perform either function.
VoIP is a method whereby voice is distributed throughout the school via the Internet Protocol (IP)
using school data cabling and switching infrastructure. This allows telephones to be connected to
the phone system via any data point (subject to functional limits). It is therefore a much more
flexible method of distribution. Change management is simpler as a standard IT technician is able to
make changes rather than require a qualified telephone engineer. On the down side, the VoIP
phones are considerably more expensive and a local IPBX (IP Call Manager) is required to translate IP
voice traffic to a PABX gateway for external calls. The VicSmart WAN does not support VoIP traffic.
9.3.3 Security (Intruder Detection System)

An intruder alarm system which is to be monitored by the Department’s Security Services Unit (SSU)
shall be designed and installed in strict accordance with SSU guidelines using only SSU approved
contractors.
Advice and copies of the guidelines which are contained in the ‘Alarm System Installation &
Maintenance Specification’ along with a list of approved contractors is available by contacting:
Project Coordinator Alarm Installations & Maintenance.

Security Services Unit
Victorian School Building Authority | Infrastructure and Finance Services Group
Locked Bag 1, Black Rock VIC 3193
Phone: 24 hr 9589 6266 Fax: 9589 0296
ssu@edumail.vic.gov.au
For further information, consult the Security Services website:

(Note that this site requires an Edumail user ID and password for access.).
Assistance with specific questions may be gained from the school’s service provider or Optus Service
Desk - 1300 659 746.
9.4 Budget
The allocated budget covers the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the following
communication systems:
► A structured telecommunications cabling system (as defined above) for all areas of the school
including administration areas, teaching spaces, staff areas, classrooms and resource areas.
Components may include:
o network connections
144
o campus distributors
o campus cabling
o building distributors
o backbone cabling
o floor distributors
o horizontal cabling
o telecommunication outlets
o patch leads and fly leads;
► a minimum 15-year warranty on the structured cabling system;
► communications earth system;
► library automation systems;
► television distributed systems and associated infrastructure;
► audio and video systems and associated infrastructure;
► PA systems and associated infrastructure;
► sound systems and intercom systems for emergency purposes and associated infrastructure;
► emergency warning systems and associated infrastructure; and
► Infrastructure to support security systems such as intruder detection systems. The
installation of security systems must be included within this budget.
The Victorian School Building Authority has access to an ICT Cost Calculator to assist with costing all
ICT equipment covered in sections 9.1 to 9.4.
9.5 Television Distribution System

A system suitable for the reception and distribution of free-to-air (FTA) television should be
considered for new schools. The designer should seek confirmation with the school or Department
representative regarding the areas requiring television points.
9.6 Public Address System
A public address system shall be installed as “an inbuilt communication system used only for
emergency warnings purposes”, as defined in the Functional Statements, item DP9 (b), of the
Public address (PA) cabling is specific for this particular system.
The PA system comprises a public address amplifier and speakers. Cabling design is specific to this
type of system.
The public address amplifier shall feature:

250 watt amplifier minimum;
3 balanced microphone inputs;
2 auxiliary inputs;
145
record and slave input;

pre-announcement chime;
bell;
emergency alert and evacuation tones; and
monitor speaker.
Three types of microphone will be connected to the system. These are:

desk paging microphone;
cardioid microphone with a floor stand; and
radio microphone.
9.7 Clock-Bell Services

The provision of stand-alone clocks in schools is preferred, so no infrastructure is needed for
this service.
Bell services can be achieved by the public address service. Again, no separate infrastructure will be
needed if a public address service is selected.
9.8 As-built Documentation

Hard and soft copies of as-built documentation must be submitted in accordance with Section 8.2 of
the Standard Specification for Information Technology and Telecommunications Cabling.
Requirements include but are not limited to:

drawings showing as-installed details;
routes of cable runs;
routes of conduit runs;
rack frame layouts;
manufacturer’s warranty details;
manufacturer’s certification;
communications cabinet locations and numbering scheme;
full summary of test results for all cabling; and
intruder detection system details.
9.9 Hearing Augmentation

9.9.1 Accessible Buildings Program
The Department provides hearing augmentation systems on application only, through the Accessible
Buildings Program, to enable students, parents and teachers with hearing impairment to access
mainstream schools.
146
9.9.2 Hearing Augmentation in Existing School Buildings
In accordance with the requirements of the Disability Discrimination Act 1992, the Disability (Access
to Premises – Buildings) Standards 2010 and the Building Code of Australia, the following is a
complying proposal for hearing augmentation in Class 9b (school) Buildings.
Following application by the school through the Accessible Buildings Program, the Department will
provide a hearing augmentation system that caters for the needs of the hearing impaired student.
The solution may vary depending on the particular need of the student and the type of personal
hearing device the student is using.
Hearing augmentation systems shall be entirely distinct from the public address system (see 9.9
Public Address System). The Department will provide Building Surveyors written confirmation of the
function of inbuilt communication systems to allow for the certification of construction documents
and issuing of building permits.
9.9.3 Hearing Augmentation for Capital Works Projects
New school projects, and refurbishment projects where applicable, must install a Wireless FM
Transmitted hearing augmentation system in areas likely to be utilised for community use, including:
Gymnasiums
General Office / Administration Areas
Theatre / Lecture Rooms
9.9.4 Hearing Augmentation Signage
Signage as defined within the Building Code of Australia and AS1428.5-2010 must be installed as a
compliant solution when a hearing augmentation system is installed in a school.
147
Section 10:
Section 9 – Communication Services Site Works & School Landscaping
Wodonga South Primary School

Architect: Oaten Stanistreet
148
Section 10 – Site Works & School Landscaping
10. SITE WORKS & SCHOOL LANDSCAPING

10.1 Introduction
A well maintained, functional and aesthetic school site has a positive influence on student values,
behaviour and performance.
All aspects of site development, including landscaping, should be reflected in a school’s masterplan.
Landscaping should not be dealt with in isolation but form an integral part of the overall
development.
Every effort should be made to retain existing trees of use and importance. To achieve this, a proper
survey should be carried out of all significant trees and site features prior to any master planning.
The development of school grounds should be focused to satisfy goals in these major areas:
► provision of a safe, manageable, pleasant and ecologically responsible outdoor environment;
► provision of areas and facilities which meet outdoor curriculum requirements;
► provision of areas and facilities which meet outdoor play, assembly and physical education
requirements; and
► consideration of ecologically sustainable design (ESD) performance related to landscape
irrigation and water efficiency, transport design, cyclist facilities, and recycling storage areas.
It is important that school grounds are developed to meet these goals in a balanced and
comprehensive manner.
In the context of school facilities provision, site development comprises five distinct categories:
► roads, footpaths and hard courts;
► fencing;
► planted landscaped areas;
► covered ways; and
► site improvements.
The extent of site development will vary and the needs and priorities of new and existing schools will
clearly differ. For example, a new school project usually requires more site development than a
major facilities upgrade at an existing school.
During the design phase of the buildings and site, it is the responsibility of the principal consultant to
ensure that careful consideration is given to specific site development requirements, bearing in mind
the approved budget for this.
Post-occupancy evaluations (2005) noted that a lack of site investigation was found to have led to
issues ranging from stormwater drainage problems (many of which remained unresolved), asbestos
removal, rock removal and excavation, and fire service rectification.
Other important issues to be addressed during the planning of a site development scheme include:
149
► requirement for a complete site masterplan – incorporating, among other things, weather
protection and shading – at a scale not less than 1:100 and on an accurate survey base (this
is mandatory for new school projects, but may not be necessary for all facilities upgrade
proposals);
► current and proposed school/community funded improvements;
► functional and safe access around the site for pedestrian and vehicular traffic (this should
include traffic planning in relation to drop-off and pick-zones for students by cars and,
where relevant, buses, with separation of pedestrian and vehicle traffic);
► provision of parking for teachers, parents, visitors and deliveries;
► emergency access;
► maintenance and security (the ongoing cost of site maintenance can be minimised by
careful planning through all stages of design);
► direct routes to a full range of facilities (e.g. toilets, drinking fountains, canteen, hard court
areas, etc.);
► provision of non-slip path surfaces;
► passive recreational area requirements;
► active recreational area requirements;
► planting to stop erosion, mark boundaries, provide shade and shelter, channel pedestrian
traffic and provide visual screening (generally, planting should have regard to maintenance,
aesthetic and educational values); and
► provision of disabled access throughout the site, including car parking in accordance with
the Building Code of Australia.
All design, materials and construction shall comply with the Building Code of Australia and relevant
Australian Standards.
In terms of environmentally preferred materials, contact Sustainability Victoria:

http://www.ecorecycle.vic.gov.au/. (With respect to construction, demolition, refurbishment or
landscaping, waste minimisation planning can lead to a reduction of site waste and a more intensive
use of materials.)
Useful security hints and practical advice can also be obtained from the Department’s Security
Services webpage:
Details relating to landscaping must be addressed in the Design Development report.
150
10.2 Roads, Footpaths and Hardcourts
10.2.1 Vehicle Access Roads
Vehicle access roads provide functional and safe access onto the site. For safety reasons, they
should be separate from pedestrian access paths. On-site staff parking should be designed with
minimal site intrusion, and the extent of access roads should be minimised.
Consideration should be given to a single point of vehicle entry into each staff car parking area.
For economic reasons, delivery vehicle access is usually incorporated into the staff car park. Delivery
vehicles will require access as close as possible to areas such as administration, canteen and
technology. Direct access to these areas, however, is not mandatory and the trolleying of
equipment and goods over short distances is acceptable.
Access roads are usually constructed of heavy duty asphalt (recycled concrete aggregate and asphalt
may, where feasible, be specified) with associated kerb and channel. Speed traps, signage and
bollards should be considered in the interests of safety.
Carriageway dimensions and alignments should satisfy the relevant road authority standards. Refer to
the VicRoads website (http://www.vicroads.vic.gov.au/Home) for helpful information.
Consideration should also be given in the planning of site facilities to the access and circulation of
emergency vehicles such as ambulances and fire trucks, as per the relevant Australian Standards and
authority guidelines.
10.2.2 Parking Areas
There is no requirement for the Department to provide staff car parking. However, where site
conditions permit (and subject to the availability of funds), provision will be made in accordance with
the following long-term enrolments.
Enrolment Primary Secondary Special Special Special Special

School College Developmental Developmental Schools – Schools –
Car Car Schools – Schools – Car Enrolment Car Spaces
Spaces Spaces Enrolment Spaces
1-99 8 11 1-8 6 1-12 6
100-199 14 20 9-16 8 13-24 8
200-299 21 30 17-24 10 25-36 10
300-399 27 36 25-32 13 37-48 13
400-499 34 44 33-40 16 49-60 16
500-599 51 41-48 19 61-72 19
600-699 59 49-56 22 73-84 22
700-799 67 57-64 26 85-96 26
800-899 76 65-72 30 97-108 30
900-999 84 73-80 34 109-120 34
1,000-1099 92 81-88 38 121-132 38
1,100-1199 100 89-96 42 133-144 42
97-104 44 145-155 44
105-112 46
113-120 48
151
Considerations which may influence the location of staff car parks include:
► access for staff from car park to buildings; and
► access to physical education facilities (these can be shared with the community during after
hours).
A minimum of one parking bay should be provided for the disabled as part of the entitlement as
specified in the Building Code of Australia.
Provision of all parking – including dimensions and layout – shall conform with the Building Code of
Australia.
Staff car parks should be constructed of heavy duty asphalt with kerb and channel, line-marking and kerb
ramps that accord with the Building Code of Australia.
10.2.3 Provision of Bus Parking for Specialist and Special Development Schools
On-site bus parking facilities are provided to specialist and special development schools to allow for
the alighting of students within school grounds.
Bus parking facilities, including turning circle allowances, must be designed for the range of bus sizes
operated by schools, up to and including 57-seat school buses.
The following table lists the dimensions of a 57-seat school bus.
Overall Length 12250 mm

Overall Width 2480 mm
Overall Height 3580 mm
Wheelbase 6050 mm
Wheel Track Front 2108 mm
Wheel Track Rear 1854 mm
Minimum Lift-off Clearance 200 mm
Approach Angle (O) 8.3
Departure Angle (O) 7.5
Front Overhang 2720 mm
Rear Overhang 3480 mm
Min. Turning Diameter 24000 mm
Access to drop-off areas must be suitable for people with disabilities, in accordance with current
Australian Standards.
Consideration should be given to the provision of access equipment such as wheelchair lifts.
10.2.4 Waste Disposal
A waste disposal facility is usually incorporated adjacent to the car parking area and sited as close as
possible to the street boundary. This is necessary for safety reasons and limiting the intrusion of
152
pick-up trucks onto the site. The waste disposal bay should be constructed of high strength concrete.
Suitable screening should be considered around the waste disposal facility.
Access to waste disposal bins should take into consideration:

► the provision of an adequate space for large vehicles to enter and manoeuvre; and
► a pavement design which is sufficient to support large vehicles and withstand the “tyre
scrubbing” forces arising from vehicle manoeuvres.
Operational wastes are those generated once a facility is in use. These include food wastes,
beverage containers, paper, cardboard and other packaging materials. Effective design should
ensure that classrooms, staffrooms, canteens, libraries etc. have areas allocated where waste and
recycling bins are placed. The waste disposal facility (from which waste and recyclables are
collected) should be of a size to accommodate and store these materials prior to pick-up. The facility
should also take into account the size of collection vehicles and methods of collection (e.g. lift
mechanism, etc.).
The disposal facility should conform with AS 2890 in terms of size and vehicle movement requirements.
10.2.5 Pedestrian Paths
A path network is required to provide a safe, functional and direct means of access to and around
school buildings. Access is required from the car park to buildings for staff, visitors and deliveries.
Such paths must also be suitable for people with disabilities in accordance with current Australian
Standards. Access for people with disabilities is not required to every door of every building but,
rather, to each separate functional area within the school. However, where possible and reasonable,
access should be provided to every door of every building.
Paths, including steps and ramps, must be designed to avoid trip and slip hazards. Paths are
generally hard-paved or made of slip-resistant surfaces such as concrete on a crushed-rock base. The
use of slip-resistant materials and detailing is an important occupational health and safety (OH&S)
consideration.
Surfaces such as gravel and granitic sand are not acceptable due to associated maintenance
problems. Permeable surfaces such as rubber, no fines concrete and other surface treatments may
be considered, subject to budget and applicability. Recycled concrete aggregate and asphalt may,
where feasible, be specified for pedestrian paths. If light pedestrian activity is expected, then asphalt
may be used.
Path widths should suit their anticipated usage and, in general, be a minimum of 1500mm wide and
in accordance with AS 1428.
Footpaths should be wide enough at building entrances to provide sufficient paved area for students
waiting to enter, especially if external access to classrooms is employed.
Path gradients, steps and surfaces should accord with the Building Code of Australia. Some paths
may require handrails. Landings of ramps and steps must be provided with tactile ground surface
indicators (TGSI). Steps must also be provided with contrasting strip at tread nosings in accordance
with the Building Code of Australia.
153
Paths with gradients greater than 1:14 must be provided with handrails in accordance with AS
1428.1. Paths with gradients greater than 1:20 might also require them (see AS 1428.1).
10.2.6 Hardcourts
New Primary Schools
One double hard court is to be provided as well as a paved area equivalent in size to a single
hard court.
The hard courts are regarded as an important physical education facility and should therefore be
sited in close proximity to the gymnasium and outdoor grassed playing area.
The paved area should be conveniently located for school assembly purposes.
New Secondary Colleges
Two double hard courts are to be provided.
Hard Court Construction
Hard courts should be constructed of light duty asphalt (recycled concrete aggregate and asphalt
may, where feasible, be specified). Refer to AS 3727–1993, Table 4, Light Traffic for a recommended
minimum standard of construction.
Ensure that an effective and durable edge restraint is provided, extending for the full depth of the
pavement including base course. A standard municipal flush kerb is recommended.
Hard Court Marking
Hard courts are usually marked in accordance with Sport and Recreation Victoria (Department of
Victorian Communities) guidelines for basketball, netball and volleyball. The courts should be
marked in a north/south orientation.
Hard Court Fittings
Basketball and netball fittings should be provided as required, and sleeves should be supplied for
any other games posts.
10.2.7 Paved Areas
Asphalt Concrete
Asphalt surfaces shall be heavy duty with appropriate base course material placement and finishing
to conform with AS 3727-1993 and the Australian Asphalt Pavement Association guidelines.
Concrete Pavement
Concrete pavements shall be a maximum depth of 150mm with appropriate reinforcement and base
course material. Designs shall conform with Cement Concrete & Aggregates Australia guidelines and
AS 3727-1993 and AS3600.
154
Segmental Pavers
Segmental pavers shall be heavy duty with appropriate base course material. Placement and
finishing to conform to manufacturer’s specification and AS 3727-1993.
Pavement Ancillaries
All pavements should have appropriate concrete edge restraints such as kerb and channel or edge
strip. Appropriate agricultural drainage pipes should be used to avoid pavement failure due to water
infiltration.
10.3 Play Equipment

Well-designed play equipment potentially caters for large groups of students while providing a wide
range of activities. Students have diverse interests and will want to use a variety of equipment to play
in different ways at different times.
10.3.1 Playground Equipment
Only approved playground equipment may be erected in school grounds. In general, approved
equipment includes:
► sandpits;
► slides;
► horizontal and vertical ladders;
► horizontal bars;
► gymnastic combinations;
► jungle combinations;
► climbing nets and frames; and
► climbing ropes (fixed).
All equipment design and installation should conform to AS 4685.1, AS 4685.2, AS 4685.3, AS 4685.4,
AS 4685.5, AS 4685.6, AS/NZS 4486.1 and AS/NZS 4422.
The following items are not approved for use in schools:

► seesaws;
► swings (including log swings);
► maypoles;
► merry-go-rounds;
► roundabouts; and
► flying foxes.
All apparatus must be fixed unless specifically designed to be portable. Concrete footings should be
set with the tops of the footings at least 200mm below ground level and backfilled.
155
Under-surfacing to an average compacted depth of 250mm should be provided and maintained in a

loose condition.
In general, playground equipment should not be more than 4 metres above ground level, with a fall
height of no more than 3 metres. The equipment must be at least 2.5 metres away from any fences,
buildings or other similar objects. There should be at least 2.5 metres between items of equipment.
Written confirmation that the playground equipment and its installation meet the requirements of
the Australian Standards should be provided by the supplier.
A well designed playground will incorporate equipment which is accessible to all students and
encourage participation of students. The choice of the playground equipment need to be of a
universal design and promotes an inclusive environment for all students.
All playground equipment should be inspected weekly and repairs and maintenance carried out
immediately. Particular attention needs to be given to the under-surfacing beneath the playground
equipment.
Information and advice is available from the Play Australia: http://www.playaustralia.org.au/.
Guidelines for School Playgrounds: Playground Safety Management (2012) are also available in the
Principal Consultants section of the Victorian School Building Authority eduGate page
(https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/sc/sites/Infonline/default.aspx). (Note: this requires an Edumail
user ID and password for access.)
10.3.2 Fitness Equipment
One of the ways schools can promote an active lifestyle amongst their students is through the
installation and utilisation of fitness equipment. This equipment can provide an interactive and
engaging experience for students whilst contributing to the achievement of school curriculum.
As with play equipment, it is important that fitness tracks or circuits and their associated equipment
are designed by qualified designers. This is to ensure that due consideration is given to providing an
appropriate balance between both physical challenge and safety requirements.
Heights and dimensions of the fitness equipment stations must be carefully chosen to suit both the
size and age of intended users. Consideration should also be given to the likelihood of the
equipment being used by other age groups in non-supervised situations. Schools should ensure that
any equipment is purchased for a qualified manufacturer.
The fitness equipment should contain a range of exercise functions using installations suited to
outdoor exposure, including:
► low height balance beams;
► chin-up bars;
► stretch bars;
► push-up and sit-up benches;
► push-up frames; and
► outdoor cross-trainers.
156
Signage must be provided at the start of the circuit and at each location identifying the equipment
provided, the exercise options available, and suggested exercise repetition sequences.
Before installing any fitness equipment, the school must consider appropriate public liability
insurance coverage against personal injury or property damage that a third party must suffer.
To ensure that the fitness equipment is kept in a good condition, regular maintenance, servicing and
repair of equipment must be provided to ensure that it is of good operational standard and
consistent with any relevant equipment manual.
10.4 Fencing
10.4.1 Standard Perimeter Fencing
A perimeter fence to enclose or define the extent of the site should be provided to a minimum
height of 1200mm.
Fencing along street frontages should be palisade and may exceed the 1200mm minimum as
appropriate. Chain mesh fencing should not be used.
Any adjoining party fencing requirements will need to be investigated by the principal consultant.
10.4.2 Security Fencing
As a general rule, the Department does not provide security fencing in Victorian Government
schools. However, provision of a 2100mm high security fence should be considered where local
conditions require additional security to minimise casual and opportunistic access and vandalism.
Depending on the local circumstances, such fences can not only keep students inside the grounds
but can also prevent access to the grounds by unwanted visitors.
The recommended type is palisade fencing, 2100mm high and with vertical bars.
Different levels of security may be considered appropriate for different facilities. Classrooms benefit
from a high degree of protection, particularly if the design has lockers located under external
verandas. Other areas may still need to be fenced, but to a lesser standard.
Security against unauthorised access can also be achieved through environmental design using
landscaping features such as planter boxes and changes in levels.
Careful consideration must be given to gates so that latches and controls are operable by people
with disabilities but without compromising security.
10.4.3 Pool Fencing
Pool fencing (conforming to AS 1926.1, Swimming Pool Safety – Part 1 Safety Barriers for Swimming
Pools) must be provided for all swimming pool areas.
Careful consideration must be given to gates so that latches and controls are operable by people
with disabilities but without compromising security.
157
10.5 Landscaping
10.5.1 Sports Playing Field
The available stripped top soil resulting from building works should be utilised and spread to assist in
creation of flat playing areas. Assessments of the fill required compared with the yield of top soil
available from the building site, plus any additional material required, should be undertaken at the
commencement of the planning process to define what is practical for the site.
The Department is aware of developers and commercial companies approaching schools to supply
fill (soil) from other sites, such as new housing estate developments. School Councils are not
authorised to enter into agreements to accept fill without Ministerial approval. School Councils
interested in entering into such agreements must contact the Victorian School Building Authority.
All playing surfaces need to be drained with falls across the playing surface and adequate sub-
surface drainage. At least two quick-coupling valves should be provided within the playing areas.
All grass mixes should be drought tolerant, with a minimum of flowering species (such as clover) to
minimise the attraction of bees.
New Primary Schools
A flat, well drained, grassed open playing area should be provided subject to the dictates of
topography and available space (nominal field/oval dimensions of 110 x 90 metres).
New Secondary Schools
A flat, well drained, grassed open playing area should be provided (nominal field/oval dimensions of
165 x 135 metres).
10.5.2 Irrigation Systems
Appropriate water reticulation should be provided to enable grassed areas to be maintained. Quick-
coupling valves should be provided in a suitable layout.
The installation of an irrigation system alone may not achieve the best results in water conservation.
Systems should be carefully chosen using expert advice where appropriate. An ongoing irrigation
management plan is recommended to prevent “over irrigation”. A good example of best practice is
the document Efficient Irrigation: A Reference Manual available from the South East Water website:
http://southeastwater.com.au/SiteCollectionDocuments/Business/Local-
government/Attachment6EfficientIrrigationForTurfAndLandscape.pdf . The South East Water
website’s “Irrigation Calculator” is of further assistance.
Water Restrictions
The design of planted areas needs to assess the availability of mains water supply under prevailing
water restrictions operating in the school location, and also any likely changes in the situation.
158
Use of harvested rainwater may be possible, assuming this is not already being utilised for the
flushing of toilets. Other sources, such as bore water, are also likely to be restricted in times of water
shortage.
10.5.3 General Grassed Area
All areas of the site not required for other purposes will be converted to general grassed areas.
Trees may be planted through these areas to provide future shade.
Refer Section 10.8 – Landscape Cultivation and Planting Guidelines, for planting information.
10.5.4 Garden Beds
Provide a minimum 150m2 of “ground level” mulched garden beds to match existing grades and site
contours, where possible, and service these with fixed water spray systems. The use of a dripper
system should be explored in lieu of expensive pop-up sprays. Fixed spray heads should be avoided
due to vandalism. Garden beds should be located in less heavily trafficked areas.
Composts and mulches can reduce water consumption and eliminate weed problems, thereby
reducing maintenance costs. Composts and mulches made to standards AS 4454 (composts, soil
conditioners and mulches), AS 3743 (potting mixes) and AS 4419 (soils for landscaping and gardens)
should be employed in landscaping applications where feasible to do so.
Refer Section 10.8 – Landscape Cultivation and Planting Guidelines, for planting information.
10.5.5 Shade Areas
Due to Australia’s high skin cancer rates, sun protection is an important health and safety issue that
schools need to address. Providing well-designed shade at the school will help protect students and
staff from the sun’s harmful UV rays.
Effective shade provides shelter from the sun’s UV radiation at the right time of day and at the right
time of year. Shade alone can reduce overall exposure to the sun’s ultraviolet (UV) rays by about
75%.
Shade should be designed to offer the greatest protection during peak UV radiation times and usage
periods. In Victoria, UV Index levels are highest from September to April. About 60% of daily UV
radiation reaches the earth’s surface during the middle of the day. Therefore, sites with high usage
at that time have a higher priority for shade.
When planning for shade, refer to the SunSmart Shade Guidelines available from the SunSmart
website: http://www.sunsmart.com.au/downloads/resources/brochures/shade-guidelines.pdf .
When planning school grounds, consideration should be given to developing shade areas
appropriate for student use. SunSmart recommends that shade audits be conducted to:
► establish usage patterns at the site;
► determine the daily/seasonal movements of the sun;
► assess the quantity and usability of existing shade;
159
► assess the need for additional shade; and

► provide recommendations concerning additional shade (if required).
The best types of shade have extensive overhead or side cover, and are away from highly reflective
surfaces. The shaded area should also be an inviting space so that students will want to use it.
When planning school grounds, consideration should be given to developing appropriate shade
areas for student use. This can be done in a variety of ways.
Natural Shade
Natural shade should be a major element of shade provision within a school. Trees with dense
foliage and wide spreading canopies provide the best protection.
Where possible, preserve all existing and suitable shade trees on site. Optimise the use of this
existing shade by, for example, removing low branches so that students can play underneath.
For the longer term, locate shade planting in areas where students tend to gather, such as lunch and
passive playground areas. The “shade tree chart” on page 19 of Shade for Everyone provides
information to help select trees appropriate to the site. Plant groups of trees in clusters to increase
the overall size of the canopy and therefore increase protection.
Built Shade
As trees can take years to grow, it is recommended that built shade be constructed in the shorter
term. Note that shade sail structures require building permits and engineering certification.
Shade structures must be made in accordance with Building Code of Australia and Australian
Standards. Any shade structure in fixed play equipment areas should be designed with reference to
AS/NZS 4486.1:1997. The UPF (ultraviolet protection factor) rating system for shade fabric is
presented in AS/NZS 4399:1996. SunSmart recommends that shade fabrics have a UPF of 15 or
higher. These offer 90% protection from UV radiation. The shade area should be of sufficient height
(three metres minimum) to make it light and airy and a welcoming space to use.
Safety is a major consideration when designing built shade:

► Columns and posts should be clearly visible, with rounded edges and/or padding, and
located to minimise intrusion into play and circulation areas.
► Cables and guy ropes should be avoided where possible. If required, locate them in garden
areas and provide marking and padded protection.
► Vertical barriers at the sides of the shade structure should be designed to prevent climbing.
Design shade structures to reduce indirect UV radiation. Modify or select surfaces to reduce
reflected UV radiation, for example, replace smooth concrete with brick, grass or tanbark. Vertical
surfaces such as walls should also be made of materials that reduce reflected UV radiation (for
example, brick).
160
10.5.6 Landscaping in Bushfire Prone Areas
Bushfires are a natural and challenging feature of the Victorian landscape. Well planned and
managed vegetation can provide many benefits in bushfire-prone areas. It can:
► reduce fire intensity;
► reduce wind speed;
► deflect and filter embers (small particles of burning material and other burning debris); and
► provide shelter from radiant heat.
The school’s site plan can be used to develop a plan which incorporates planting and landscaping. All
external features on site need to be considered, for example, overhead wires, existing trees and
shrubs, hard areas, service areas, paths and roadways, playgrounds and sports fields.
For more comprehensive information, refer to the Department’s Landscaping Guidelines for Bushfire
Prone Areas. Also see Section 10.8 – Landscape Cultivation and Planting Guidelines.
10.6 Covered Ways

Covered ways link both permanent and relocatable facilities.
In general, the covered way is a simple structure that comprises a galvanised frame with metal roof
decking. Roofing and guttering shall be provided in accordance with Section 6.4 – Roof.
In the case of new school developments, covered ways should be provided to link relocatable units
with permanent buildings. It is normal practice for relocatable buildings to be sited in cluster
arrangements along a central covered way access spine. Take-offs from the central covered way are
to be provided at entrance points.
Covered ways may also be considered as a means of providing undercover external access around
and between permanent buildings. They can also provide useful shade to buildings and windows.
This should be addressed by the principal consultant as part of the building design process.
10.7 Improvements (new schools) – Landscape Finishes
10.7.1 Seating
Formal outdoor seating (100mm length per student and an overall school minimum of 20 metres)
shall be provided. Seating configurations should take into account prospect/vista, shade, age group,
gender and their benefit in terms of social development and interaction.
10.7.2 Litter Bins
Outdoor litter bins (one for every 30 students and a school minimum of one) shall be provided.
10.7.3 Flagpole
One flagpole, with all the attachments needed to raise a flag, shall be provided.
161
Security may be advisable to avoid unauthorised use.
10.7.4 External Signage
A system of external signs listing different parts of the school and clearly directing people to their
intended location should be provided. It is of particular importance that signs at the entry to the site
clearly direct visitors to the school office.
Signs are important for both delivery and periodic maintenance, and should be vandal proof,
informative, accurate and visually interesting. Signs are labels which establish a tone and, as such,
are key to many first and lasting impressions.
Signage must comply with the Disability (Access to Premises – Buildings) Standards 2009 and the
Wayfinding (referring to the ways in which people orient themselves and navigate from place to
place) for all is required.
10.8 Landscape Cultivation and Planting Guidelines

The development of school grounds and cultivation of school gardens has important practical and
aesthetic benefits.
Deciduous trees to the north (or evergreens set back a distance twice their height), and evergreens
to the east and west can block summer morning and evening sun if external blinds are not provided.
The maintenance costs of deciduous trees should be considered.
10.8.1 General Planting Hints

► Approximate planting distances:
o Plants of up to one metre (300mm to 600mm apart);
o Plants from one to two metres (one metre apart); and
o Plants from two to two and a half metres (one and a half to two metres apart).
This allows for the usual 30% death rate.
► Plant eucalypts and other large trees within a suitable distance from buildings and
sewerage. This ranges from two to six metres, depending on the size of the tree. The
distance from the tree to any building should be at least the anticipated height of the mature
tree.
► Trees in clumps look more natural if planted in uneven numbers. Vegetation groupings
should create significant places and gestures within school grounds.
► Plant several clumps of one particular type. For instance, five clumps of different species of
acacias, melaleucas or eucalypts would emphasise the diversity of plants within each genus;
while flowering times, fragrance, texture and leaf shape are some of the variables within
each genus. A suitable area for such planting would be an unused corner at the edge of an
oval or playground.
162
► Avoid planting trees under the eaves of classrooms or planting tall shrubs in front of
windows. Judicious planting, however, can shade some windows and provide a cooling
effect. Deciduous trees offer shade in summer and let in the light during winter.
► Plant shade trees near car parks. Avoid limb droppers and troublesome root systems – Refer to
Section 10.8.3 for a list of plants to avoid.
► Avoid planting trees with large seed pods, such as Eucalyptus ficifolia, near hard-paved
areas. Children can slip on these pods.
► Avoid thorny, poisonous or fruit bearing plants. Refer to Section 10.8.3 for a list of plants to
avoid.
► Before planting native trees, attempt to find out which trees and plants are indigenous to
the area. Such plants have a high success rate and are valuable in terms of local ecology.
► Plant shrubbery areas thickly so that weeds won’t survive.
► In general, shrubs will grow as wide as they are high, and for this reason “one metre”
garden beds are not useful planting areas.
► Small or established trees:
o for native trees, results are better with small trees, particularly in hard soils; and
o in areas of high traffic, established trees are suggested.
10.8.2 Vegetation Fuel Management
Combustible material is a major factor influencing the intensity and spread of bushfires. When
developing a landscaping plan, consideration should be given to fuel management. Consider the
following strategies:
► if planting close to buildings, choose native or exotic grass species that remain green
throughout summer;
► less flammable ground cover plants can reduce the travel speed of fire;
► avoid plants that produce fine fuel which is easily ignited (fine fuel includes tree and shrub
litter, leaves, twigs, bark strips, mulches, ferns, low plants, grass, decaying material and
debris on the ground);
► do not plant trees that are particularly combustible, for example, trees with ribbon bark,
open crown, fine leaves or high oil content;
► create breaks between fuels along the ground – plant islands, rather than continuous runs of
vegetation;
► form breaks between fuels vertically – plant in such a way that fuels cannot form a
continuous or linked ladder from ground-level grasses to bushes, and from understorey to
tree tops;
► consider the position and nature of existing trees; make sure that new planting will not
create a fuel ladder with these trees;
► if planting to provide shade, choose species with dense foliage and spreading canopies;
► as a general rule, plants which grow to a height greater than four metres should not be
closer than ten metres from any structure; and
163
► look at descriptions and plant dimensions when selecting plants, but also observe how
particular plants grow in your area. (Refer Section 10.8.4 – Particular Plants – Bushfire Prone
Areas)
For further information, refer to the Department’s Landscaping Guidelines for Bushfire Prone Areas.
10.8.3 Particular Plants – General Characteristics and Information
Quick Growing Native Trees

Eucalyptus globulus – Tasmania Blue Gum
Eucalyptus leucoxylon rosea – Red Flowered Yellow Gum
Eucalyptus nicholii – Willow Leafed Peppermint
Eucalyptus saligna – Sydney Blue Gum
Eucalyptus torquata – Coral Gum
Quicker Growing Deciduous Trees

Acer negundo – Box Elder
Alnus incana – Grey Alder
Fraxinus raywoodii – Claret Ash
Quercus cerris – Turkey Oak
Hardy Native Shrubs – Large

Acacia cultriformis – Knife-edge Wattle
Acacia floribunda – Catkin Acacia
Acacia iteaphylla – Gawler Range Wattle
Acacia longifolia – Sallow Wattle
Acacia pravissima – Ovens Wattle
Acacia stricta – Hop Wattle
Acacia verniciflua – Varnish Wattle
Callistemon citrinus – Lemon Scented Bottlebrush
Callistemon linariifolius – Narrow Leaf Bottlebrush
Callistemon salignus – Pink Tips Bottlebrush
Callistemon viminalis – Weeping Bottlebrush
Casuarina nana
Grevillea rosmarinifolia – Rosemary Grevillea
Grevillea “Clearview David”
Grevillea “Pink Pearl”
Grevillea glabrata
164
Grevillea poorinda hybrids

Hakea laurina – Pin Cushion Hakea
Hakea saligna – Willow Hakea
Hakea suaveolens – Sweet-scented Hakea
Leptospermum lanigerum – Woolly Tea-tree
Leptospermum petersenii – Lemon-scented Tea-tree
Melaleuca armillaris – Bracelet Myrtle
Melaleuca decussata – Cross Leaf Honey Myrtle
Melaleuca diosmifolia
Hardy Native Shrubs – Small-Medium

Acacia conferta – Golden Top
Acacia drummondii – Drummonds Wattle
Anigozanthos flavida – Kangaroo Paw
Astartea fascicularis
Callistemon pinifolius – Green Bottlebrush
Calocephalus brownii – Cushion Bush
Grevillea “Crosbie Morrison”
Grevillea dimorpha
Grevillea juniperina
Grevillea lavandulacea
Leptospermum flavescens – Tantoon
Leptospermum scoparium – Manuka
Melaleuca hypericifolia – Red Honey Myrtle
Melaleuca incaca – Grey Honey Myrtle
Rhagodia hastata – Salt Bush
Thryptomene paynei
Thicket Planting
Acacia mearnsii – Black Wattle
Acacia melanoxylon – Black Wood
Plants to Avoid (Harmful to Humans)

Hedera helix – English Ivy
Kalmia latifolia – Kalmia
Laburnum species – Golden Rain Tree
165
Lantana species – Lantana

Ligustrum vulgare – Common Privet
Melia azedarach – White Cedar
Myoporum insulare – Boobialla
Nerium species – Oleander
Prunus laurocerasus – Cherry Laurel
Wisteria sinensis – Wisteria
Plants to Avoid (“Limb Droppers”)

Eucalyptus botryoides – Mahogany Gum
Eucalyptus camaldulensis – River Red Gum
Eucalyptus cladocalyx – Sugar Gum
Eucalyptus mannifera – White Brittle Gum
Eucalyptus viminalis – Manna Gum (Ribbon Gum)
Trees with Troublesome Root Systems

Fraxinus species – some Ashes
Populus species – Poplars
Salix babylonica – Weeping Willow
Ulmus procera – English Elm
10.8.4 Particular Plants – Bushfire Prone Areas
The following shrubs and trees are recommended in bushfire prone areas.
Shrubs
Acacia boormanii – Snowy River Wattle
Acacia flexifolia – Bent-Leaf Wattle
Acacia glandulicarpa – Hairy-pod Wattle
Acacia myrtifolia – Myrtle Wattle
Acacia vestita – Hairy Wattle
Agonis juniperina – Juniper Myrtle
Atriplex nummularia – Old Man Saltbush
Banksia marginata – Silver Banksia
Buxus sempervirens – English Box
Chaenomales japonica – Japonica
Correa alba – Coastal Correa
Duranta plumieri – Sky Flower
166
Dais cotinifolia – Pompom tree

Erythrina crlsta-galli – Coral Tree
Escallonia macrantha – Escallonia
Eupomatia laurina – Bolwarra (Copper Laurel)
Hebe spp. – Veronica
Lagerstroemia indica – Crepe Myrtle
Lonicera nitida – Box-Leaf Honey Suckle
Myoporum Insulare – Boobialla
Myoporum montanum – Waterbush
Myrtus pendunculata – Myrtle
Osmanthus heterophyllus – Osmanthus
Photinia glabra – “Rubens’ Chinese Firebush
Photinia glabra – “Robusta” Chinese Firebush
Pieris japonica – Japanese Pearl Flower
Rhagodia parabolica – Saltbush
Rhapilolepis delacouri – Indian Hawthorn
Rhododendron spp. – Rhododendron
Telopea oreades – Victorian Waratah
Telopea truncata – Tasmanian Waratah
Westringia fruticosa – Native Rosemary
Westringia glabra – Violet Westringia
Azaleas, Camellias and Rhododendrons
These plants do have fire resistant qualities and should, if possible, be retained where they currently
exist. (It should be noted that some varieties have poisonous leaves and others can cause
dermatitis.)
^ Avoid Rhododendron ponticum which is an invasive species.
Trees name Average height

Acacia Melanoxylon – Blackwood
Acer campestre – Common Maple
Acer platanoides – Norway Maple
Aesculus carnea – Pink Flowered Chestnut
Alnus glutinosa – Common Alder
Alnus jorullensis – Evergreen Alder
Buckinghamia celsissima – Ivory Curl Flower
167
Calodendron capense – Cape Chestnut

Casuarina cunninghamiana – River She-Oak
Ceratonia siliqua – Carob
Ceratopetalum apetalum – Coachwood
Elaeocarpus reticulatus – Blue Oliveberry
Eucalyptus gummifera – BIoodwood
Eucalyptus maculata – Spotted Gum
Eucryphia moorei – Leatherwood
Gordonia axillaris – Cordonia
Griselina littoralis – N.Z. Broadleaf
Lagunaria patersonii – Pyramid Tree
Lagerstroemia indica – Crepe Myrtle
Laurus nobilis – Laurel (Sweet Bay)
Liriodendron tulipifera – Tulip Tree
Metrosideros excelsa – N.Z. Xmas Tree
Nothofagus cunninghamii – Myrtle Beech
Oreocallis wickhamii (syn.Embothrium w.) – Tree Waratah
Photinia serrulata – Chinese Hawthorn
Platanus acerifolia – London Plane Tree
Populus simenii – Simons Poplar
Quercus canariensis – Algerian Oak
Quercus cerris – Turkey Oak
Quercus suber – Cork Oak
Quercus virginiana – Live Oak
Stenocarpus sinuatus – Firewheel Tree
Syzygium coolminianum – Lilly Pilly
Syzygium floribundum – Weeping Lilly Pilly
Tilla vulgaris – Linden
Tristania conferta – Brisbane Brush Box
Tristania laurina – Kanooka
Ulmus glabra – Scotch Elm
Ulmus parvifolia – Chinese Elm
Ulmus pumila – Siberian Elm
Zelkova carpinifolia – European Zelkova
168
Section 11:
For further information, refer to the Department’s Landscaping Workplace Health
Guidelines for & Safety
Bushfire Prone Areas.
See also Australian Plants for Fire Prone Areas (1994), http://anpsa.org.au/fire.html.
Brighton Secondary College

Architect: Hayball
169
Section 11 – Workplace Health & Safety
11. WORKPLACE HEALTH & SAFETY

11.1 Safety in Design
The issues noted in this section require consideration during all phases of the project. Note that
legislation places requirements on designers, owners and management of all workplaces.
The PREP Design Development Report must show that the design complies with Section 28 of the
Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004. An acceptable approach is for the principal consultant and
school to review potential risks involved in the project design, and to provide either solutions to
eliminate the risk or a means of control for each risk, so far as is reasonably practicable.
A basic reference is the WorkSafe Victoria publication, A handbook for workplaces – OH&S in schools
– A practical guide for school leaders. A particularly useful section is “Addressing Key Risks in
Schools” (page 12) which provides a list of risks and examples of control measures.
While legislation in Victoria does not yet extend to design for safe construction, consideration of the
way in which the building needs to be constructed, and elimination or amendment of design
features which are difficult to build, will yield benefits in the areas of cost and time control.
11.2 Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004

This Victorian legislation places an obligation on owners and designers of buildings and employers to
ensure that all persons employed (including contractors) in or on their premises are provided with
safe workplace conditions.
Reference needs to be made to the Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2007 for such
matters as prevention of falls, hazardous substances (including asbestos), and hazardous industries –
construction.
The implications of the Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004 apply generally across all
kinds of building projects and the built environment and are not unique to schools. An obvious area
of hazard is access to roofs (see Section 4.04).
Under Department Circular S434–2007 Occupational Health and Safety Act – Duties of Designers,
principal consultants are required to comply with Sections 27 and 28 of the Victorian Occupational
Health and Safety Act 2004. In consultation with the school, consultants must develop a list of
potential risks associated with the identified workplace and user activities. Schematic design and
design development reports are to be accompanied by a statement from the school that it has
considered the design from an OH&S perspective and is satisfied that it provides a workplace that
will be safe and without risk to health.
11.3 A Handbook for Workplaces – OH&S in Schools – A Practical

Guide for School Leaders
This WorkSafe Victoria reference should be consulted as part of the process in the design of school
projects. A summary of selected items is provided here for reference:
170
Reference Comment Action

Roles of School Liaising with building designers Design to provide a safe environment.
leadership – p.6 to ensure that new buildings and
renovations and alterations to
existing buildings are designed
to provide a safe environment
(i.e. eliminating risks through
good design).
Risk – p.14 Likelihood of injury from Control by provision of adequate storage
handling heavy equipment. for heavy items at heights between knee
and shoulder level.
Risk – p.14 Likelihood of injury from Control by pulley systems, accessible

hanging objects/displays at a display boards within staff member’s arm
height. reach.
Risk – p.14 Likelihood of injury from Control by workplace design locating

computer based tasks of long printers at a distance from desks.
duration.
Risk – p.15 Likelihood of injury from Control by designing storage areas to
hazardous ways of handling and reduce turns and distances that need to be
accessing materials in crossed, provide for use of trolleys, provide
classrooms, etc. adequate storage.
Risk – p.18 Injuries resulting from slips, trips Eliminate risks through good design.
and falls from:
Flooring – slip-resistant, changes of level
• uneven ground highlighted.
• wet/slippery floors Stairs – high visibility, correct handrails,
suitable covering re maintenance.
• trip hazards.
Roofs – devise means of retrieving balls.
Environment – glare off shiny surfaces, dim
light, floors wet by rain or condensation,
spill resistance.
171
Reference Comment Action

Risk – p.19 Slip and trip, and falls, and Slip-resistant surfaces.
impact injury at stairs and steps.
Slip-resistant steps at nosings of treads.
Luminance and colour-contrasting strips at
nosings of treads (incorporating slip
resistivity).
Eliminate isolated low steps.
Sturdy hand rails (Ref AS 1428.1).
TGSs on landings and around stairways that
are open underneath.
Consideration should be given to installing
photo-luminescent strips at tread nosings
and elsewhere in stairways and egress
routes.
Risk – p.19 Slips in general environment. Slip-resistant surfaces.

No areas where water or grease can
accumulate.
Slip-resistant strips.
Mats at entries recessed or with tapered
edges (refer the Building Code of Australia).
Avoidance of trailing power leads.
Risk – p.19 Trips in general environment. Secure floor coverings and entry mats.
Avoid low level obstacles.
Provide suitable places for bikes.
Provide storage for personal items.
Risk – p.19 Falls from roofs. Pitch roof so that balls fall back to ground
level.
Designate staff members to retrieve balls
using suitable equipment such as extended-
handle ball retrievers.
Provide guards to skylights or use impact
resistant materials to prevent falls through
skylights.
Risk – p.20 Health and safety of contractors. Provide safe access to enable maintenance
to plant on roofs, repairs to roofs, cleaning
gutters (See Clause 4.4.2.1.8 Safe Access to
Roofs).
172
11.4 Sub-floor Spaces

Sub-floor spaces must be closed off from access by children.
The 2005 post-occupancy evaluation reported a school built on a sloping site where floors had been
designed as suspended timber floors to minimise costs and excavation. The sub-floor spaces were
high enough for children to enter and had not been closed off as part of the design, creating an area
where children were unsupervised and at risk of injury.
11.5 Hazardous Materials and Conditions

The school’s Occupational Health and Safety Representative should (before the commencement of
any demolition, refurbishment or maintenance works) ensure that the builder/contractor arranges
an examination of the building structure, equipment, fittings and all parts of the site by a competent
specialist to determine, as far as practicable, the presence of noxious, toxic or explosive materials or
conditions hazardous to the health of the school community or public if disturbed.
The nature and location of each hazard shall be recorded by the builder/contractor, and both the
record and the proposed method of dealing with identified hazards should be included in a work
plan. The principal consultant in conjunction with the Department’s Program Manager is
responsible for the receipt and management of this information, including identification of special
factors that may have cost implications, etc.
For further information, refer to Australian Standard AS 2601. Additional advice in relation to
general emergency matters is obtainable from the Department’s Security Services Unit, tel: 03
9589 6266;
To ensure that principal consultants have carried out their duties in accordance with all occupational
health and safety requirements, they need to submit monthly reports to the Program Manager who,
in turn, will collate these and submit them to the Department (likewise on a monthly basis).
11.6 Asbestos
It is the Department’s aim to ultimately remove asbestos from all school buildings. While the most
dangerous forms of this material have been attended to, asbestos-containing materials are still
present in many existing facilities.
Asbestos management is governed by Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2007, Chapter 4 –
Hazardous Substances and Materials, Part 4.3 – Asbestos.
All schools have had a Division 5 Asbestos Register (previously known as Asbestos Audit) carried out
in accordance with Division 5 of the Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2007. This details
the presence of any known visual asbestos-containing materials within the school.
Before undertaking any maintenance, refurbishment, capital or demolition works, a school-

appointed School Asbestos Co-ordinator will ensure that works involving the removal or disturbance
173
of asbestos are carried out by contractors licensed by the Victorian WorkCover Authority, and that
they have the required level of public liability and current asbestos insurance.
The School Asbestos Co-ordinator must ensure that the builder/contractor responsible for the
management and/or removal of existing asbestos material in school buildings complies with
Occupational Health and Safety Regulations 2007, Chapter 4 – Hazardous Substances and Materials,
Part 4.3 – Asbestos.
The principal consultant’s role in the course of a major building project is to:
ensure that a Division 5 Asbestos Register is included within the tender documentation or
made available to tenderers during the tender process;
ensure that a Division 6 Asbestos Register (detailing the condition of the area to be worked
in) is undertaken prior to the commencement of any project works;
liaise with contractors prior to the commencement of any project works;
liaise with contractors during the progression of works to ensure all that mandatory
regulations are adhered to; and
ensure the contractor conforms to the Department’s Asbestos Management Plan.
The following are requirements for asbestos works on Department sites:

the school site is to be totally vacant during all asbestos removal works;
all asbestos materials within the construction zone shall be removed as part of the project;
and
at the completion of the project, the principal consultant shall be responsible to arrange a
new Division 5 Asbestos Register and provide copies to the Department and the school.
11.7 Copper-Chrome-Arsenate (CCA) Treated Timber

Copper-chrome-arsenate (CCA) treated pine must not be used in any exposed location where
students or members of the public are likely to come into intimate and frequent contact. For a list of
alternative timbers to be used, refer to AS 5604–2005.
AS 5604–2005 identifies the different durability characteristics of various natural and untreated
timbers, and specifies timber types suitable for use under various circumstances.
The suitability of timber treatments is identified in AS 5605–2007 (Guide to the Safe Use of
Preservative – Treated Timber).
Specific information on particular treatments can be found in the following consumer safety sheets:
AS 5605 Supplements—Consumer safety information sheet;
AS 5605 Supp 1 Guide to the safe use of preservative-treated timber – Consumer safety
information sheet - Copper chrome arsenate (CCA)-treated timber;
AS 5605 Supp 2 Alkaline copper quaternary (ACQ)-treated timber;
AS 5605 Supp 3 Copper azole-treated timber;
174
AS 5605 Supp 4 Guide to the safe use of preservative-treated timber – Consumer safety
information sheet - Light oil/organic solvent-borne preservatives (LOSP)-treated timber;
AS 5605 Supp 5 Creosote or pigment-emulsified creosote (PEC)-treated timber; and
AS 5605 Supp 6 Bifenthrin-treated timber.
11.8 Occupational Health and Safety References

The following is a useful list of publications and web-based resources related to occupational health
and safety issues.
1. A handbook for workplaces – OH&S in schools – A practical guide for school leaders. WorkSafe
Victoria
2. Designing Safer Buildings and Structures, 1st Edition, December 2005, WorkSafe Victoria. A
guide to Section 28 of the Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004 informs the designers of
buildings of their duty under the Act, and provides practical guidance about the approach that
can be adopted in the design process to comply with that duty.
3. DET Circular: S434–2007 Occupational Health and Safety Act – Duties of Designers.
4. “Building and Infrastructure”

(http://www.education.vic.gov.au/school/principals/infrastructure/Pages/default.aspx), a DET
public webpage, with particular reference to the “Health and Safety” and the “Property and
Asset Management” sub-pages.
5. “Health, Security and Safety”

(https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/sc/sites/Infonline/default.aspx), a DET intranet key
document listing, available within the Department’s Principal Consultants webpage (this
requires eduweb user name and password).
6. “Security Services”
(https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/Services/Schools/Infrastructure/Emergency/Pages/default.
aspx), a DET intranet site, available within the Department’s School Infrastructure eduGate
environment (this requires eduweb user name and password).
7. Victorian School Policy Advisory Guide – Security Risk Management (DET):

(http://www.education.vic.gov.au/school/principals/spag/management/pages/security.aspx)
8. Noise: http://www.worksafe.vic.gov.au/pages/safety-and-prevention/health-and-safety-
topics/noise, Worksafe Victoria.
9. Falls prevention: https://www.worksafe.vic.gov.au/pages/safety-and-prevention/health-and-

safety-topics/falls-prevention, WorkSafe Victoria.
10. Preventing slip and trip incidents in the education sector:

http://www.hse.gov.uk/services/education/slips-in-education.htm (UK Health and Safety
Executive).
11. Slips and trips: http://hse.gov.uk/slips/ (UK Health and Safety Executive).
175
Section 12:
Section 11 – Workplace Health & Safety Project Completion
Nossal High School

Architect: Woods Bagot
176
Section 12 – Project Completion – Building Manuals & Maintenance
12. PROJECT COMPLETION – BUILDING MANUALS &

MAINTENANCE
12.1 Project Completion Phase
The principal consultant is responsible for ensuring that:
► practical completion under the contract is achieved;
► contract and design documents are complied with;
► workmanship is up to standard;
► regulatory requirements have been met;
► inspections have been done;
► commissioning reports, testing, validation of system performance and completion
statements have been obtained;
► authority sign-off has been obtained (e.g. fire brigade);
► warranty information has been identified, checked and provided;
► Occupancy Permit or Certificate of Final Inspection has been obtained;
► Essential safety measure requirements have been specified and understood;
► statutory signage and component identification has been completed;
► termite protection is in place; and
► certification and notices are provided.
12.2 Building Manual Objective

At project completion a maintenance manual must be provided to enable a school to safely maintain
its facility and ensure that all regulatory maintenance inspection and testing procedures are in place.
This is information is vital to the school’s operation and performance of duty of care, and is required
prior to occupancy.
12.2.1 Included Asset Items
Building Structure
► Roof
► Guttering and down pipes
► Spoon drains
► Swales
► Stormwater drains
► Stormwater pits
► External walls
► Internal walls
177
► Special features
► Windows
► Doors
► Door locks and furniture
► Grilles and vents
► Paint finishes
► Floor finishes
► Roller doors
► Access systems
► Any safety system including safety railing, lifting beams and attachment points
► Fire walls
► Penetrations in fire walls
► Fire doors
► Fire protective coverings
► Fire rated shafts
► Fire rated access panels
► Smoke doors and vents
► Fire control centre
Air conditioning and Ventilation

► Fans supply and exhaust
► Evaporators
► Condensers
► Compressors
► Ducting
► Control equipment and thermostats
► Valves
► Vents and grilles
► Associated equipment
► Fire dampers
Electrical
► Switchboards, circuit breakers and fittings
► Cable
► Switches
178
► Appliances
► Motors
► Light fittings
► Exit signs
► Emergency lights
► Heaters
► Hand dryers
Security
► Monitoring system
► Detectors
► Pagers
Plumbing
► Hot water services
► Gas appliances
► Pipe work
► Drains
► Sewer
► Taps and fittings
► Mixing valves
Fire Systems
► Sprinklers, including valves and pipe work
► Fire panel
► Detectors
► Extinguishers
► Hoses and hose reels
► Hydrants
► Break glass buttons
► Door release
► Brigade connections
► Emergency warning and intercom system
► Static water storage
► Fire pump sets
► Alarm Signalling Equipment (ASE) identification
179
Communications
► PABX
► Handsets
► Cabling
► Outlets
► Data outlets
Certificates
► Development approval
► Building approval
► Determinations
► Fire engineering reports
► Occupancy permits
► Registrations and licences
► Engineer certificates
► Utility providers
► Authority consents
12.2.2 Required Information
Regulatory
The building manual will provide detail for all asset items, which require:
► inspection and testing under the Building Regulations for essential safety measures, and
production of these records as specified in the Occupancy Permit or Certificate of Final
inspection;
► inspection and testing required by any authority;
► preventative maintenance to prolong life; and
► maintenance to ensure the facility’s warranty status.
Item Details
The building manual will also provide full and complete asset details as follows:
► a unique asset item number in agreed format;
► detailed description;
► the building system the asset item belongs to (e.g. fire system);
► the type of asset item (e.g. sprinkler);
► asset item manufacturer and/or brand;
► asset item installer, including installation date;
180
► asset item warrantor, warranty details and end date;

► service provider for any repairs required, including any qualifications the repairer must have
to meet regulations or to ensure warranty;
► asset item location including marked-up site map, building number, room number and area
description;
► model and serial numbers;
► colour and material;
► asset item capacity, rating, size and performance;
► expected life in years;
► cost of asset item;
► frequency of maintenance as required by regulation or warrantor, whichever is more often;
and
► a complete list of all checks required to be undertaken at each frequency; this should also
reference to appropriate Australian Standard.
12.2.3 Manual Layout
It is proposed that most of the asset information be provided on spreadsheets, which will be
provided in the required format. This will allow the contractor to enter the information efficiently
and maintain a standard across all the different building systems.
Hard-copy manuals must be provided in the following format:
Physical Appearance
► An A4, four-ring binder, 50mm thick maximum size.
► Clearly labelled and numbered.
► One binder for each system, more than one if extra space is required.
► Ten labelled tabs in each binder.
Manual Sections
1) Introduction
i. Builders details
ii. Sub contractors details
iii. Contents list
2) Scope of manual
i. How to use the manual
ii. System outline
181
3) Occupational Health & Safety

i. Job safety analysis sheets for each plant
ii. Accident prevention measures
iii. Safety equipment requirements
iv. Safety procedures
v. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
4) Operation
i. Design explanation
ii. Set points
iii. Test points
iv. Detailed operating instructions
v. Simple “How to Operate” instructions
vi. Interface connections with other systems
vii. Performance measures
5) Maintenance
i. Asset item list
ii. Asset description and detail sheets as above
iii. Photo of asset
iv. Site map showing location
6) Test and inspections

i. Annual maintenance plan, including inspection and test frequencies
ii. Inspections, tests and adjustments required for each asset item and the Australian
Standard reference number.
7) Trouble shooting
i. Example faults and repairs
ii. Frequently occurring faults or adjustments
iii. Issues found and resolved during commissioning
8) Commissioning and test reports

i. Equipment performance standards
ii. Actual testing data results recorded at handover
9) Manufacturer’s specifications
i. Component lists for each asset item
ii. Maintenance specifications
iii. Warranty details
182
iv. Brochures
10) Drawings
i. Site map layout
ii. Schematics
iii. As-built drawings
iv. Detailed construction drawings
12.3 Manuals and Maintenance Log Books

Maintenance log books must be provided to schools in accordance with the provisions of the
Department’s Annual Contracts: Guidelines for Building Services Maintenance in Schools and Part 12
of the Building Regulations 2006.
The Building Code of Australia, Part I, also requires the maintenance of safety measures and
equipment including:
► building fire integrity;
► means of egress;
► signs;
► lighting;
► fire fighting services and equipment;
► air-handling systems;
► automatic fire detection systems;
► occupant warning systems;
► lifts;
► standby power supply systems;
► building clearance and fire appliance access;
► glazing, balustrading, balconies, swimming pools, refrigerated chambers
► bush fire provision;
► building use and application;
► laboratory safety measures;
► dangerous goods storage and handling; and
► any other specified measure.
Typically, the maintenance requirements related to a Building Permit will be set out in the
Occupancy Permit or the Certificate of Final Inspection, but not all requirements regarding
maintenance will be specified as these certificates relate to the permit only.
183
12.4 Termites
One aspect of maintenance gaining increased attention is the control of termite activity. All school
projects should now incorporate protective measures against termite attack on the buildings
forming part of the project. These measures create barriers to concealed access but do not ensure
permanent protection against termites without active and ongoing maintenance. Maintenance
requirements applying to the selected system of protection should be communicated to the school
in its operation and maintenance manuals.
The Department publication Use of Termiticides in Schools provides advice in this regard
(https://edugate.eduweb.vic.gov.au/sc/sites/Infonline/Health%20and%20Safety/Protocol%20for%20
Use%20of%20Termiticides%20in%20Schools%20(2006).pdf ). (Access restricted to Department
personnel, school users and registered users with an Edumail account and pin number).
184
Appendix 1:
Section 12 – Project Completion – Building Manuals & Maintenance Building Elements
Sunshine Suzanne Cory High School

Architect: Brand Architects
185
Appendix 1 – Building Elements
APPENDIX 1
BUILDING ELEMENTS
186
LIST OF ELEMENTS
This attachment contains the National Public Works Conference Cost Control Manual list of element
numbers, element codes, and element definitions. For a further detailed explanation, refer to the
Manual. The element numbers are only used to determine the order of the elements. The element
codes should be used for coding bills of quantity items as well as analysis by manual or computer
means. An element is a portion of a project which fulfils a particular physical purpose, irrespective of
construction and/or specification.
Element Elemental Element

Number Code
Preliminaries
00 PR Preliminaries
Substructure
01 SB Substructure
Superstructure
02 CL Columns (Framed Buildings)

03 UF Upper Floors
04 SC Staircases
05 RF Roof
06 EW External Walls
07 WW Windows
08 ED External Doors
09 NW Internal Walls
10 NS Internal Screens and Borrowed Lights
11 ND Internal Doors
Finishes
12 WF Wall Finishes
13 FF Floor Finishes
14 CF Ceiling Finishes
Fittings
15 FT Fitments
16 SE Special Equipment
Services
17 SF Sanitary Fixtures
18 PD Sanitary Plumbing
187
Element Elemental Element

Number Code
Services (continued)
19 WS Water Supply
20 GS Gas Service
21 SH Space Heating
22 VE Ventilation
23 EC Evaporative Cooling
24 AC Air conditioning
25 FP Fire Protection
26 LP Electric Light and Power
27 CM Communications
28 TS Transportation Systems
29 SS Special Services
Centralised Energy Systems

30 CE Centralised Energy Systems
Alterations
31 AR Alterations and Renovations
Site Works
32 NP Site Preparation
33 XR Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas
34 XN Boundary Walls, Fencing and Gates
35 XB Outbuildings and Covered Ways
36 XL Landscaping and Improvements
External Services
37 XK External Stormwater Drainage
38 XD External Sewer Drainage
39 XW External Water Supply
40 XG External Gas
41 XF External Fire Protection
42 XE External Electric Light and Power
43 XC External Communications
44 XS External Special Services
External Alterations
45 XX External Alterations and Renovations
Special Provisions
46 YY Special Provisions
188
DEFINITIONS OF ELEMENTS
Preliminaries
00 PR Preliminaries
It includes preliminary items as defined in Section 2 of the Australian Standard Method of
Measurement of Building Works, where ascertainable. The percentage that this cost bears to
the remainder of the net project cost will be stated on the summary page of the Cost
Analysis Form (CA2).
Substructure
01 SB Substructure
The structurally sound and watertight base upon which to build.
It includes basement and foundation excavations; piers, piles, pedestals, beams and strip
footings; foundation walls; drop aprons; hardcore filling; work slabs and damp-proofing or
other membranes; floor structures; subsoil drainage; ducts, pits, bases and service tunnels;
entrance steps, ramps and their finishes; steps and ramps in the one floor level; structural
screeds and toppings; covered swimming pools; all other work up to but excluding the
lowest floor finish.
It excludes site preparation (32 XP); basement walls (06 EW); columns above tops of bases (02
CL, 06 EW, 09 NW); floor finishes (13 FF); all non-structural work associated with the internal
services.
Superstructure
02 CL Columns
The upright supports to upper floors and roof forming part of a framed structure.
It includes internal and external columns from tops of columns to bases; column casings; all
protective non-decorative coatings.
It excludes portal frames (05 RF); columns to non-framed (load bearing) structures (06 EW, 09
NW); columns supporting awnings and attached covered ways (05 RF); columns supporting
exposed attached external stairs (04 SQ all finishes (06 EW, 12 WF).
Note: Columns below lowest floor finish (e.g. in filled areas) are included in this element
because of the impracticability of splitting a column into two elements.
03 UF Upper Floors
Floor structures above that at the lowest level.
It includes all beams; concrete, precast and in-situ floors; waffle slab and filler block floors;
metal floors; computer floors; timber framed floors; structural screeds and toppings;
189
concealed insulation; balconies; overhangs and sunhoods integral with floors; steps and
ramps in the one floor level; all protective non-decorative coatings.
It excludes landings and ramps between floor levels (04 SC); balcony balustrades (06 EW);
internal and external finishes (04 SC, 06 EW, 13 FF, 14 CF).
04 SC Staircases
The structural connections between two or more nominal floor levels or to roof, plant rooms
and motor rooms, together with associated finishes.
It includes landings; ramps between floor levels; fire escapes; supporting framework; access
ladders; spiral staircases; tread, riser, string and soffit finishes; balustrades and handrails.
It excludes steps and ramps at changes in the one floor level (01 SB, 03 UF); ground level
entrance steps (01 SB); lifts and escalators (28 TS).
05 RF Roof
To provide a structurally sound and watertight covering over the building.
It includes portal frames; roof construction; gable and other walls in roof spaces; parapet
walls and roof balustrades; thermal insulation; roof lights and dormers with their sun
screenings; eaves, verges and fascias; rainwater goods; internal storm water drainage runs;
awnings and open lean-to roofs; all protective non-decorative coatings.
It excludes rainwater goods to balconies and other unenclosed floor areas (03 UF); all
non-structural work associated with the internal services; independent roofs to exposed
attached external stairs (04 SC).
06 EW External Walls
The vertical enclosure around the building other than windows and external doors from
substructure to roof.
It includes structural walls; basement walls and tanking above lowest floors finish; spandrel,
curtain and window walls; external shop fronts; glazed screen walls; columns and isolated
piers to non-framed (load bearing) structures; gallery and balcony walls and balustrades;
solar screen walls; plant room air flow screens; all insulation to external walls; all external
finishes to all columns, slab edges, beams, projecting overhangs and walls; lintels and
flashings at openings; ring beams and stiffening beams not integral with floor, ceiling or roof
slabs.
It excludes all internal finishes to external walls (except screens and the like) and columns (12
WF); sills, thresholds and linings (07 WW, 08 E13); walls in roof (05 RF) and substructure (01
SB) and all doors (08 ED); sun protection to windows (07 WW) and sunhoods integral with
floors (03 UF); fire places, hearths, flues and stacks (21 SH, 29 SS); beams integral with slabs
(03 UF, 05 RF).
07 WW Windows
Openings in external walls to provide light and ventilation.
190
It includes flyscreens; louvres; guard grilles; remote control gear; sun protection to windows;
curtains, blinds, track and pelmets; window sills and linings; hardware; decoration.
It excludes lintels and flashings (06 EW); special blackout facilities (16 SE); roof-lights and
dormers (05 RF); window walls and glazed screens (06 EW); sunhoods integral with floors (03
UF); solar screen walls (06 EW); window cleaning equipment (16 SE).
Note: Includes hardware and decorations, glazing and infill panels within window frames.
Clerestory windows occurring in external walls to clerestories are included in this element.
08 ED External Doors
The access ways into the building both for pedestrians and vehicles.
It includes frames; linings; glazing; architraves; hardware; panels and highlights over; fly
doors; roller shutters; garage doors; fire doors; grille and chain wire doors; gates; service
cupboard doors and thresholds; decoration.
It excludes frames forming an integral part of wire mesh or glazed screen walls (06 EW);
lintels and flashings (06 EW); under floor access doors (01 SB); framing and glazing to
sidelights to doors with or without highlights (06 EW).
09 NW Internal Walls
Permanent division of internal spaces into separate rooms or to enclose duct and other
non-useable areas.
It includes walls; internal columns and isolated piers to non-framed (load bearing) structures;
lintels, damp courses and bearing strips; stiffening beams not integral with floor, ceiling or
roof slabs; part height solid walls glazed over to ceiling; unducted air-flow grilles; fire walls
and smoke screens.
It excludes internal screens and borrowed lights (10 NS); wall finishes (12 WF); works in roof
(05 RF) and substructure (01 SB); part height solid walls (10 NS); fireplaces, hearths, flues and
stacks (21 SH, 29 SS); beams integral with slabs (03 UF, 05 RF).
Note: Part height solid walls are screens (by definition) and included in element I0 NS.
10 NS Internal Screens and Borrowed Lights

To screen off or temporarily divide internal spaces into separate compartments and to allow
the transfer of light through internal walls.
It includes proprietary type office partitioning; glazed screens; internal shop fronts; fold
away and operable walls; overhead frameworks and supporting beams; chain wire and grille
screens; toilet partitions and screen walls; borrowed lights; balustrades and rails not
associated with staircases; all finishes and decorations.
It excludes all doors (11 ND); counters and wall hatches (15 FT).
11 ND Internal Doors
Passage ways through internal walls, internal screens and partitions, and to provide access
to service cupboards and ducts.
191
It includes frames; linings; glazing; architraves; pelmets; hardware and door grilles; chain
wire and grille doors; toilet doors; cell and strong room doors; fire doors roller shutters;
service cupboard doors; duct access panels; fanlights and panels over and linings to blank
openings; decoration.
It excludes frames forming integral parts of demountable, wire mesh or glazed screens, etc.
(10 NS); lintels (09 NW); framing and glazing to sidelights to doors (10 NS).
Finishes
In general, where a finish incorporates a special type of formwork, only that cost additional to the
cost of rough formwork is to be included in the finish. The rough formwork cost is part of the
structure.
12 WF Wall Finishes
To finish and decorate all interior faces of columns, external walls and internal walls.
It includes finishes to internal faces of external walls and columns: acoustic wall linings; extra
costs involved for face bricks, face and coloured blocks and off form concrete; splashbacks,
dados and regulation wall vents.
It excludes finishes to internal screens and borrowed lights (10 NS); skirtings (13 FF) and
cornices (14 CF); all external finishes to external walls and columns (06 EW); finishes to both
sides of external screens (06 EW); all protective non-decorative coatings.
Note: Finishes to internal screens and borrowed lights (10 NS) are included in that element.
Finishes to internal faces of external screens, etc. are included with the relevant
sub-elements in external walls (06 EW).
13 FF Floor Finishes
To provide a satisfactory finish on which to walk, and applied to upper floors and
substructure.
It includes all preparatory work and finishing; balcony floor finishes; skirtings; screeds;
timber floor finishes; dividing strips; mats and mat-wells; duct and pit covers; carpeting used
as a permanent floor finish; timber and other finishes to concrete floors; finishes to steps in
the one floor level.
It excludes structural screeds and toppings (01 SB, 03 UF); landing and stair finishes (04 SC);
trafficable roof covering (05 RF); timber framed floors (03 UF, 01 SB); finishes to external
thresholds (08 ED); door sills (08 ED, 11 ND).
Note: Element includes all floor finishes to areas measured in the building area (BA).
14 CF Ceiling Finishes
To finish and decorate all internal soffits of upper floors and roof over rooms and external
soffits over unenclosed covered areas.
192
It includes preparatory work; suspended false ceilings; proprietary suspended ceiling

systems; acoustic ceiling linings; extra costs involved for off-form concrete; linings to roof
lights; ceiling manholes; framing to bulkheads and cornices.
It excludes eaves soffits (05 RF); stair and landing soffits (04 SC); ceiling joists where not
suspended (03 UF, 05 RF); soffits of projecting overhangs (06 EW); all protective
non-decorative coatings (03 UF, 04 SC, 05 RF); air conditioning grilles (24 AC).
Fittings
15 FT Fitments
To fit out the building with built-up fitments and fixed items included in the main contract.
It includes benches; cupboards; shelving; racks; seats; counters; chalkboards; notice boards,
signs and name plates; coat rails and hooks; mirrors; wall hatches; daises and stages.
It excludes loose furniture and furnishings (46 YY); curtains and blinds (07 WW); special
equipment (16 SE); internal screens and borrowed lights (10 NS).
16 SE Special Equipment
To provide items of equipment of unitary, commercially available type and/or of a type not
covered by other elements.
It includes window cleaning, gymnasium, mortuary and photographic equipment;

audio-visual aids; laboratory, laundry, kitchen and central sterile services department (CSSD)
type equipment; dental and workshop equipment; boiling water units; sink heaters;
laboratory stills; special blackout facilities; bed pan washers; linen and refuse disposal
equipment; refrigerators and refrigerated drinking water coolers; incinerators; sanitary
macerators; circulating fans; all cold, hot, gas and other valves and cocks, controls, electric
wiring and piping integral with this equipment; specified builders work in connection with
this equipment.
It excludes cool rooms and process cooling, incineration plant of custom design or built-up
type, and other special services (29 SS) or external special services (44 XS); loose equipment
not covered in the main contract (46 YY); fire fighting equipment (25 FP); sanitary fixtures (17
SF); refrigeration plant associated with air conditioning (24 AC).
Services
17 SF Sanitary Fixtures
To fit out the building with normal fixtures connected to the soil and waste plumbing
systems and all associated ancillaries.
It includes WC suites; urinals; basins; sinks and tubs; troughs and runnels; drinking fountains;
slop hoppers; showers; hobs; shower curtains and trays; terminal outlets integral with
fixtures; flusherette valves; soap and toilet paper holders; towel rails and hand driers.
193
It excludes sanitary macerators, bed pan washers, kitchen, laundry and sterilising equipment
and refrigerated drinking water coolers (16 SE); sanitary incinerators (29 SS); floor wastes and
all loose traps (18 PD); terminal outlets not integral with fixtures (19 WS).
18 PD Sanitary Plumbing
The disposal of all waste and soiled water from fixtures and equipment out to the external
face of external walls.
It includes stacks and vents; all loose traps; floor wastes; internal sewer drainage runs,
pumps and ejectors; acid resisting pipes and drains; box ducting and paintwork.
It excludes rainwater disposal systems (05 RF); incinerator flues (16 SE, 29 SS, 44 XS); duct
access panels (11 ND).
19 WS Water Supply
Systems to supply water from point of building entry to the points of consumption. The
water may be at ambient temperature, heated or cooled and may be treated by clarification,
filtration, softening, de-mineralisation, distillation, desalination or other means. The water
may be supplied from town mains, bores, rivers, lakes, rainwater tanks, centralised energy
systems or other sources.
It includes storage tanks; pumps; water treatment plants; water heaters and coolers;
reticulation pipe work including pipeline components; terminal outlets not integral with
fixtures and/or equipment; controls other than those associated with water consuming
items of equipment; box ducting; insulation; sheathing; painting and identification; building
and electrical work forming part of the contract for water supply.
It excludes meters, extensions and connections to town mains or other sources (39 XW);
self-contained unitary equipment such as boiling water units, sink heaters and laboratory
stills (16 SE).
20 GS Gas Services
To supply town, natural, simulated natural and liquefied petroleum gas from point of
building entry to points of consumption. The gas may be supplied from town mains, storage
cylinders, bulk storage tanks or other sources.
It includes portable gas cylinders; booster compressors; manifolds and regulators; box
ducting, painting and identification; building and electrical work forming part of the gas
services element; reticulation pipe work and pipeline components; terminal outlets not
integral with fixtures and/or equipment; gas detection systems.
It excludes outlet cocks integral with appliances (16 SE); hot water heaters (16 SE, 19 WS);
space heaters (21 SH) and other like equipment; meters, extensions and connections to town
mains or other sources (40 XG).
Note: Gas appliances forming part of an air conditioning, space heating water supply system
or other system should be included under the appropriate element. Gas controls, valves,
regulators and other pipelines components directly associated with gas fired equipment
should be included under the element appropriate to gas-fired equipment.
194
21 SH Space Heating
To heat the interior of buildings by means of convection, radiation or any other form of
heating.
It includes unitary heaters; reticulated steam, hot water or hot oil systems; warm air
systems; electric floor or ceiling heating systems; fireplaces, hearths and associated work in
chimney stacks; boiler plant installed within the heated building and servicing only element
21 SH in that building; insulation and painting; controls and associated electrical work.
It excludes any system which also provides air cooling/air conditioning (24 AC) or evaporative
cooling (23 EC).
Note: Boiler plant and pipe reticulation located outside the building served, serving multiple
buildings, or serving other elements such as (24 AC) or (19 WS) are to be included under
centralised energy systems (30 CE). Gas storage and reticulation systems are to be included
under external gas (40 XG) if located outside the building served or if serving other elements,
or under gas service (20 GS) if located within the building served – otherwise, they are to be
included in 21 SH.
Electric cabling terminates at the junction with electric light and power (26 LP). Controls and
electric wiring integral with equipment items are to be included with those items.
22 VE Ventilation
To ventilate buildings by means of supply and/or exhaust systems.
It includes mechanical ventilators; non-mechanical roof ventilators; supply and/or exhaust

fans; ducted systems; exhaust hoods; ducting, plant, controls and associated electrical
world.
It excludes any system which also involves space heating (21 SH); air conditioning (24 AC);
evaporative cooling (23 EC); circulating fans (16 SE); regulation wall vents (12 WF); door grilles
(11 ND); plant room air flow screens (06 EW); louvred windows (07 WW).
Note: Dust extraction is to be included under special services (29 SS). Electric cabling ends at
the junction with electric light and power (26 LP).
23 EC Evaporative Cooling
To cool air within a building by evaporative processes; the system can include ancillary
heating.
It includes evaporative coolers, rock bed regenerative systems and ancillary heating devices;
ducting, insulation, painting and associated electrical work.
It excludes door grilles (11 ND); air conditioning (24 AC); systems which heat (21 SH) and/or
ventilate (22 VE) only.
Note: Air relief grilles in doors and walls are to be included under respective building
elements. Electric cabling terminates at the junction with electric light and power (26 LP).
195
24 AC Air conditioning
To maintain and control the temperature, humidity and quality of air under predetermined
limits within buildings.
It includes package air conditioners; systems for cooling only; ductwork, plant, controls and
associated electrical work; air conditioning grilles.
It excludes door grilles (11 ND) and systems which heat (21 SH) and/or ventilate (22 VE) only;
special cool rooms (29 SS); special hot rooms (29 SS); evaporative cooling (23 EC).
25 FP Fire Protection
To detect and/or extinguish fires.
It includes sprinklers and other automatic extinguishing systems; fire indicator board;
manual and automatic fire alarm installations; fire fighting equipment; hydrant installations
and hose reels and cupboards; hand appliances.
It excludes fire doors (08 ED, 11 ND); fire proofing (02 CL, 03 UF, 05 RF, 12 WF, 14 CF, etc.).
26 LP Electric Light and Power

To provide all light and power and emergency light and power from and including main
distribution board to and including power outlets and light fittings.
It includes main distribution board*; sub-mains and distribution boards; emergency lighting
systems; power sub-mains to mechanical equipment and sub-mains and/or sub-circuits to
other equipment and/or final sub-circuits.
It excludes other electrical installations listed under other elements such as special services
(29 SS); communications (27 CM) and centralised energy systems (30 CE).
* Where the main switchboard supplies only one building, it shall be considered as a main
distribution board.
27 CM Communications
To provide audio and video communication within a building.
It includes the following systems: telephone, internal telephone, public address, call,
emergency warning and intercommunication, personal paging, clock and/or bell, TV antenna
and closed circuit TV.
It excludes document hoists and conveyor systems (28 TS); cables between buildings (43 XC).
Note: Document hoists and conveyor systems are to be included in 28 TS. Cables between
buildings are to be included in 43 XC.
28 TS Transportation Systems
To transport personnel and/or goods from floor to floor or area to area.
196
It includes all lifts, hoists and conveyor systems; escalators; all associated equipment and
work other than structural building work.
It excludes such items as walls to shafts and lift wells and machine rooms (06 EW, 09 NW).
29 SS Special Services
To provide services or installations not covered by other elements.
It includes monitoring systems; cool rooms and process cooling; special conditioned rooms;
staircase pressurisation systems; compressed air; medical and industrial gas systems; dust
extraction systems; security systems; lightning protection; stage lighting and theatre
equipment; reticulated soap dispenser systems; laundry, heat and water reclaim systems
and the like.
It excludes equipment items (16 SE); communication services (27 CM).
Centralised Energy Systems

30 CE Centralised Energy Systems
To produce and supply steam, heating, hot water, chilled water and/or other cooling or
heating media and/or site generated electrical energy to a number of buildings and/or to
multiple energy consuming elements.
It includes the piping reticulation within central plant room or plant house and up to branch
off-takes to energy consuming functional elements; sections of the main piping reticulation
running to, within or through buildings served; cabling within the central plant room or
house and all work which forms part of the energy system element; buildings to house such
plant, service tunnels, ducts and/or conduits.
It excludes emergency generating plant and cabling from central switch board to other
buildings (42 XE).
Note: Interfaces between element 30 CE and other elements are those points where
branches serve single elemental systems or where branches leave common mains within
buildings to serve single elemental systems.
Centralised energy systems may range from very large boiler and/or chiller and/or electrical
generating plants serving large and complex sites (e.g. airports, major hospitals, universities
or colleges) to small boiler installations supplying energy to space heating and domestic hot
water systems in relatively small single buildings (e.g. school classroom blocks, pavilion type
hospital wards, etc.).
Where energy generators supply the whole of their production to one functional system
only and are contained within the alignment of the building served, they are to be
considered part of that functional system.
Engineering systems serving the central plant room or plant house are to be included under
appropriate elements for the building housing the centralised energy plant.
197
Alterations
31 AR Alterations and Renovations
To alter or renovate any existing building including works to the substructure, finishes,
fittings and internal services.
It includes work in connecting a new building to an existing; redecorations; refitting out and
all mechanical and electrical services in connection therewith; underpinning to existing
buildings for alteration works.
It excludes complete demolitions of existing buildings, site clearance and removal of any
paving, fences and outbuildings (32 XP); alterations and renovations to external services and
site works (45 XX); any work involved in connecting new services to old in existing buildings
(39 XW, 40 XG, 42 XE, etc.).
Site Works
32 XP Site Preparation
All basic work necessary prior to proceeding with buildings and external works.
It includes demolitions; site clearance, general levelling and filling; hoardings; retaining walls;
removal of any paving, fences, trees, services; temporary diversions of services;
underpinning to adjacent buildings.
It excludes alterations and permanent diversion of services (45 XX); alterations to buildings
(31 AR) and existing site works (45 XX); any work involved in permanent connections of new
services to existing (39 XW, 40 XG, 42 XE, etc.).
33 XR Roads, Footpaths and Paved Areas

Trafficable areas between and around buildings (outside “fully enclosed covered areas” and
“unenclosed covered areas” as defined, outbuildings, etc.) for vehicles and pedestrians.
It includes car parks; playgrounds; kerbs; crossovers; bollards; steps and associated
balustrades; weed poisoning.
It excludes uncovered bridge links (35 XB); sports pitches, lawns, site landscaping and
improvements (36 XL); cut and fill (32 XP).
34 XN Boundary Walls, Fencing and Gates

To enclose or define the extent of the site.
It includes all walls, fences and gates at the site boundary.
It excludes all walls, fences and gates that subdivide the site (36 XL); all retaining walls (32
XP).
198
35 XB Outbuildings and Covered Ways

To provide small buildings supplementary to the main building(s) as well as covered areas or
bridge links for pedestrian or vehicular site circulation.
It includes detached covered ways not alongside buildings; garages; bicycle sheds;
incinerator buildings; residential and gatekeepers cottages; garbage shelters; workshops;
chapels; stores; sheds; stair blocks; all electrical, mechanical and other services in
connection therewith.
It excludes attached covered ways alongside buildings; boiler and plant houses (30 CE); water
towers (39 XW); gas meter (40 XG) and water meter (39 XW) shelters; pump houses (39 XW),
substations (42 XE) and similar engineering services buildings.
35 XL Landscaping and Improvements

To improve the appearance of the site and provide incidental site facilities for the use of the
occupants.
It includes grassing and turfing; garden plots and planting; trees, screen, dwarf, play and
entrance walls; seats; fountains; petrol bowsers (pumps) and tanks; sculptures; flagpoles;
signs and notices; cricket nets and basketball posts; sports pitches and goal posts; open air
swimming pools.
It excludes paving (33 XR); site clearance (32 XP); boundary walls, fencing and gates (34 XN);
walls required to retain the site (32 XP).
External Services
35 XK External Stormwater Drainage
To dispose of rain and surface water from the site.
It includes pipe runs from the external face of buildings; inspection pits; sumps; road gullies;
culverts; box drains; grated trenches; runs from pools and fountains; outfalls and head walls;
agricultural and sub-soil drains; connections to existing runs and pits.
It excludes pipe runs, pits, etc. under buildings from internal downpipes (05 RF); road gutters
(33 XR); temporary drainage as site preparation (32 XP); diversions to existing runs (45 XX).
38 XD External Sewer Drainage

To dispose of soil and waste water from the site.
It includes pipe runs from the external face of buildings; grease gullies; inspection pits and
manholes; acid resisting and special drains; dilution pits; petrol and plaster arresters; septic
tanks; collection and holding wells; absorption trenches; transpiration areas; pumps and
ejectors; connections to existing runs, pits and mains.
It excludes pipe runs, pits, etc. beneath buildings (18 PD); diversions to existing runs (45 XX).
199
39 XW External Water Supply

Systems to supply water up to the external faces of new buildings and up to other major
consuming points such as irrigation and ground watering outlets. The water may be at
ambient temperature, heated or cooled and may be treated by clarification, filtration,
softening, demineralisation, distillation, desalination or other means. The water may be
supplied from town mains, bores, rivers, lakes, rainwater tanks, centralised energy systems
or other sources.
It includes storage tanks; water towers; pumps; water treatment plants; water heaters and
coolers; reticulation pipe work including pipeline components; terminal outlets not integral
with fixtures and/or equipment; insulation; sheathing; painting and identification; meters
and meter enclosures included under the contract; water bores; irrigation and ground
watering systems; building and electrical work forming part of this element.
It excludes diversion to existing runs (45 XX).
40 XG External Gas
To supply town, natural, simulated natural and liquefied petroleum gas up the external faces
of new buildings and other consuming points. The gas may be supplied from town mains,
storage cylinders, bulk storage tanks or other sources.
It includes storage cylinders and tanks, meters and regulators forming part of the contract;
meter enclosures; reticulation pipe work and pipe-line components; building and electrical
work forming part of the external gas supply contract.
It excludes diversions to existing runs (45 XX).
41 XF External Fire Protection

To supply fire hydrant and gas or vaporising agent runs up to external faces of new buildings,
external sprinkler systems, and for site connections and connection of fire detection systems
between buildings. Also to detect and/or extinguish fires in fixed plant or equipment
located in the open air.
It includes standby and booster pumps; pipe runs; storage and reticulation of gas and
vaporising agents; hydrant points; overhead and underground cables for fire detection
systems.
It excludes trenches for cabling (42 XE).
42 XE External Electric Light and Power

To supply electric power to main distribution boards of buildings and to provide lighting and
power to external site areas.
It includes connections to source of power supply; consumer mains; sub-station equipment;

emergency generating plant; main switchboard*, underground and overhead cables; pylons
and all trenches for cabling; street and area lighting; illuminated signs and building flood
lighting.
It excludes communications cables (43 XC); work to existing electrical work (45 XX).
200
Note: Communications cables are to be included in 43 XC. Fire alarm cables are to be
included in 41 XF.
* Where the main switchboard supplies only one building, it shall be considered as a main
distribution board and included in 26 LP.
43 XC External Communications
To provide external communication cables to terminating frames of buildings and to provide
communications systems between buildings and to external site areas.
It includes Telstra (or other installer) work; underground and overhead cables; pylons;
connections to existing cables; external speakers; hooters; clocks; bells; closed circuit TV;
community antenna systems.
It excludes trenches for cabling (42 XE).
44 XS External Special Services

To provide external service or installations not included in other elements.
It includes external connections to items included in special services (29 SS); service tunnels,
ducts and conduits in connection with external reticulation of services elements; dust
extraction plant; incineration plant; bulk storage for medical and industrial gases.
External Alterations
45 XX External Alterations and Renovations
To alter/renovate any existing site works and external services.
It includes resurfacing paved and grassed areas; renovating outbuildings, renewing fencing
and gates; permanent diversion of drainage, cold water and other external service runs.
It excludes renovating existing buildings (31 AR).
Special Provisions
46 YY Special Provisions
Items not included in the net project cost but which may be included in the building contract
or to make up the gross project cost. Such items may include contract contingencies,
provisions for rise and fall, design and supervision fees, loose furniture and loose equipment,
operational maintenance. Each provision should be separately itemised.
As the cost schedule is based on fixed price (lump sum tenders which already include
contingencies and escalations), no further amount is added to the budget for a school for
these sub-elements.
The amount for fees covers only consultants; fees associated with services (electricity, etc.)
and lodgements (permits, etc.) are included with the relevant element.
201
Loose furniture and loose equipment are separate from fitments (15 FT) and special
equipment (16 SE). These latter are usually installed or fixed in place as part of the building
contract. The cost of loose furniture and loose equipment need not necessarily be included
in this contract or attract consultant fees. A decision on this matter should be made for each
project.
Where some part of a building will be due for maintenance during the period that the
builder is in possession, on-going maintenance may be included in the building contract. A
decision on this matter should be made (and the cost determined) for each project.
Note: Builders Work and Allowances

Where work on engineering services and the like is performed by nominated sub-contract or
separate contract and included in any element, any monetary allowance for builder’s profit and
attendance on the nominated sub-contract or separate contract and any builder’s work in
connection therewith shall be included with the element concerned. Any hoisting, testing or
commissioning shall be included with the element concerned.
202
Appendix 2:
Appendix 1 – Building Elements Technical Data Sheets &
Standard Drawings
Charles La Trobe P-12 College

Architect: Taylor Oppenheim
203
Appendix 2 – Technical Data Sheets
APPENDIX 2
TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS

&
STANDARD DRAWINGS
204
Clay and Ablution Trough

1. Fixture Details
1.1 Use
Primary schools and secondary colleges.
1.2 Construction
1800mm long x 450mm wide x 150mm deep, 1.2mm thick satin finish 304 Stainless Steel trough,
with special purpose tapware and waste outlets. Flat rim or fascia to suit project documentation.
1.3 Tapware
► Cold Water Only:
o Ablution Trough – two spray outlets, 20mm minimum/45mm maximum above trough rim
level.
o Clay Trough – right side: one spray outlet, 20mm minimum/45mm maximum above trough
rim level; left side: one laboratory-type gooseneck outlet with tap on pillar, spray outlet
nominally 200mm above trough rim level.
► Hot and Cold Water:

o Ablution Trough – right side: one spray outlet, 20mm minimum/45mm maximum above
trough rim level.
o Clay Trough – left side: one laboratory-type gooseneck outlet with tap on pillar, spray
outlet nominally 200mm above trough rim level.
o Central – one hot and cold swivel spray outlet, 20mm minimum/45mm maximum above
trough rim level, to serve clay trough and ablution trough.
2. Plumbing Connection
2.1 Water Supply

Primary schools normally have cold water only.
Secondary colleges normally have hot and cold water.
2.2 Waste
Combined DN50 trapped outlet to sewer.
DN40 outlet with DN40 gate valve to settling tank or storage tank.
2.3 Treatment Apparatus
Subject to the relevant retail water company and its requirements:
205
► the preferred arrangement is storage tank with contents regularly emptied, disposal not to
sewer
► or, if required by relevant retail water company, PVC settling tank with outlet trapped and
connected to sewer.
3. Trade Waste Application

If trade waste application is required (and provided the installation is a “typical school installation”),
the following data for this fixture should be added to the “Application for Trade Waste Agreement
or Consent”.
Refer also to the relevant retail water company’s “Application Guide – Information Required for
Making a Trade Waste Application” and “Application for Trade Waste Agreement or Consent”.
Sections:
1 to 5 To suit particular school

6(a) Insert “School”
6(b) Insert “School Classes”
7 Insert “Mon. to Fri. between 9.00 am and 4.00 pm”
8(a) Leave blank
8(b) Insert “Traces of clay”
8 Insert relevant data as below:
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Column 5 Column 6
[Number] Clay & Ablution Waste water 80 10 0.16

Trough containing traces of
clay
10 Add “Not applicable”

11 to 13 Circle “No”
14 Insert “Stormwater run-off is directed into a stormwater drainage system”.
4. User Information
All waste containing clay, plaster, etc. is to pass through the storage tank or settling tank.
Note signage.
5. Operation & Maintenance

Provide signage at fixture to read: “This fixture is not to be used for acids, solvents or other
contaminated wastes”.
206
Refer to the publication “Self-Monitoring of Trade Waste Apparatus at Schools” available from the
trade waste section of the relevant retail water company.
207
Drip Trough and Rack
1. Fixture Details
1.1 Use
Normally only secondary colleges.
1.2 Construction
Refer to Fitment Detail (drawing F1).
1.3 Tapware
Chrome-plated hose cock with wall plate, 20 BSP outlet. Locate tap in centre of trough, outlet
2.1 Water Supply
Cold water only.
2.2 Waste
Trapped DN50 outlet to sewer.

Not normally required for this fixture, unless special application, and this Technical Data Sheet may
not then be applicable.

Not normally required for this fixture.
4. User Information
Note signage.

Provide signage at fixture to read: “This fixture is not to be used for acids, solvents or other
contaminated wastes”.
No special requirement.
208
209
Frame Bath
1. Fixture Details
1.1 Use
1.2 Construction
1.3 Tapware
One laboratory-type gooseneck outlet.
Refer also to Solvent Interceptor and Wet Feed Neutralising Tank with Dosing Tank Hydraulics Detail
(drawings H1 and H2).
2.1 Water Supply

Cold water only.
Refer also to Solvent Interceptor and Wet Feed Neutralising Tank with Dosing Tank Hydraulics Detail
(drawings H1 and H2).
2.2 Waste
DN50 outlet to Solvent Interceptor and Wet Feed Neutralising Tank.

Normally Solvent Interceptor and Wet Feed Neutralising Tank with Dosing Tank, all as per detail and
the requirements of the relevant retail water company.
Outlet from Solvent Interceptor and Wet Feed Neutralising Tank to be trapped and connected to
sewer.

Provided the installation is a “typical school installation”’ the following data for this fixture should be
added to the “Application for Trade Waste Agreement or Consent”.
210
Sections:
8(a) Tick “Solvents”
8(b) Leave blank
Col 1 Column 2 Column 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6
[Number] Frame Bath Waste water containing traces of solvents and acids 20 5 0.08

4. User Information
Note signage.

Provide signage to read: “This fixture is only to be used for wastes containing diluted acids and
solvents”.
Refer to publication “Self-Monitoring of Trade Waste Apparatus at Schools” available from the trade
waste section of the relevant retail water company.
211
212
Photographic Trough
1. Fixture Details
1.1 Use
1.2 Construction
1.3 Tapware
One laboratory-type gooseneck outlet.
Refer also to Photographic Trough – Water Connection Detail, Hydraulics Detail (drawing H3).
2.1 Water Supply
Hot and cold.
Refer also to Photographic Trough – Water Connection Detail Hydraulics Detail (drawing H3).
2.2 Waste
DN50 outlet to Mixing Tank.
PVC Mixing Tank to the requirements of the relevant retail water company, minimum capacity to be
greater of 100 litres or 15 minutes retention for each discharge from the trough.
Outlet from Mixing Tank to be trapped and connected to sewer.

Provided the installation is a “typical school installation” the following data for this fixture should be
Sections:

8(a) Tick “Photographic Wastes”
213
8(b) Leave blank

[Number] Photographic Waste water containing traces of 20 5 0.04

Trough photographic solutions from rinsing
operations

4. User Information
Note signage.
All photographic rinsing wastes to pass through the Mixing Tank.
Spent photographic solutions shall be placed in containers for off site disposal by a registered EPA
contractor.
Discharges to Mixing Tank to be not more frequently than one full photographic trough per 15
minutes per 100 litre capacity of Mixing Tank.

Provide signage to read: “This fixture is only to be used for photographic rinsing wastes”.
214
215
216
Potting Trough
1. Fixture Details
1.1 Use
1.2 Construction
1.3 Tapware
Chrome plated hose cock with wall plate, 20 BSP outlet. Locate tap in centre of trough, outlet
2.1 Water Supply
Cold water only.
2.2 Waste
DN50 outlet to Silt Pit.
Silt Pit to the requirements of the relevant retail water company.
Outlet from Silt Pit to be connected to sewer, and bypass Acid Neutralising Tank.

Provided the installation is a “typical school installation” the following data for this fixture should be
Sections:

8(a) Leave blank
8(b) Insert “Traces of soil”
217
[Number] Potting Trough Waste water containing traces of soil 80 10 0.16
[Number] Floor Area Waste water containing traces of soil 40 20 0.08

4. User Information
Note signage.

Provide signage to read: “This fixture is not to be used for acids, solvents or other contaminated
wastes”.
Remove bucket. Clean out soil and other debris from bucket and pit. Replace bucket.
Refer also to publication “Self-Monitoring of Trade Waste Apparatus at Schools” available from the
trade waste section of the relevant retail water company.
218
219
Secondary College Science Room – Plumbing Fixtures

1. Fixture Details
1.1 Construction
Refer to BQSH Section 7.2
1.2 Tapware
2.1 Water Supply
Student benches and fume cupboards normally have cold water only.
Demonstration bench, troughs, sinks in prep area and glass washing sink normally have hot and cold
water.
Demonstration bench to have master control valve to isolate student benches.
2.2 Waste
Wastes generally connected to acid drains.
In ground Acid Neutralising Tank to the requirements of the relevant retail water company.

A secondary college science room usually contains the following fixtures, with wastes that require
treatment:
► demonstration bench with laboratory sink;
► student benches (approximately nine), each with a laboratory sink;
► fume cupboard; and
► laboratory trough.
Science rooms are serviced by a prep area that usually contains the following fixtures, with wastes
that require treatment:
► laboratory sink;
220
► laboratory trough;
► glass washing sink; and
► fume cupboard.
For a “typical school installation” as above with the prep area servicing two science rooms, the
following data should be added to the “Application for Trade Waste Agreement or Consent”.
Sections:

8(a) Tick “Acids/Alkalis”
8(b) Leave blank
[Number] Laboratory Sink Waste water containing traces of acid 220 42 0.42
[Number] Glass Washing Sink Waste water containing traces of acid 40 10 0.08
[Number] Laboratory Trough Waste water containing traces of acid 30 9 0.09
[Number] Fume Cupboard Waste water containing traces of acid 18 4.5 0.04

4. User Information
Note signage
221

Provide signage in prominent central location to read: “Fixtures in this room are not to be used for
the discharge of contaminated wastes other than diluted acids”.
222
Secondary College Home Economics Room

– Plumbing Fixtures
1. Fixture Details
1.1 Construction
1.2 Tapware
2.1 Water Supply
Student benches normally have hot and cold water.
Demonstration bench to have master control valves to isolate student benches.
2.2 Waste
Wastes generally connected to a grease interceptor.
Dishwashing machine normally commercial type, with discharge temperature too high for UPVC pipe
work.

In-ground grease interceptor to the requirements of the relevant retail water company.

A secondary college home economics room usually contains the following fixtures, with wastes that
require treatment:
► demonstration bench with general-purpose sink; and
► student benches (approximately fourteen), each with a general purpose sink.
Home economics rooms are serviced by a prep area that usually contains the following fixtures, with
wastes that require treatment:
► general-purpose sink; and
► dishwashing machine.
223
For a “typical school installation” as above with the prep area servicing two home economics rooms,
the following data should be added to the “Application for Trade Waste Agreement or Consent”.
Sections:

8(a) Tick “Oil/Fat Emulsions”
8(b) Leave blank
[Number] Double Bowl Sink Waste water containing traces of grease 60 30 0.18
[Number] Single Bowl Sink Waste water containing traces of grease 450 150 1.35
[Number] Floor Area Waste water containing traces of grease 10 10 0.03
[Number] Dishwashing Machine Waste water containing traces of grease 15 4 0.04

4. User Information
Note signage.

Provide signage in prominent central location to read: “Fixtures in this room are not to be used for
the discharge of contaminated wastes other than greasy wastes”.
224
Secondary College Trade Area – Plumbing Fixtures

1. Fixture Details
1.1 The “trade area” is part of “technology” and is only applicable to secondary colleges.
Requirements are to be resolved on an individual basis, and may include:
► machine shop;
► automotive practice; and
► electroplating.
Fixtures required can be diverse, and wastes may require specialised treatment.
Water supply may have particular requirements.
1.2 Construction
Refer to BQSH Section 7.2 for general requirements.
Specialised fixtures to suit particular requirements.
1.3 Tapware
2.1 Water Supply
2.2 Waste

To be assessed on an individual basis.

4. User Information
Note signage.
225

Provide appropriate signage at fixtures.
226
227
228
Appendix 3:
Appendix 2 – Technical Data Sheets Postcode Areas within
NatHERS Zones
Mountain Gate Primary School

Architect: Williams Ravi
229
Appendix 3- Postcode Areas Within NatHERS Zones
APPENDIX 3
POSTCODE AREAS WITHIN NATHERS ZONES
(NATHERS – Nationwide House Energy Rating Scheme)
230
NatHERS Zone 20 NatHERS Zone 27

3675 3391 3489
3725 3392 3490
3726 3393 3491
3727 3395 3494
3728 3396 3496
3730 3399 3498
3400 3500
3401 3501
3407 3505
3409 3506
3412 3507
3414 3509
3415 3512
3418 3520
3419 3527
3423 3529
3424 3530
3482 3531
3483 3533
3485 3537
3487 3540
3488 3573
Additional information on NatHERS climate zones can be found at:

http://www.nathers.gov.au/sites/all/themes/custom/nathers_2016/climate-map/index.html
231
Department of Education and Training Appendix 4:
Competition Grade Sporting Facilities
Maribyrnong Sports Centre

Architect: Suters Architects
232
Appendix 4– Competition Grade Sporting Facilities
APPENDIX 4
COMPETITION GRADE SPORTING FACILITIES
233
Competition Grade Netball and Basketball Court Dimensions:
1. Court size
30.50m x 15.25m play area;
3.05m run off zone(obstacle free space required on all sidelines and baselines);
Minimum total free area 36.6m x 21.35m = 781 sqm; and
If the facility has multiple courts, allow for 3.65m of obstacle free space between courts.
2. Ceiling height
Minimum of 7.5m clear ceiling height (accepted Victorian standard), preferably 8.3m.
3. Flooring
Must have a firm, consistent surface on a constant plane without gradient change;
Must comply with the current Slip Resistance Classification;
Natural sprung timber floor; and
Lines should be marked in accordance with Victorian netball and basketball standards.
4. Lighting
Minimum of 300 Lux lighting level.
5. Netball Goal Posts (see next page for diagrams)

Post height: 3.05m;
Post diameter: 60mm to 100mm, round post to be fully padded with maximum 50mm thick
high density foam;
Sleeve: installed into a ground socket and tightly fitted inside the sleeve so it does not
wobble or allow the post to turn.
Ring: 380mm internal diameter, 15mm thick; and
150mm length connection to post, no arms from ring to goal post.
6. Additional Facility Requirements

Circulation and spectator seating to be:
o 2.2m circulation incorporating two rows of seating for team, coaches and
spectators (approx. 50 places); and
o located outside the run off zones.
Toilets / change rooms – aligned with the Department’s facilities entitlement schedule
o Primary - 1 change room area at 351+ students; and
o Secondary – 1 change room area at 401+ students.
1 X scoreboard (it must be placed in a position where it is clearly visible to the officials and
player benches).
234
235
Glossary of Acronyms and Abbreviations

ACCS Australian Carpet Classification Scheme
ACQ Alkaline Copper Quaternary
AG Australian Gas (Installation Code)
Amp Ampere (unit of electric current)
AP Access Point
APAS Australian Paint Approval Scheme
ARI Average Recurrence Interval
AS Australian Standard
AS/NZS Australian Standard/New Zealand Standard
ASE Alarm Signalling Equipment
AV Audio Visual
BCA Building Code of Australia
BQSH Building Quality Standards Handbook
CAC Ceiling Attenuation Class
Cat Category
CCA Copper Chrome Arsenate
CD Campus Distributor
CES Certificate of Electrical Safety
CFC Chlorofluorocarbon
CO2 Carbon Dioxide
CP Consolidation Point (cabling)
CSSD Central Sterile Services Department
dB Decibel
DDA Disability Discrimination Act
DET Department of Education and Training
DHW Domestic Hot Water
DN Normal Diameter
ELCB Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
ELV Extra Low Voltage
EPA Environment Protection Authority
ES Encoding Server
ESD Ecologically Sustainable Design
ESM Emergency & Security Management
ESMU Emergency & Security Management Unit (DET)
EWR Electrical Works Request
FE Fast Ethernet
FFL Finished Floor Level
FHR Fire Hose Reel
FTA Free-to-air
FSTC Field Sound Transmission Class
FWG Floor Waste Gully
GBCA Green Building Council of Australia
GDD Graphical Data Display
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GIC Gas Installation Code (see AG, above)
GPC General Purpose Classroom
GPO General Purpose Outlet
HSRP Hot-Standby Router Protocol
HV High Voltage
HVAC Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning
236
Hz Hertz
ICT Information and Communication Technologies
IDS Intrusion Detection System
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IP Internet Protocol
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO International Standards Organisation
IT Information Technology
ITD Information Technology Division (DET)
j Joule (basic unit of energy)
kAmp Kilo-ampere (1,000 ampere)
kj Kilojoule (1,000 joules)
kW Kilowatt (1,000 watts)
kWh Kilowatt Hour (measure of energy use)
LAN Local Area Network
LC Lucent Connector or Local Connector
LED Light-Emitting Diode
LOSP Light organic solvent-borne preservatives
LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas
Lux Unit of light intensity
LV Low Voltage
LWAPP Lightweight Access Point Protocol
m Metre
mA Milli-ampere
MATV Master Antenna Television
MD3 Ministerial Direction No. 3
MDF Main Distribution Frame
MDF Medium Density Fibre Board
MEP Mechanical Energy Performance
MJ Megajoule (equal to 1,000,000 joules)
mm Millimetre
Μm Micrometre (one millionth of a metre)
MS Media Server
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets
MWh Megawatt Hours
NatHERS Nationwide House Energy Rating Scheme
NMI National Metering Identifier
NRC Noise Reduction Coefficient
NOx Nitrous Oxide
ODF Ozone Depletion Factor
OH&S (OHS) Occupational Heath and Safety
OM Operations Manager
OSPF Open Shortest Path First (routing protocol)
pa Pascal
PA Public Address (System)
p.a. Per Annum
PABX Private Automatic Branch Exchange
PBX Private Branch Exchange
PC (1) Personal Computer
PC (2) Prime Cost
PCB Polychlorinated Biphenyls
PDA Personal Digital Assistant
237
PEC Pigment-emulsified Creosote

POE (1) Post-occupancy Evaluation
POE (2) Power Over Ethernet
PRAV Playgrounds and Recreation Association of Victoria Inc
PREP Project Review and Evaluation Panel
PRMS Physical Resources Management System (now School Maintenance System)
PS Primary School
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride
R Rating (thermal)
RCD Residual Current Device
REC Registered Electrical Contractor
RFC Requests for Comments
Rpm Revolutions Per Minute
RU Rack Unit
SAA Standards Australia Association
SC Secondary College
SDS Special Developmental School
SEPP State Environment Protection Policy
SMEs Small and Medium Enterprises
SMF Synthetic Mineral Fibres
SMS School Maintenance System
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SON High-pressure Sodium Lamps
SPC State Purchase Contracts
SRAB Schools Resource Allocation Branch
SS Storage System
STP Shielded Twisted Pair
SW Stormwater
SWEP Schools Water Efficiency Program
SV Sustainability Victoria
TCD Telstra Commitment Date
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TEFC Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled
TGSI Tactile Ground Surface Indicator
TO Telecommunications Outlet
UPF Ultraviolet Protection Factor
UPVC Unplasticised PVC
UV Ultraviolet
V Volt (the voltage or “potential difference” specified for any appliance)
VGA Video Graphics Array
VIPP Victorian Industry Participation Policy
VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
VoD Video on Demand
VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol
VPN Virtual Private Network
VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
W Watt (measure of the power rating of electric appliances)
W/sq.m. Watts per square metre
WAP Wireless Access Point
WC Water Closet/Toilet
WELS Water Efficiency Labelling and Standards
WEP Wired Equivalent Protocol
238
WERS Window Energy Rating Scheme

WiNS Wireless Networks for Schools
WLAN Wireless LAN
WoVG Whole of Victorian Government
XLPE Extra Long Polyethylene
239

Building Quality Standards Handbook

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Building Quality Standards Handbook

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Building Quality

Document owner: Priorities and Policy Unit,

Front cover: Arnolds Creek Primary School

Published by the Victorian School Building Authority

©State of Victoria (Department of Education

The copyright in this document is owned by the

An educational institution situated in

Authorised by the Department of Education and Training,

3. MODERN SCHOOL DESIGN – AN OVERVIEW 9

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

6. SUBSTRUCTURE, SUPERSTRUCTURE & FINISHES 38

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

6.7.5 Selection and Detailing of Operable Walls 53

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

7.3 Sanitary Plumbing 78

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

7.10.3 Supply – General 106

8. EXTERNAL SERVICES 129

9. COMMUNICATION SERVICES 138

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

9.2.5 VicSmart Network 142

10. SITE WORKS & SCHOOL LANDSCAPING 149

11. WORKPLACE HEALTH & SAFETY 170

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

11.2 Victorian Occupational Health and Safety Act 2004 170

12. PROJECT COMPLETION – BUILDING MANUALS & MAINTENANCE 177

APPENDIX 1 BUILDING ELEMENTS 186

APPENDIX 2 TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS & STANDARD DRAWINGS 204

APPENDIX 3 POSTCODE AREAS WITHIN NATHERS ZONES 230

APPENDIX 4 COMPETITION GRADE SPORTING FACILITIES 233

Glossary of Acronyms and Abbreviations 236

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

What is the Building Quality Standards Handbook?

What is the role of infrastructure in effective education delivery?

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

The Department is committed to providing an environment which:

1.1 Key Resources

Project Management Framework

Project Management Framework

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

Key Web-based Resources

Emergency & Security Management

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

Castlemaine Secondary College

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

2.1 Bushfire Provision – Ministerial Direction No. 3

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

2.2 Victorian Industry Participation Policy (VIPP)

► $1 million or more in regional Victoria or

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

Northern School for Autism

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

3. MODERN SCHOOL DESIGN – AN OVERVIEW

For further information and resources on school design, visit:

Design Principles to Consider

3. Simple and Intuitive use

5. Tolerance for error

6. Low Physical Effort

Building Quality Standards Handbook May 2017

7. Size and Space for Approach and Use

Future Use of Learning Spaces

Classrooms – Flexibility of Learning Spaces

Teacher Support Spaces

Student Support Spaces